Clinical guidelines
Diagnosis
and treatment manual for curative programmes in hospitals and dispensaries

guidance for prescribing

2010 EDITION

© Médecins Sans Frontières – January 2010
All rights reserved for all countries. No reproduction, translation and adaptation may be done without the prior permission of the Copyright owner.
ISBN 2-906498-81-5

Clinical guidelines

Diagnosis and treatment manual
Editorial Committee:

I. Broek (MD), N. Harris (MD), M. Henkens (MD), H. Mekaoui (MD),
P.P. Palma (MD), E. Szumilin (MD) and V. Grouzard (N, general editor)
Contributors:

P. Albajar (MD), S. Balkan (MD), P. Barel (MD), E. Baron (MD), M. Biot (MD), F. Boillot (S),
L. Bonte (L), M.C. Bottineau (MD), M.E. Burny (N), M. Cereceda (MD), F. Charles (MD),
M.J de Chazelles (MD), D. Chédorge (N), A.S. Coutin (MD), C. Danet (MD), B. Dehaye (S),
K. Dilworth (MD), F. Fermon (N), B. Graz (MD), B. Guyard-Boileau (MD), G. Hanquet (MD),
G. Harczi (N), M. van Herp (MD), C. Hook (MD), K. de Jong (P), S. Lagrange (MD), X. Lassalle (AA),
D. Laureillard (MD), M. Lekkerkerker (MD), J. Maritoux (Ph), J. Menschik (MD), D. Mesia (MD),
A. Minetti (MD), R. Murphy (MD), J. Pinel (Ph), J. Rigal (MD), M. de Smet (MD), S. Seyfert (MD),
F. Varaine (MD), B. Vasset (MD)
(S) Surgeon, (L) Laboratory technician, (MD) Medical Doctor, (N) Nurse, (AA) Anaesthetist-assistant,
(Ph) Pharmacist, (P) Psychologist

We would like to thank the following doctors for their invaluable help: O. Bouchaud,
E. Bottieau, A. Briend, M. Boussinesq, F. Chappuis, J.P. Chippaux, J. Dupouy Camet,
F. Delange, O. Fontaine, P.Y. Fournier, F. Van Gompel, M. Goyffon, S. Halperin, J. Janin,
B. Lagardère, J.D. Law-Koune, F. Nosten, G. Potel, M. Rosenheim, J. Ross, C.E. Rupprecht,
J. Saló Raïch, P. Pérez Simarro, M. Soriano, K. Stille, T. Vallot, P. Vigeral, M. Warrell,
A.Weissman and N. White.
Translated from French by K. Alberti, V. Grouzard, N. Harris and C. Lopez-Serraf
Illustrations: Germain Péronne
Design and layout: Evelyne Laissu

Foreword
This diagnostic and treatment manual is designed for use by medical professionals involved in curative care at the dispensary and hospital levels.
We have tried to respond in the simplest and most practical way possible to the questions and problems faced by field medical staff, using the accumulated field experience of Médecins Sans Frontières, the recommendations of reference organizations such as the World Health Organization (WHO) and specialized works in each field.
This edition touches on the curative and, to a lesser extent, the preventive aspects of the main diseases encountered in the field. The list is incomplete, but covers the essential needs. This manual is used not only in programmes supported by Médecins Sans Frontières, but also in other programmes and in other contexts. It is notably an integral part of the
WHO Emergency Health Kit.
Médecins Sans Frontières has also issued French and Spanish editions. Editions in other languages have also been produced in the field.
This manual is a collaborative effort of medical professionals from many disciplines, all with field experience.
Despite all efforts, it is possible that certain errors may have been overlooked in this manual. Please inform the authors of any errors detected. It is important to remember, that if in doubt, it is the responsibility of the prescribing medical professional to ensure that the doses indicated in this manual conform to the manufacturer’s specifications.
The authors would be grateful for any comments or criticisms to ensure that this manual continues to evolve and remains adapted to the reality of the field.
Comments should be addressed to:
Médecins Sans Frontières - Guidelines
4 rue St-Sabin - 75011 Paris
Tel.: +33.(0)1.40.21.29.29
Fax: +33.(0)1.48.06.68.68
e.mail: guide.clinical@msf.org
This manual is also available on the internet at www.msf.org. As treatment protocols for certain diseases are constantly changing, medical staff are encouraged to check this website for updates of this edition.

4

How to use this manual
Organization
There are two easy ways to find information in this manual:
– The table of contents at the beginning of the manual with the number and title of each chapter, their subsections and page numbers.
– An alphabetical index at the end of the manual with the names of the diseases and symptoms. Names of drugs
The International Non-proprietary Name (INN) of drugs is used in this manual. A list of current proprietary names can be found at the end of the manual.

Abbreviations used
Units
kg g mg µg IU
M
mmol ml dl

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

kilogram gram milligram microgram international unit million millimole millilitre decilitre

Administration route
PO
IM
IV
SC

=
=
=
=

per os = oral intramuscular intravenous subcutaneous For certain drugs
NSAID
= nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drug
SMX + TMP = sulfamethoxazole + trimethoprim = cotrimoxazole

Expression of doses
– Doses of the combination sulfamethoxazole + trimethoprim (cotrimoxazole) are expressed as SMX + TMP, for example:
Children: 30 mg SMX + 6 mg TMP/kg/day
Adults: 1600 mg SMX + 320 mg TMP/day
– Doses of the combination amoxicillin + clavulanic acid (co-amoxiclav) are expressed in amoxicillin.
– Doses of certain antimalarial drugs are expressed in base (and not in salts).
– Doses of iron are expressed in elemental iron (and not in ferrous salts).

5

Table of contents
1

Introduction

page 8

A few symptoms and syndromes

page 15

Respiratory diseases

page 47

3

Gastrointestinal disorders

page 81

4

Skin diseases

page 95

5

Eye diseases

page 119

6

Parasitic diseases

page 129

7

Bacterial diseases

page 163

2

6

Shock (17) Seizures (23) Fever (26) Pain (29) Anaemia (37) Severe acute malnutrition (40)

Rhinitis and rhinopharyngitis [common cold] (49) Acute sinusitis (50)
Acute laryngitis (51) Acute pharyngitis (53) Diphtheria (55) Otitis (57)
Whooping cough [pertussis] (60) Bronchitis (62) Bronchiolitis (64)
Acute pneumonia (66) Staphylococcal pneumonia (72) Asthma (73)
Pulmonary tuberculosis (78)

Acute diarrhoea (83) Shigellosis (86) Amoebiasis (88) Disorders of the stomach and duodenum (89) Stomatitis (92)

Dermatology (97) Scabies (98) Lice [pediculosis] (101) Superficial fungal infections (103) Bacterial skin infections (105) Cutaneous anthrax (109) Treponematoses (111) Leprosy (113) Herpes simplex and herpes zoster (116) Other skin disorders (117)

Xerophthalmia [vitamin A deficiency] (121) Conjunctivitis (123)
Trachoma (126) Other pathologies: onchocerciasis, loiasis, pterygium, cataract (128)

Protozoan infections: Malaria (131) Human african trypanosomiasis (139)
American trypanosomiasis (142) Leishmaniases (144) Intestinal protozoan infections [parasitic diarrhoea] (147)
Helminthic infections: Flukes (149) Schistosomiasis (150) Cestodes (152)
Nematode infections (154) Filariasis (157)

Bacterial meningitis (165) Tetanus (170) Typhoid fever (174)
Brucellosis (176) Plague (178) Leptospirosis (180) Relapsing fever
[borreliosis] (182) Eruptive rickettsioses (185)

8

Viral diseases

page 187

9

Genito-urinary diseases

page 221

Measles (189) Poliomyelitis (192) Rabies (194) Viral hepatitis (198)
Dengue fever (201) Viral haemorrhagic fevers (204) HIV infection and
AIDS (207)

Uro-nephrologic diseases:
Urolithiasis (223) Acute cystitis (224) Acute pyelonephritis (226) Acute prostatitis (228)
Genital infections (GI) (229):
Urethral discharge (231) Abnormal vaginal discharge (233) Genital ulcers (236) Lower abdominal pain in women (239) Upper genital tract infections (240) Veneral warts (243) Major genital infections summary (244)
Metrorrhagia (246)

10

Medical and minor surgical procedures

page 251

11

Other conditions

page 289

Annexes

page 303

Main references

page 318

Index

page 320

Dressings (253) Treatment of a simple wound (256) Burns (266)
Abscesses (274) Pyomyositis (279) Leg ulcers (281) Venomous bites and stings (283) Dental infections (287)

Hypertension (291) Heart failure (294) Endemic goitre and iodine deficiency (297) Psychological disorders (298)

The interagency emergency health kit/Annex 2 - WHO (305) Practical advice for writing medical certificates in the event of sexual violence (312)
List of the drugs mentioned in this guide, including the INN as well as the most common synonyms and proprietary names (315)

7

Introduction

Introduction
Curative care is one component of health programmes. It is important to remember that the other components also need to be developed. These components include programmes focusing on: palliative care (including pain control), psychological support, prevention (including the Expanded Programme of Immunization (EPI), maternal-child health etc.), nutrition, water, hygiene and sanitation.

I - The objectives of curative care programmes
– At an individual level: to cure the patient of disease and to minimize or prevent the consequences for the individual and those in close contact (i.e. preventing transmission when possible).
– At a population level: to reduce the mortality and the consequences of morbidity of the most prevalent and important diseases in the population.
– For certain endemic diseases (tuberculosis, leprosy, trypanosomiasis etc.): curative care can reduce transmission if a large enough proportion of the population is treated.
Often, this objective is only achieved through specific control programmes which are not extensively discussed in this manual.

II - Strategy
When defining a strategy for a medical intervention, medical decision makers must take into account the priority diseases: those with the highest frequency and mortality.
Priority diseases vary with context (conflict, natural disasters, etc.) and geographical region. Nevertheless, there is a relatively standard epidemiological profile with quantitative variations. An initial assessment, both qualitative (disease distribution) and if possible quantitative (mortality, incidence, prevalence and case fatality), is still necessary. This evaluation identifies the most common diseases (diarrhoea, measles, acute respiratory tract infections, malaria, wounds etc.) and the population groups exposed and at risk (children under 5 years, pregnant women).
These diseases and populations constitute the priority ‘targets’ of a programme.
For rehabilitation programmes and programmes to support pre-existing health structures, detailed information is sometimes available from the health structures or from the Ministry of Health. The evaluation consists of assessing the information available and filling in any missing data.
In very isolated contexts or when there is population displacement, no information is available and it is always necessary to do a complete assessment.
Once the priority diseases are identified and health policy, means and resources (list of essential drugs, Ministry of Health protocols, staff and level of training, health services, functioning programmes etc.) are known, programmes can be defined and initiated.
This manual and the manual, Essential drugs – practical guidelines, are tools to help in the definition and implementation (protocols, training, retraining) of curative programmes.

8

Introduction

III - Means to consider and measures to develop
In certain situations (displaced populations, refugees), entire systems must be created.
In other situations, an existing system is evaluated and may be supported if necessary.

Infrastructure and health staff
The training and competence level of medical staff (medical auxilaries, medical assistants, nurses, midwives, doctors etc.) vary by country and health structure (health post, dispensary, health centre, hospital).
Evaluation should identify their technical level while recognising that in some situations, the staff have not always received prior training.

Drugs
Selection of drugs depends on the priorities and needs, but also on other criteria:
– effectiveness, local resistance, adverse effects
– administration route, length of treatment, number of doses per day, expected compliance – stability, availability, price
The WHO Essential Medicines List is the basic framework, but the choice of drugs has to be adapted to the epidemiological profile, the competence of the staff and the possibility (or lack thereof) to refer very sick patients.
Certain drugs proposed in this manual are not included in the WHO Essential
Medicines List.

Treatment protocols
Standard protocols improve diffusion and use of effective treatment. They should:
– give precise instructions (INN of the medication, indications, dosage, route of administration, length of treatment, contra-indications, adverse effects, precautions);
– favour the most effective drug with the least adverse effects;
– be supported by clinical, epidemiological and scientific data and be discussed and agreed upon by the users;
– be practical, simple, understandable and adapted to the field;
– facilitate the training and retraining of medical staff;
– facilitate the organization of health services (e.g. management, pharmacy);
– be evaluated.
The treatment protocols include drug prescription, as well as other measures (curative and preventive), indications for referral to a higher level of care and an indication of which diseases must be reported (cholera, measles etc.).
Formulation depends on the training of the prescribing medical staff: doctors are trained in terms of diseases (pneumonia, malaria etc.) while medical auxilaries use a symptomatic approach (cough and difficulty in breathing, fever and chills etc.).

9

Introduction

Protocols must take into account the cultural context (e.g. to discourage covering a febrile child if that is the cultural practise) and the environment (avoid the classic mistakes, e.g. recommending that water be boiled when fuel or firewood is scarce).
The protocols must take into account drug supply (what is the availability?) and presentation (e.g. are the antimalarials labelled in salts or base?).
Protocols must facilitate compliance. Short treatments with few doses are recommended. Single dose treatment, when indicated, is the best choice. The number of different drugs prescribed must also be limited whenever possible. For similar effectiveness oral or rectal drugs are preferred over injections in order to reduce complications, cost, risk of transmission of hepatitis B, HIV etc.

Diagnostic methods
The methods used depend on the services available and the technical level of the staff.
They have a direct influence on the establishment of protocols and the content of the drug list. Usually diagnosis is made on a basis of history taking, clinical examination and basic laboratory tests (as defined by the WHO).
A - History taking
A medical consultation is a special occasion to listen to the patient and to ask relevant questions to determine the cause of the complaint.
During the interview, the history of the current illness, the signs and symptoms, prior illness and any treatment already received are specified.
Only by listening attentively is it possible to put the patient’s complaint in a larger context of suffering. For example, during a consultation, physical violence, sexual violence or abuse may come to light, while this type of complaint is rarely expressed spontaneously by the victim. It is the clinician’s responsibility to take a global view of the situation that includes: psychological, legal (completing a medical certificate) and social aspects and direct clinical care.
B - Clinical examination
Clinical examination is essential: the diagnosis and treatment depend directly on it’s quality. It is important to know or to learn a technique of clinical assessment that is both complete and rapid, keeping in mind the need for quality and efficiency. A technique, or a strategy, is even more important in field conditions as the number of patients often stretches the medical possibilities and apart from basic laboratory examinations, the complementary examinations are often nonexistent.
The following examination framework is an example that should be adapted to each case.
It emphasises the advantages of a systematic approach.
Context of the examination
– Routine examination: e.g. prenatal consultation or Mother and Child Health (MCH).
The emphasis of the examination is predefined by the programme objectives
(nutritional state, anaemia, prevention of tetanus etc.).
– As a result of a complaint: the usual situation at a dispensary. The most common complaints are fever, pain, diarrhoea and cough.

10

Introduction

A few rules
– A systematic approach reduces omissions and saves time.
– An interpreter may be needed; however, translation does not always accurately reflect the complaints of the patient. Learning the names of the main clinical signs and common diseases in the local language helps overcome this problem. The choice of an interpreter must take into consideration the sex (e.g. a female for gynaecology and obstetrics) and the acceptability by the patient (respecting confidentiality).
The examination
– Physical examination: the patient should be undressed if possible.
• first look at the general condition of the patient in order to judge the severity of illness: nutritional status (weight and, in children, height), hydration, anaemia, temperature. • examine each system: use a systematic approach starting with the system related to the patient’s complaint.
– Laboratory examinations: if necessary and if available
– Imaging techniques: x-ray and ultrasonography, if necessary and if available
C - Role of the laboratory
A basic medical laboratory can play an important and irreplaceable role. However, technical constraints (the need for a trained and competent technician), logistical constraints (regular supply of material, reagents, electricity), time constraints (each examination takes a minimum time) and quality constraints (which depends on all the points just mentioned) should not be underestimated.
Two levels of examinations can be defined:
Basic examination
Blood

Haematology
• haemoglobin (Lovibond)
• WBC and differentials
Transfusion
• blood group + rhesus
• HIV, hepatitis B and C, syphilis RPR
Thick and thin films
• malaria, some filariases, trypanosomiasis, visceral leishmaniasis, borreliosis
Rapid tests
• malaria
• HIV, hepatitis B and C etc.

Sputum

Koch’s bacillus

Urine

reagent strip test (glucose, protein)

Genital discharge gonococcus, trichomonas

Stool

• examination of wet preparation (eggs, helminths, cysts, protozoa)
• scotch-test

CSF

• look for and identify pathogens (including rapid test for meningitis)
• cell count and protein (Pandy test)

11

Introduction

More specific examinations are defined in relation to the programme.
A laboratory can be used in three complementary ways:
– Clinically: examinations are requested for individuals depending on the clinical picture. The aim is to orient a diagnosis (e.g. leucocytosis in a full blood count) or to determine or eliminate an aetiology (e.g. stool examination for parasites, blood smear, rapid test).
– Epidemiologically: the objective is to facilitate diagnosis and treatment. By studying a sample of patients presenting with similar clinical profiles an aetiology can be specified. The validity (sensitivity and specificity) of the particular symptoms or syndrome can also be studied. Through these means appropriate treatment protocols can be introduced for all patients presenting with the same symptoms or syndrome.
For example: is the syndrome non-febrile bloody diarrhoea predictive of amoebic dysentery? An investigation of approximately 100 patients will answer this question.
If a significant proportion of the samples are positive, an appropriate treatment can be given to all patients presenting with this syndrome. This approach, while practical during some epidemics, should not stop the practitioner from considering differential diagnosis as the sensitivity of a syndrome is rarely 100%
– Operational research: laboratory examinations are also used during resistance studies
(malaria) and for other operational research.
The combination of clinical examination and complementary examinations should result in an aetiological diagnosis if possible, if not, a symptomatic or syndromic diagnosis. Treatment
Prescribe a treatment:
– aetiological (treat the cause)
– symptomatic
– give relevant advice, whether or not the patient was treated or refer.

Recording data and the individual patient record
Record the essential information in a register and on an individual patient record (see the example of a health card, annex 3), an examination card or in a family health booklet. Information should include:
– diagnosis is important positive and negative signs (e.g. bloody diarrhoea without fever)
– laboratory examinations requested and the results
– drugs prescribed (in INN), dosage, duration

Training
Training and retraining of staff should be carried out according to their technical level
(this should be evaluated) and is therefore context dependent. This manual and other documents may be useful tools in defining and meeting training objectives.

Public awareness and dissemination of information
For many reasons (lack of information, different cultural perceptions), a significant proportion of seriously ill, but curable patients may not present at health centres for treatment, or may present only when they are in the advanced stages of disease. Public awareness and dissemination of information at all levels, along with the quality of services, contribute to increase the proportion of the population receiving appropriate care. 12

Introduction

IV - Organization and management
They are related to the services and resources available.

V - Programme evaluation
Programme evaluation is carried out at different levels:

Functioning
Assessment of activities, trends in case fatality rates, respect of protocols, management of the pharmacy, drug consumption, quality of prescriptions, orders, reports, the register etc.
This information helps in programme management (orders, staffing). The morbidity data collected at the dispensary level and their analysis contribute to epidemiological surveillance. Trends of priority diseases by person, time and place can be monitored
(see Epidemiological reports, annex 2) and an early warning systems can be put in place.

Coverage of need
This depends on the accessibility and on the population’s perception of the health care system. The goal is to determine the proportion of sick people who are actually being treated. The evaluation is feasible by surveying representative samples of the population (see below).

Impact on the population
The evaluation is complex. It refers to the objectives of reducing mortality, morbidity, etc. Survey protocols exist but are very difficult to put into practice (large sample size) and the surveys must be repeated to show trends.

13

1
CHAPTER 1

A few symptoms and syndromes
Shock

17

Seizures

23

Fever

26

Pain

29

Anaemia

37

Severe acute malnutrition

40

1. A few symptomes and syndromes

1

Shock
Acute circulatory failure leading to inadequate tissue perfusion which, if prolonged, results in irreversible organ failure. Mortality is high without early diagnosis and treatment. Aetiology and pathophysiology
Hypovolaemic shock
– Absolute hypovolaemia by significant intravascular fluid depletion:
• Internal or external haemorrhage: post-traumatic, peri or postoperative, obstetrical
(ectopic pregnancy, uterine rupture etc.), blood loss due to an underlying condition
(gastrointestinal ulcer etc.). A loss of 30 to 50% of blood volume will lead to haemorrhagic shock
• Dehydration: severe diarrhoea and vomiting, cholera, intestinal obstruction, diabetic ketoacidosis or hyperosmolar coma etc.
• Plasma leaks: extensive burns, crushed limbs etc.
– Relative hypovolaemia due to acute vasodilation without concomitant increase in intravascular volume:
• Anaphylactic shock with extreme vasodilation: allergic reaction to insect bites or stings; drugs, principally antibiotics, acetylsalicylic acid, neuromuscular blockers, colloid solutions (dextran, modified gelatin fluid); equine sera; vaccines containing egg protein; food etc.
• Acute haemolysis: severe malaria, drug poisoning (rare)

Septic shock
By a complex mechanism often including vasodilation, heart failure and absolute hypovolaemia. Cardiogenic shock
By decrease of cardiac output:
– Direct injury to the myocardium: infarction, contusion, trauma, poisoning or drug toxicity – Indirect mechanism: arrhythmia, constrictive pericarditis, haemopericardium, pulmonary embolism, tension pneumothorax, valvular disease, severe anaemia, beri beri etc.

Clinical features
Signs common to most forms of shock
–
–
–
–

pallor, mottled skin, cold extremities, sweating, thirst rapid and thready pulse often only detected on major arteries (femoral or carotid) low blood pressure (BP), narrow pulse pressure, BP sometimes undetectable cyanosis, respiratory signs (dyspnoea, tachypnoea) are often present in varying degrees depending on the mechanism
– consciousness may be maintained, but anxiety, confusion, agitation or apathy are common – oliguria or anuria
17

Shock

Signs specific to the mechanism of shock
– Hypovolaemic shock
The common signs of shock listed above are typical of hypovolaemic shock.
Warning: do not underestimate hypovolaemia. Signs of shock may not become evident until a 50% loss of blood volume.
– Allergic or anaphylactic shock
• significant and sudden drop in BP
• tachycardia +++
• frequent cutaneous signs, rash, urticaria, Quincke’s oedema
• possible respiratory signs, dyspnoea or bronchospasm
– Septic shock
• high fever, or rarely, hypothermia (< 36°C), rigors, confusion
• in the initial phase the BP may be maintained, but rapidly follows the same pattern as for hypovolaemic shock
– Cardiogenic shock
• Respiratory signs of left ventricular failure (acute pulmonary oedema) are dominant: tachypnoea, crepitations on ausculation
• Signs of right ventricular failure: raised jugular venous pressure, hepatojugular reflux, sometimes alone, more often associated with signs of left ventricular failure
The aetiological diagnosis is oriented by:
– the context: trauma, insect bite, ongoing medical treatment etc.
– the clinical examination:
• skin pinch consistent with dehydration
• thoracic pain from a myocardial infarction or pulmonary embolus
• abdominal pain or rigidity of the abdominal wall from peritonitis, abdominal distension from intestinal obstruction
• bloody stool, vomiting blood
• subcutaneous crepitations, likely anaerobic infection
• fever

Treatment
Symptomatic and aetiological treatment must take place simultaneously.

All cases
– Emergency +++: immediate attention to the patient.
– Lay the patient flat, warm the patient, elevate legs (except in acute pulmonary oedema). – Insert a peripheral IV line using a large calibre catheter (16G in adults).
– Oxygen therapy, assisted ventilation in the event of respiratory distress.
– Assisted ventilation and external cardiac compression in the event of cardiac arrest.
– Intensive monitoring of: consciousness, pulse, BP, respiratory rate, hourly urinary output (insert an urinary catheter) and skin mottling.

18

1. A few symptomes and syndromes

1

Specific causes
– Haemorrhage
• Control bleeding (compression, tourniquet, surgical haemostasis)
• Determine blood group
• Priority +++: restore vascular volume as quickly as possible
Insert 2 peripheral IV lines using large calibre catheters (16G in adults) with plasma substitute: replace 1.5 times the estimated losses and/or Ringer Lactate or 0.9% sodium chloride: replace 3 times the estimated losses
• Transfuse: classically once estimated blood loss represents approximately 40% of blood volume or if haematocrit is < 20%.
First, verify blood group (as a default give O negative) and ensure screening for HIV, hepatitis B and C etc.
In the absence of HIV and hepatitis B and C screening, see Note, page 38.
– Acute dehydration

Administer preferably Ringer Lactate or, if not available, 0.9% sodium chloride.
For information:
Children under 1 year: 100 ml/kg over 6 hours according to the following protocol:
30 ml/kg the first hour followed by 70 ml/kg over the following 5 hours
Children over 1 year and adults: 100 mg/kg over 3 hours according to the following protocol: 30 ml/kg over 30 minutes followed by 70 ml/kg over the following 2 1/2 hours.
In practice, only reduce the IV rate once the patient has recovered pulse, BP and consciousness. Be careful to avoid fluid overload in young children and the elderly.
Note: in severely malnourished children the IV rate and solution are different than those for healthy children (see Severe acute malnutrition, page 40).

– Anaphylactic shock
• Determine the causal agent
• Stop any injections or infusions in course, but if in place, maintain the IV line

• epinephrine (adrenaline) is the treatment of choice:
Children: dilute 0.25 mg in 9 ml of water for injection and inject by direct IV, ml by ml, until normal BP is reached and tachycardia is reduced.
Adults: dilute 1 mg in 9 ml of water for injection and inject by direct IV ml by ml until a normal BP is reached and tachycardia is reduced.
If it is impossible to find IV access, epinephrine may be given sublingually at the same doses as by IV. In less severe cases, it can also be given SC: 0.3 to 0.5 mg to be repeated every 5 to 10 minutes if necessary.
In the event of persistent shock, administration of IV epinephrine at a constant rate by a syringe pump (see final box) may be necessary for 6 to 24 hours: 0.1 to
0.5 microgram/kg/minute according to the clinical evolution.

• Fluid replacement with Ringer Lactate or 0.9% sodium chloride

19

Shock

• Corticosteroids have no effect in the acute phase. However, they must be given once the patient is stabilized to prevent recurrence in the short term hydrocortisone hemisuccinate IV or IM
Children: 1 to 5 mg/kg/24 hours in 2 or 3 injections
Adults: 200 mg every 4 hours
• In patients with bronchospasm: epinephrine is effective. If the spasm persists give
10 puffs of inhaled salbutamol.
• Special situation: to prevent placental vasoconstriction in pregnant women, first use high dose ephedrine: 25 to 50 mg IV. If there is no immediate improvement, use epinephrine (adrenaline) at the doses given above.
– Septic shock

• Vascular fluid replacement with plasma substitute or Ringer Lactate or 0.9 % sodium chloride • Use of vasoconstrictors: dopamine IV at a constant rate by syringe pump (see final box): 10 to
20 micrograms/kg/minute or, if not available epinephrine (adrenaline) IV at a constant rate by syringe pump (see final box): from
0.1 microgram/kg/minute. Increase the dose progressively until a clinical improvement is seen.
• Look for the origin of the infection (abscess; ENT, pulmonary, digestive, gynaecological or urological infection etc.)
• Antibiotic therapy according to the origin of infection:
Origin
Cutaneous staphylococci, streptococci
Pulmonary
pneumococci, Haemophilus influenzae

Antibiotic therapy

Alternative

cloxacillin + gentamicin ampicillin or ceftriaxone
+/- gentamicin

co-amoxiclav or ceftriaxone
+ ciprofloxacin

Intestinal or biliary enterobacteria, anaerobic bacteria, enterococci co-amoxiclav + gentamicin

ceftriaxone + gentamicin
+ metronidazole

Gynaecological streptococci, gonococci, anaerobic bacteria, E. coli

co-amoxiclav + gentamicin

ceftriaxone + gentamicin
+ metronidazole

Urinary enterobacteria, enterococci

ampicillin + gentamicin

ceftriaxone + ciprofloxacin

Other or undetermined

ampicillin + gentamicin

ceftriaxone + ciprofloxacin

ampicillin IV

Children and adults: 150 to 200 mg/kg/day in 3 injections (every 8 hours)

20

1. A few symptomes and syndromes cloxacillin IV
Children: 100 mg/kg/day in 3 injections (every 8 hours)
Adults: 3 g/day in 3 injections (every 8 hours) co-amoxiclav (amoxicillin + clavulanic acid) slow IV
Children: 75 to 150 mg/kg/day in 3 injections (every 8 hours)
Adults: 3 g/day in 3 injections (every 8 hours) ceftriaxone slow IV1
Children: 100 mg/kg as a single injection on the first day, then 50 mg/kg/day the following days
Adult: 2 g once daily ciprofloxacin PO (by nasogastric tube)
Children: 15 to 30 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses
Adult: 1500 mg/day in 2 divided doses gentamicin IM
Children and adults: 3 to 6 mg/kg/day in 1 or 2 injections metronidazole IV
Children: 20 to 30 mg/kg/day in 3 infusions (every 8 hours)
Adults: 1 to 1.5 g/day in 3 infusions (every 8 hours)

• Corticosteroids: not recommended, the adverse effects outweigh the benefits
– Cardiogenic shock
The objective is to restore efficient cardiac output. The treatment of cardiogenic shock depends on its mechanism.
• Acute left heart failure with pulmonary oedema
Acute pulmonary oedema (see Heart failure in adults, page 294).
In the event of worsening signs with vascular collapse, use a strong inotrope: dopamine IV at a constant rate by syringe pump (see final box):
3 to 10 micrograms/kg/minute
Once the haemodynamic situation allows (normal BP, reduction in the signs of peripheral circulatory failure), nitrates or morphine may be cautiously introduced.
Digoxin should no longer be used for cardiogenic shock, except in the rare cases when a supraventricular tachycardia has been diagnosed by ECG. Correct hypoxia before using digoxin. digoxin slow IV
Children: one injection of 0.010 mg/kg (10 micrograms/kg), to be repeated up to
4 times/24 hours if necessary
Adults: one injection of 0.25 to 0.5 mg, then 0.25 mg 3 or 4 times/24 hours if necessary • Cardiac tamponade: restricted cardiac filling as a result of haemopericardium or pericarditis. Requires immediate pericardial tap after restoration of blood volume +++
1 The solvent of ceftriaxone for IM injection contains lidocaine. Ceftriaxone reconstituted using this solvent must
NEVER

be administered by IV route. For IV administration, water for injection must always be used.

21

1

Shock

• Tension pneumothorax: drainage of the pneumothorax
• Symptomatic pulmonary embolism: treat with an anticoagulant in a hospital setting The administration of dopamine or epinephrine (adrenaline) at a constant rate requires that certain conditions be met:
– medical supervision in a hospital setting
– exclusive use of one vein (no other infusion or injection by this vein), avoid using the brachial site;
– use of an electric syringe pump
– progressive increase and adaptation of doses depending on clinical evolution
– intensive monitoring of drug administration, particularly during syringe changes
Example:

dopamine:

10 micrograms/kg/minute in a patient weighing 60 kg
Hourly dose: 10 (micrograms) x 60 (kg) x 60 (minutes) = 36 000 micrograms/hour =
36 mg/hour
In a 50 ml syringe, dilute one 200 mg-ampoule of dopamine with 0.9% sodium chloride to make a volume of 50 ml. Final solution contains 4 mg dopamine/ml.
For a dose of 36 ml/hour, administer the solution (4 mg/ml) at 9 ml/hour.
If there is no electric syringe pump, dilution in an infusion bag may be considered.
However, it is important to consider the risks involved with this type of administration
(accidental bolus or insufficient dose). The infusion must be constantly monitored to prevent any, even small, change from the prescribed rate of administration.
Example:

epinephrine:

0.2 microgram/kg/minute in a 60 kg patient
Rate: 0.2 (microgram) x 60 (kg) = 12 micrograms/minute
Dilute 2 ampoules of 1 mg (2 x 1000 micrograms) of epinephrine in 250 ml of 0.9% sodium chloride to make a solution of 8 micrograms/ml.
For a dose of 12 micrograms/minute, administer 1.5 ml/minute (12 ÷ 8 = 1.5)
Knowing that 1 ml = 20 drops, administer 20 (drops) x 1.5 ml/1 (minute) = 30 drops per minute. 22

1. A few symptomes and syndromes

1

Seizures
– Involuntary movements of cerebral origin (stiffness followed by clonic movements), accompanied by a loss of consciousness, and often urinary incontinence (generalized tonic-clonic seizures).
It is important to distinguish seizures from ‘pseudo-seizures’ (e.g. in hysteria or tetany) during which consciousness may appear altered but is not lost.
– 2 priorities: stop the seizures and determine the cause. In pregnant women, eclamptic seizures require specific medical and obstetrical care (see page 25).

Initial treatment
During a seizure
– Protect from trauma, maintain airway, place patient in ‘recovery position’, loosen clothing. – Most seizures are quickly self-limited. Immediate administration of an anticonvulsant is not systematic. If generalized seizure lasts more than 3 minutes, use diazepam to stop it: diazepam Children: 0.5 mg/kg preferably rectally1 without exceeding 10 mg.
IV administration is possible (0.3 mg/kg over 2 or 3 minutes), only if means of ventilation are available (Ambu bag and mask).
Adults: 10 mg rectally or slowly IV.
In all cases:
• Dilute 10 mg (2 ml) of diazepam in 8 ml of 5% glucose or 0.9% sodium chloride.
• If convulsion continues, repeat dose once after 5 minutes.
• In infants and elderly patients, monitor respiration and blood pressure.
• If convulsion continues after the second dose, treat as status epilepticus.

The patient is no longer seizing
– Look for the cause of the seizure and evaluate the risk of recurrence.
– Keep diazepam and 50% glucose available in case the patient starts seizing again.

Status epilepticus
Several distinct seizures without complete restoration of consciousness in between or an uninterrupted seizure lasting more than 10 minutes.
– Protect from trauma, loosen clothing.
– Maintain airway and administer oxygen as required.
– Insert an IV line.
– Administer 50% glucose by slow IV: 1 ml/kg
– If diazepam (see above) has not stopped the seizure, continue with phenobarbital IV infusion in 5% glucose:
Children: 15 mg/kg at a maximum rate of 30 mg/minute
Adults: 10 to 15 mg/kg at a maximum rate of 100 mg/minute (maximum dose 1 g)
Once the seizures have stopped, reduce the infusion rate.
1 For rectal administration, use a syringe without a needle, or better, cut a nasogastric tube, CH8, to a length of

2-3 cm and attach it to the tip of the syringe.

23

Seizures

There is a high risk of respiratory depression - even with abrupt onset -, especially in infants and elderly patients: monitor closely respiration with support ready at hand
(Ambu bag via face mask or intubation).

Further treatment
– Febrile seizures
Determine the cause of the fever. Give paracetamol (see Fever, page 26), undress the patient, wrap in damp cloth.
In children under 3 years, there is usually no risk of later complications after simple febrile seizures and no treatment is required after the crisis. For further febrile episodes, give paracetamol PO.
– Infectious causes
Severe malaria (page 131), meningitis (page 165), meningo-encephalitis, cerebral toxoplasmosis (pages 217 and 218), cysticercosis (page 153), etc.
– Metabolic causes
Hypoglycaemia: 50% glucose, 1 ml/kg by slow IV in all patients who do not regain consciousness, in the event of severe malaria and for newborns and malnourished children. If possible, check blood glucose level using a reagent strip test.
– Iatrogenic causes
Withdrawal of antiepileptic therapy in a patient being treated for epilepsy should be managed over a period of 4-6 months with progressive reduction of the doses. An abrupt stop of treatment may provoke severe recurrent seizures.
– Epilepsy
• A first brief seizure does not need further protective treatment. Only patients with chronic repetitive seizures require further regular protective treatment with an antiepileptic drug, usually over several years.
• Once a diagnosis is made, abstention from treatment may be recommended due to the risks associated with treatment. However, these risks must be balanced with the risks of aggravation of the epilepsy, ensuing seizure-induced cerebral damage and other injury if the patient is not treated.
• It is always preferable to start with monotherapy. The effective dose must be reached progressively and symptoms and drug tolerance evaluated every 15 to
20 days.
• An abrupt interruption of treatment may provoke status epilepticus. The rate of dose reduction varies according to the length of treatment; the longer the treatment period, the longer the reduction period (see iatrogenic causes, above). In the same way, a change from one antiepileptic drug to another must be made progressively with an overlap period of a few weeks.
• First line treatments for generalised tonic-clonic seizures in children under 2 years are carbamazepine or phenobarbital, in older children and adults sodium valproate or carbamazepine. For information: carbamazepine PO
Children: initial dose of 2 mg/kg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses; increase every week until the optimal dose for the individual has been reached (usually 10 to
20 mg/kg/day in 2 to 4 divided doses).
Adults: initial dose of 200 mg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses; increase by 200 mg every week until the optimal dose for the individual has been reached (usually
800 to 1200 mg/day in 2 to 4 divided doses).

24

1. A few symptomes and syndromes sodium valproate PO

Children over 20 kg: initial dose of 400 mg in 2 divided doses irrespective of weight; if necessary, increase the dose progressively until the optimal dose for the individual has been reached (usually 20 to 30 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses).
Adults: initial dose of 600 mg/day in 2 divided doses; increase by 200 mg/day every 3 days until the optimal dose for the individual has been reached (usually
1 to 2 g/day in 2 divided doses). phenobarbital PO
Children: initial dose of 3 to 4 mg/kg/day at night, increase the dose progressively to 8 mg/kg/day if necessary
Adults: initial dose of 2 mg/kg/day at night (without exceeding 100 mg per day), increase the dose progressively to 6 mg/kg/day if necessary

Special situation: seizures during pregnancy
– Eclampsia: seizures during the third trimester of pregnancy, most commonly in the context of pre-eclampsia (hypertension, oedema and proteinuria on reagent-strip test). • Symptomatic treatment of eclampsia:
Treatment of choice is magnesium sulfate by IV infusion: 4 g diluted in 0.9% sodium chloride to be administered over 15 minutes. Then infuse 1 g/hour, continue magnesium sulfate for 24 hours following delivery or the last seizure. If seizure recurs, give another 2 g by slow IV injection (over 15 minutes).
Monitor urine output. Stop the treatment if urinary output is less than 30 ml/hour or 100 ml/4 hours.
Before each injection, verify the concentration written on the ampoules: there is a risk of potentially fatal overdose. Always have calcium gluconate ready to reverse the effects of magnesium sulphate in the event of toxicity.
Monitor patellar tendon reflex every 15 minutes during the infusion. If the patient has malaise, drowsiness, difficulty speaking or loss of patellar reflex: stop the magnesium sulfate and inject 1 g of calcium gluconate by slow, direct IV injection
(over 5 to 10 minutes).
Only in the absence of magnesium sulfate, use diazepam: 10 mg slow IV followed by
40 mg in 500 ml 5% glucose as a continuous infusion over 24 hours. If there is no venous access for the loading dose, give 20 mg rectally. In the event of treatment failure after 10 minutes, give a second dose of 10 mg.
For direct IV or rectal administration dilute diazepam in 5% glucose or 0.9% sodium chloride to make a total volume of 10 ml.
• Oxygen: 4 to 6 litres/minute
• Nursing, hydration
• Urgent delivery within 12 hours
• Treatment of hypertension: see Hypertension, page 291
– Other causes: during pregnancy, consider that seizures may also be caused by cerebral malaria or meningitis (the incidence of these diseases is increased in pregnant women, see Malaria, page 131 and Bacterial meningitis, page 165).

25

1

Fever

Fever
Fever is defined as a temperature higher than 37.5°C axillary and 38°C if measured rectally. It is accepted that axillary temperature underestimates the core body temperature by 0.5°C, but this is very approximate. Use an electronic thermometer when available1.
Fever is often linked, but not exclusively, with infection. All clinical examinations should include checking for fever.
In a febrile patient, first look for signs of serious illness, then try to establish a diagnosis. Signs of serious illness
– Signs of sepsis with signs of shock: circulatory failure, respiratory distress, purpura, confusion, coma.
– Signs of a systemic illness: meningeal syndrome, seizures, heart murmur on auscultation, abdominal pain, rash, etc.
– Patient’s underlying condition: malnutrition, immune suppression, splenectomy, chronic disease, the very young and the very old, bedridden patients.

Aetiology
Many different diseases, infectious or noninfectious, acute or chronic, benign or malignant, may be accompanied by fever. Among the infectious diseases requiring immediate treatment, look for:
– purpura fulminans
– bacterial meningitis
– severe malaria
– severe bacterial skin infections
– acute pyelonephritis with urinary retention
– peritonitis or gastrointestinal infection
– pneumonia with signs of respiratory distress
– subglottic or epiglottic laryngitis
– endocarditis
– septicaemia
In the absence of signs of serious illness and obvious diagnosis, patients may return home with an antipyretic and should be educated to prevent dehydration (plenty of fluids) and to recognize symptoms that need medical attention. Patients should return for a new consultation if there is no improvement within 48 hours of the initial consultation or before if their condition deteriorates.
In case of doubt (e.g. about the evolution, the quality of surveillance) and depending on the context (geographical distance, problems of transport), it may be better to keep patients 12 to 24 hours for observation.

Complications
– Convulsions
– Dehydration
– Confusion, delirium
– Schock
It is important, particularly in children, to look for signs of these complications, to treat them, and most importantly to prevent them.
1 Temperature should be measured over a period of 5 minutes when using a mercury thermometer.

26

1. A few symptomes and syndromes

Symptomatic treatment
– Undress the patient; wrap the child in a damp cloth or bathe for a few minutes in water at 37°C.
– Antipyretics: paracetamol PO
Children: 60 mg/kg/day in 3 or 4 divided doses
Adults: 3 to 4 g/day in 3 or 4 divided doses or acetylsalicylic acid (A.A.S) PO (to be avoided in children under 16 years)
Adult: 1 to 3 g/day in 3 or 4 divided doses or ibuprofen PO
Children over 3 months: 30 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses
Adults: 1200 to 1800 mg/day in 3 to 4 divided doses
2 months

1 year

5 years

15 years

4 kg

Age

8 kg

15 kg

35 kg

adult
Weight

Paracetamol

120 mg/5 ml oral solution
100 mg tablet

2 ml x 3

–

–

3/4 to 11/2 tab

11/2 to 3 tab x3 –

–

1/2 to 11/2 tab

x3

tab x 3

–

1/4 to 1/2 tab

1/2

3 to 6 ml x 3

x3

x3

500 mg tablet
A.A.S.

300 mg tablet

2 tab x 3

Avoid

500 mg tablet

Age

2 tab x 3

1 tab x 3

3 months

6 years

15 years adult Weight

Ibuprofen

5 kg

20 kg

35 kg

Use the graduated pipette
(in kg): one pipette filled up to the graduation corresponding to the child's weight x 3

–

–

200 mg tablet

–

1 to 2 tab x 3

2 tab x 3

400 mg tablet

–

–

1 tab x 3

100 mg/5 ml oral solution

Do not administer 27

1

Fever

– Properly hydrate the patient.
– Continue to feed, even if a child has little appetite. The mother must be persuaded of the importance of feeding/breastfeeding.
– In the event of a febrile seizure: see page 24.
– Treatment of the cause: according to the aetiology of the fever.
Notes:
– Paracetamol is the drug of choice for pregnant and breast-feeding women.
– Acetylsalicylic acid is not recommended during the first 5 months of pregnancy, contra-indicated from the beginning of the 6 th month, and to be avoided in breastfeeding-women. – Ibuprofen is not recommended during the first 5 months of pregnancy and contraindicated from the beginning of the 6th month. It can be administered to breastfeeding women as short-term treatment.

28

1. A few symptomes and syndromes

1

Pain

Pain results from a variety of pathological processes. It is expressed differently by each patient depending on cultural background, age, etc. It is a highly subjective experience meaning that only the individual is able to assess his/her level of pain. Regular assessment of the intensity of pain is indispensable in establishing effective treatment.

Clinical features
– Pain assessment
• Intensity: use a simple verbal scale in children over 5 years and adults, and NFCS or FLACC scales in children less than 5 years (see pain rating scales on following page). • Pattern: sudden, intermittent, chronic; at rest, at night, on movement, during care procedures, etc.
• Character: burning, cramping, spasmodic, radiating, etc.
• Aggravating or relieving factors, etc.
– Clinical examination
• Of the organ or area where the pain is located.
• Specific signs of underlying disease (e.g. bone or osteoarticular pain may be caused by a vitamin C deficiency) and review of all systems.
• Associated signs (fever, weight loss, etc.)
– Synthesis
The synthesis of information gathered during history taking and clinical examination allows aetiological diagnosis and orients treatment. It is important to distinguish:
• Nociceptive pain: it presents most often as acute pain and the cause-effect relationship is usually obvious (e.g. acute post-operative pain, burns, trauma, renal colic, etc.). The pain may be present in different forms, but neurological exam is normal. Treatment is relatively well standardized.
• Neuropathic pain, due to a nerve lesion (section, stretching, ischaemia): most often chronic pain. On a background of constant, more or less localized pain, such as paraesthesia or burning, there are recurrent acute attacks such as electric shock-like pain, frequently associated with disordered sensation (anaesthesia, hypo or hyperaesthesia). This type of pain is linked to viral infections directly affecting the
CNS (herpes simplex, herpes zoster), neural compression by tumors, postamputation pain, paraplegia, etc.
• Mixed pain (cancer, HIV) for which management requires a broader approach.

29

Pain

Pain evaluation scales
Self-evaluation scale - Children over 5 years and adults
Simple verbal scale (SVS)
Intensity of pain

No pain

Mild pain

Moderate pain

Severe pain

Scoring

0

1

2

3

Write down

0

+

++

+++

Observational evaluation scale - Children 2 months-5 years
FLACC scale (Face Limb Activity Cry Consolability)
Items

Scoring
1

0

2

Face

No particular expression Occasional grimace or or smile frown, withdrawn, disinterested Frequent to constant frown, clenched jaw, quivering chin

Legs

Normal position or relaxed Uneasy, restless, tense

Kicking, or legs drawn up Activity

Lying quietly, normal position, moves easily

Squirming, shifting back and forth, tense

Arched, rigid or jerking

Cry

No cry (awake or asleep) Moans or whimpers, occasional complaint

Consolability Content, relaxed

Reassured by occasional touching, hugging or being talked to, distractible Crying steadily, screams or sobs, frequent complaints Difficult to console or comfort Each category is scored from 0 to 2, giving a final score between 0 and 10.
0 to 3: mild pain, 4 to 7: moderate pain, 7 to 10: severe pain
Observational evaluation scale - Children under 2 months
NFCS scale (Neonatal Facial Coding System)
Items

Brow bulge

Scoring
0

1

Brow bulge

no

yes

Eye squeeze

no

yes

Nasolabial furrow

no

yes

Open lips

no

yes

Eye squeeze
Nasolabial furrow

Open lips

A score of 2 or more signifies significant pain, requiring analgesic treatment.

30

1. A few symptomes and syndromes

Treatment
Treatment depends on the type and intensity of the pain. It may be both aetiological and symptomatic if a treatable cause is identified. Treatment is symptomatic only in other cases (no cause found, non-curable disease).
Nociceptive pain
The WHO classifies analgesics used for this type of pain on a three-step ladder:
– Step 1: non-opioid analgesics such as paracetamol and nonsteroidal antiinflammatory drugs (NSAIDs).
– Step 2: weak opioid analgesics such as codeine and tramadol. Their combination with one or two Step 1 analgesics is recommended.
– Step 3: strong opioid analgesics, first and foremost morphine. Their combination with one or two Step 1 analgesics is recommended.
The treatment of pain is based on a few fundamental concepts:
– Pain can only be treated correctly if it is correctly evaluated. The only person who can evaluate the intensity of pain is the patient himself. The use of pain assessment scales is invaluable.
– The pain evaluation observations should be recorded in the patient chart in the same fashion as other vital signs.
– Treatment of pain should be as prompt as possible.
– It is recommended to administer analgesics in advance when appropriate (e.g. before painful care procedures).
– Analgesics should be prescribed and administered at fixed time intervals (not on demand). – Oral forms should be used whenever possible.
– The combination of different analgesic drugs (multimodal analgesia) is advantageous.
– Start with an analgesic from the level presumed most effective: e.g., in the event of a fractured femur, start with a Step 3 analgesic.
– The treatment and dose chosen are guided by the assessment of pain intensity, but also by the patient’s response which may vary significantly from one person to another. Treatment of acute pain
Mild pain

Paracetamol + /- NSAID

Moderate pain

Paracetamol + /- NSAID + tramadol or codeine

Severe pain

Paracetamol + /- NSAID + morphine

31

1

32

Level 1

Level 2

Children

< 10 kg: 7.5 mg/kg every 6 hours
(max. 30 mg/kg/day)
> 10 kg: 15 mg/kg every 6 hours
(max. 60 mg/kg/day)

paracetamol PO

paracetamol IV

> 3 months: 30 mg/kg/day in
3 divided doses

6 months-12years: 0.5 to 1 mg/kg every 4 to 6 hours
> 12 years: 30 to 60 mg every 4 to
6 hours (max. 240 mg/day)

> 6 months: 2 mg/kg every 6 hours

> 6 months: 2 mg/kg every 6 hours

codeine PO

tramadol PO

tramadol SC, IM, slow IV or infusion

–

diclofenac IM

ibuprofen PO

–

acetylsalicylic acid
(aspirin) PO

15 mg/kg every 6 hours or 10 mg/kg every 4 hours

Analgesics

50 to 100 mg every 4 to 6 hours
(max. 600 mg/day)

50 to 100 mg every 4 to 6 hours
(max. 400 mg/day)

30 to 60 mg every 4 to 6 hours
(max. 240 mg/day)

1200 to 1800 mg/day in 3 to 4 divided doses 75 mg once daily

300 mg to 1 g every 4 to 6 hours
(max. 3 to 4 g/day)

≤ 50 kg: 15 mg/kg every 6 hours
(max. 60 mg/kg/day)
> 50 kg: 1 g every 6 hours
(max. 4 g/day)

500 mg to 1 g every 4 to 6 hours
(max. 4 g/day)

Adults (except pregnant/ breast-feeding women)

25 to 50 mg every 12 hours in elderly patients and in patients with severe renal or hepatic impairment.

Add a laxative if treatment > 48 hours.

Treatment must be as short as possible.
Respect contra-indications.

Avoid in children less than 16 years.

The efficacy of IV paracetamol is not superior to the efficacy of oral paracetamol; the IV route is restricted to situations where oral administration is impossible.

Remarks

Pain

Level 3

> 6 months: 0.1 mg/kg administered in fractionated doses (0.05 mg/kg every 10 minutes), to be repeated every 4 hours if necessary

morphine IV

- In elderly patients and in patients with severe renal or hepatic impairment: reduce doses by half
0.1 mg/kg administered in fractionated and administer less frequently, doses (0.05 mg/kg every 10 minutes), according to clinical response. to be repeated every 4 hours if
- Add a laxative if treatment necessary > 48 hours.

> 6 months: 0.1 to 0.2 mg/kg every
4 hours

morphine SC, IM

0.1 to 0.2 mg/kg every 4 hours

The effective daily dose is determined The effective daily dose is determined - Do not initiate treatment with the during the initial treatment with during the initial treatment with sustained release morphine in immediate release morphine (MIR). immediate release morphine (MIR). elderly patients or those with renal or hepatic impairment. Begin
If treatment is initiated directly with
If treatment is initiated directly with treatment with the immediate
MSR:
MSR: release morphine (MIR).
> 6 months: 1 mg/kg/day in 2 divided 60 mg/day in 2 divided doses at
- Add a laxative if treatment doses at 12 hour-intervals, to be ajusted 12 hour-intervals, to be ajusted in
> 48 hours. in relation to pain intensity relation to pain intensity

- Reduce the dose (30 mg/day) in elderly patients and patients with renal or hepatic impairment.
- Add a laxative if treatment
> 48 hours.

Remarks

morphine PO, slow release
(MSR)

Adults (except pregnant/ breast-feeding women)

> 6 months: 1 mg/kg/day in 6 divided 60 mg/day in 6 divideded doses at doses at 4 hour-intervals, to be ajusted 4 hour-intervals, to be ajusted in in relation to pain intensity relation to pain intensity

Children

morphine PO, immediate release
(MIR)

Analgesics

1. A few symptomes and syndromes

1

33

Pain

Notes on the use of morphine and derivatives:
– Morphine is an effective treatment for many types of severe pain. Its analgesic effect is dose-dependent. Its adverse effects have often been exaggerated and should not be an obstacle to its use.
– The most serious adverse effect of morphine is respiratory depression, which may be fatal. This adverse effect results from overdose. It is, therefore, important to increase doses gradually. Respiratory depression is preceded by drowsiness, which is a warning to monitor respiratory rate (RR).
The RR should remain equal to or greater than the thresholds indicated below:
Neonate

RR ≥ 35 respirations/min

Child 1 to 12 months

RR ≥ 25 respirations/min

Child 1 to 2 years

RR ≥ 20 respirations/min

Child 2 to 5 years

RR ≥ 15 respirations/min

Child > 5 years and adult

RR ≥ 10 respirations/min

Respiratory depression must be identified and treated quickly: verbal and physical stimulation of the patient; administration of oxygen; respiratory support (bag and mask) if necessary. If no improvement, administer naloxone (antagonist of morphine) in bolus of 1 to 3 micrograms/kg as necessary until RR normalises and the excessive drowsiness resolves.
– Morphine and codeine always cause constipation. A laxative should be prescribed if the opioid treatment continues more than 48 hours. Lactulose PO is the drug of choice: children < 1 year: 5 ml/day; children 1-6 years: 5 to 10 ml/day; children 7-14 years:
10 to 15 ml/day; adults: 15 to 45 ml/day).
If the patient’s stools are soft, a stimulant laxative (bisacodyl PO: children > 3 years:
5 to 10 mg/day; adults: 10 to 15 mg/day) is preferred.
– Nausea and vomiting are common at the beginning of treatment.
In adults, haloperidol PO (2 mg/ml oral solution): 1 to 2 mg to be repeated up to
6 times daily.
Metoclopramide PO may also be used (children: 5 to 15 mg/day in 3 divided doses, adults: 15 to 30 mg/day in 3 divided doses). Do not combine haloperidol and metoclopramide. – For chronic pain in late stage disease (cancer, AIDS etc.), morphine PO is the drug of choice. It may be necessary to increase doses over time according to pain assessment.
Do not hesitate to give sufficient and effective doses.
– Morphine, tramadol and codeine have similar modes of action and should not be combined. – Buprenorphine, nalbuphine and pentazocine must not be combined with morphine, pethidine, tramadol or codeine because they have competitive action.

34

1. A few symptomes and syndromes

1

Treatment of nociceptive pain in pregnant and breast-feeding women
Pregnancy
Analgesics

Breast-feeding

3rd trimester and term

1st choice

1st choice

1st choice

aspirin

avoid

contra-indicated

avoid

ibuprofen

avoid

contra-indicated

possible

codeine

possible

The newborn infant may develop withdrawal symptoms, respiratory depression and drowsiness in the event of prolonged administration of large doses at the end of the
3rd trimester. Closely monitor the newborn infant. Use with caution, for a short period (2-3 days), at the lowest effective dose.
Monitor the mother and the child: in the event of excessive drowsiness, stop treatment. tramadol

possible

The child may develop drowsiness when the mother receives tramadol at the end of the 3rd trimester and during breast-feeding. Administer with caution, for a short period, at the lowest effective dose, and monitor the child.

morphine

possible

The child may develop withdrawal symptoms, respiratory depression and drowsiness when the mother receives morphine at the end of the 3rd trimester and during breast-feeding. Administer with caution, for a short period, at the lowest effective dose, and monitor the child.

paracetamol

Level 3

Level 2

Level 1

1st and 2nd trimester Neuropathic pain

Commonly used analgesics are often ineffective in treating this type of pain.
Treatment of neuropathic pain is based on a combination of two centrally acting drugs: amitriptyline PO

Adults: start with a dose of 10 to 25 mg/day at night and increase progressively to reach an effective dose, without exceeding 150 mg/day. Reduce the dose by 1/2 in elderly patients.

carbamazepine PO
Adults: start with a dose of 200 mg once daily at night for one week, then 400 mg/day in
2 divided doses (morning and night) for one week, then 600 mg/day in 3 divided doses.
Given its teratogenic risk, carbamazepine should only be used in women of childbearing age when covered by non-hormonal contraception (copper intrauterine device). Mixed pain

In mixed pain with a significant component of nociceptive pain, such as in cancer or
AIDS, morphine is combined with antidepressants and antiepileptics.
35

Pain

Chronic pain

In contrast to acute pain, medical treatment alone is not always sufficient in controlling chronic pain. A multidisciplinary approach including medical treatment, physiotherapy, psychotherapy and nursing is often necessary to allow good pain relief and encourage patient self-management.
Co-analgesics

The combination of certain drugs may be useful or even essential in the treatment of pain: antispasmodics, muscle relaxants, anxiolytics, corticosteroids, local anaesthesia, etc. 36

1. A few symptomes and syndromes

1

Anaemia
– Anaemia is defined as a haemoglobin level below reference values1. It is a frequent symptom in tropical settings where 10 to 20 % of the population present with Hb levels less than 10 g/dl.
– Anaemia is caused by:
• decreased production of red blood cells: nutritional iron and/or folic acid deficiency, depressed bone marrow function, some infections (HIV, visceral leishmaniasis etc.);
• loss of red blood cells: acute or chronic haemorrhage (ancylostomiasis etc.)
• increased destruction of red blood cells (haemolysis): malaria; infections or the intolerance of certain drugs by patients with G6PD deficiency (primaquine, dapsone, cotrimoxazole, nalidixic acid, nitrofuran derivatives etc.); haemoglobinopathies
(sickle cell disease, thalassaemias); certain bacterial and viral infections (HIV).
– In tropical settings, the causes are often interlinked, the two most common causes are nutritional deficiencies and malaria. The groups most at risk are children and young women, particularly during pregnancy.
– Anaemia in itself is not an indication for transfusion. Most anaemias are well tolerated and can be corrected with simple aetiological treatment.

Clinical features
– Common signs of anaemia: pallor of the conjunctivae, mucous membranes, palms of hands and soles of feet; fatigue, dizziness, oedema in the lower limbs, dyspnoea, tachycardia, heart murmur.
– Signs that anaemia may be immediately life threatening: sweating, thirst, cold extremities, tachycardia, respiratory distress and shock.
– Look for signs of a specific pathology: cheilosis, nutritional deficiency glossitis, haemolytic jaundice, signs of malaria (see page 131) etc.

Laboratory
– Haemoglobin level (or if haemoglobin is not available, haematocrit)
– Thick and thin blood films or rapid test if malaria is suspected

1 Normal values : > 13 g/dl in men; > 12 g/dl in women ; > 11 g/dl in pregnant women; > 13.5 g/dl in newborns;

> 9.5 g/dl in infants from 2 to 6 months; > 11 g/dl in children from 6 months to 6 years; > 11.5 g/dl in children from 6 to 12 years.
37

Anaemia

Treatment
Iron deficiency anaemia

– elemental iron PO2 for a minimum of 2 months
Children under 2 years: 30 mg/day in 2 divided doses = 1/2 tab/day
Children from 2 to 12 years: 120 mg/day in 2 divided doses = 2 tab/day
Adults: 120 to 180 mg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses = 2 to 3 tab/day

or preferably, give a combination of elemental iron (65 mg) + folic acid (0.40 mg) PO2.

– Combine with an anthelminthic albendazole PO (except during the 1st trimester of pregnancy)
Children from 1 to 2 years: 200 mg as a single dose
Children over 2 years and adults: 400 mg as a single dose or mebendazole PO (except during the 1st trimester of pregnancy)
Children over 1 year and adults: 500 mg as a single dose

Folic acid deficiency anaemia (rarely isolated)

– folic acid PO
Children under 1 year: 0.5 mg/kg once daily for 4 months
Children over 1 year and adults: 5 mg once daily for 4 months

Haemolytic anaemia
– Malaria: iron is ineffective except in patients with an associated iron deficiency. For the treatment of malaria, see page 131.
– G6PD deficiency: no specific treatment; early treatment of infections; stop any drugs suspected to be causing a reaction.

Immediately life threatening anaemia
– Oxygen, particularly for children.
– Transfusion after determination of blood group and type and screening for HIV, hepatitis B and C, syphilis, malaria in endemic areas. To determine the blood volume required and the rate of transfusion, see next page.
Note: the prevalence of HIV infection makes screening of donors vital. If there is no possibility of screening, it is up to the physician to weigh the transfusion risk with the life or death risk of not transfusing the patient. All transfusions that are not strictly indicated are strictly contra-indicated.

2 Doses are calculated in elemental iron.

Tablets of 200 mg ferrous sulphate such as those of ferrous sulphate + folic acid contain 65 mg of elemental iron.
300 mg tablets of ferrous gluconate contain 35 mg of elemental iron.

38

1. A few symptomes and syndromes

1

Adults
Determine the volume of whole blood to be transfused: V = (haemoglobin required minus patient’s haemoglobin) multiplied by 6 multiplied by patient’s weight

Example: haemoglobin required = 7 g/dl patient’s haemoglobin = 4 g/dl patient’s weight = 60 kg
Volume in ml = (7 – 4) x 6 x 60 = 1080 ml

Determine the transfusion rate:
(1 ml of whole blood = 15 to 20 drops)

Example: 1080 ml to be administered over
3 hours
1080 (ml) ÷ 180 (minutes) = 6 ml/minute
6 (ml) x 15 (drops) = 90 drops/minute
Children

Newborns and children under 1 year:
15 ml/kg over 3 to 4 hours
Children over 1 year:
20 ml/kg over 3 to 4 hours
Malnourished children:
10 ml/kg over 3 hours

Example: a malnourished child weighing 25 kg
10 (ml) x 25 (kg) = 250 ml over 3 hours
250 (ml) ÷ 180 (minutes) = 1.4 ml/minute
1.4 (ml) x 15 (drops) = 21 drops/minute

Monitor vital signs (pulse, blood pressure, respiratory rate, temperature) and watch for clinical signs of transfusion reactions.
In some cases, particularly in children suffering from severe malaria, anaemia may cause heart failure which may be decompensated by transfusion. If signs of hypervolaemia are seen: furosemide slow, direct IV: 1 mg/kg without exceeding
20 mg/kg.
– If present, treat any pulmonary or parasitic infection (malaria).

Prevention
– Iron or folic acid deficiency:
• drug supplements : elemental iron (65 mg) + folic acid (0.40 mg) PO
Pregnant woman: 60 to 120 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses = 1 to 2 tab/day
• Nutritional supplements if the basic diet is insufficient

– For patients with sickle cell disease: long term treatment with folic acid PO: 5 mg/day.

– Early treatment of malaria, helminthic infections etc.

39

Severe acute malnutrition

Severe acute malnutrition
Severe acute malnutrition is caused by a significant imbalance between nutritional intake and individual needs. It is most often caused by both quantitative (number of kilocalories/day) and qualitative (vitamins and minerals, etc.) deficiencies.

Children over 6 months of age
The two principal forms of severe malnutrition are:
– Marasmus: significant loss of muscle mass and subcutaneous fat, resulting in a skeletal appearance.
– Kwashiorkor: bilateral oedema of the lower limbs/oedema of the face, often associated with cutaneous signs (shiny or cracked skin, burn-like appearance; discoloured and brittle hair).
The two forms may be associated (marasmic-kwashiorkor).
In addition to these characteristic signs, severe acute malnutrition is accompanied by significant physiopathological disorders (metabolic disturbances, anaemia, compromised immunity, leading to susceptibility to infections often difficult to diagnose, etc.).
Complications are frequent and potentially life-threatening.
Mortality rates may be elevated in the absence of specific medical management.
Admission and discharge criteria for treatment programmes for severe acute malnutrition are both anthropometric and clinical:
• Mid-upper arm circumference (MUAC) is the circumference, measured in midposition, of the relaxed left upper arm, taken in children of 6 to 59 months (65 to 110 cm in height). MUAC measures the degree of muscle wasting. A MUAC of < 110 mm indicates severe malnutrition and significant mortality risk.
• Weight for height (W/H) index assesses the degree of weight loss by comparing the weight of the malnourished child with non-malnourished children of the same height. Severe malnutrition is defined as a W/H index of < – 3Z with reference to the new WHO child growth standards1.
1 Some national programmes define anthropometric admission and discharge criteria with reference to NCHS

growth standards, with thresholds expressed in percentage of the median.

40

1. A few symptomes and syndromes

• The presence of bilateral oedema of the lower limbs (when other causes of oedema have been ruled out) indicates severe malnutrition, regardless of the MUAC and
W/H.
Usual admission criteria are: MUAC < 110 mm (MUAC is not used as an admission criterion in children older than 59 months or taller than 110 cm) or W/H < – 3Z2 or presence of bilateral oedema of the lower limbs.
Usual discharge (cure) criteria are: W/H > – 2Z 2 and absence of bilateral oedema
(2 consecutive assessments, one week apart) and absence of acute medical problems.
MUAC is not used as a discharge criterion.
Medical management (hospitalisation or ambulatory care) is based on the presence or absence of associated serious complications:
• Children exhibiting anorexia, or significant medical complications, such as severe anaemia, severe dehydration or severe infection (complicated acute malnutrition) should be hospitalised3.
• Children without significant medical complications (uncomplicated acute malnutrition) may undergo treatment on an ambulatory basis, with weekly medical follow-up. Treatment
1) Nutritional treatment
Nutritional treatment is based on the use of therapeutic foods enriched with vitamins and minerals:
– Therapeutic milks (for use exclusively in hospitalised patients):
• F-75 therapeutic milk, low in protein, sodium and calories (0.9 g of protein and 75 kcal per 100 ml) is used in the initial phase of treatment for patients suffering from complicated acute malnutrition. It is used to cover basic needs while complications are being treated. It is given in 8 daily meals.
• F-100 therapeutic milk, in which the concentration of protein and calories is higher (2.9 g of protein and 100 kcal per 100 ml), replaces F-75 after several days, once the patient is stabilised (return of appetite, clinical

2 Some national programmes define anthropometric admission and discharge criteria with reference to NCHS

growth standards, with thresholds expressed in percentage of the median.

3 As a rule, any malnourished child presenting with medical complications should initially be hospitalised, even if

s/he suffers from moderate, rather than severe, malnutrition (W/H > – 3Z).

41

1

Severe acute malnutrition

improvement; disappearance or reduction of oedema). The objective is to facilitate rapid weight gain. It can be given with, or be replaced by,
RUTF.
– R U T F ( re a d y - t o - u s e t h e r a p e u t i c f o o d ) , i . e . f o o d s w h i c h a re re a d y f o r consumption (for example, peanut paste enriched with milk solids, such as
Plumpy’nut®), are used in children treated in both hospital or ambulatory settings. The nutritional composition of RUTF is similar to F-100, but the i r o n c o n t e n t i s h i g h e r. I t i s d e s i g n e d t o p r o m o t e r a p i d w e i g h t g a i n
(approximately 500 kcal per 100 g). RUTF are the only therapeutic foods which can be used in ambulatory treatment.
Furthermore, it is important to give drinking water, in addition to meals, especially if the ambient temperature is high or the child has a fever.
Breastfeeding should continue in children of the appropriate age.

2) Routine medical treatment
In the absence of specific medical complications, the following routine treatments should be implemented in both ambulatory and hospital settings:
– Infections
• Measles vaccination on admission

• Broad spectrum antibiotic therapy starting on Day 1 ( amoxicillin PO:
70-100 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses for 5 days) 4.
• In endemic malaria areas: rapid test on D1, with treatment in accordance with results. If testing is not available, give malaria treatment (page 131).
• Treatment for intestinal worms on D1 or D8 albendazole PO

Children > 6 months and adults: 400 mg as a single dose (200 mg in children
> 6 months but < 10 kg)
– Micronutrient deficiencies
The use of therapeutic foods corrects most of these deficiencies. However, some supplements are still necessary:

4 If specific signs of infection are present, the choice of treatment should be directed by the suspected focus.

42

1. A few symptomes and syndromes

• vitamin A is given routinely on admission, retinol (vitamin A)5:
Children from 6 months to 1 year: 100,000 IU as a single dose
Children over 1 year: 200,000 IU as a single dose

1

• folic acid PO 5 mg is given routinely on admission

3) Management of common complications
– Diarrhoea and dehydration
Diarrhoea is often associated with malnutrition. Therapeutic foods facilitate the recovery of gastrointestinal mucosa and restore the production of gastric acid, digestive enzymes and bile. Amoxicillin, administered as part of routine treatment, is effective in reducing bacterial load. Diarrhoea generally resolves without any additional treatment. Watery diarrhoea is sometimes related to another pathology
(otitis, pneumonia, malaria, etc.), which should be considered.
Plain water, not oral rehydration solution, is given to children with diarrhoea after each watery stool. Oral rehydration solution is reserved only for cases of established dehydration. If an aetiological treatment is necessary, see page 83.
Dehydration is more difficult to assess in malnourished than healthy children (e.g., delay in return of skin pinch and sunken eyes are present even without dehydration in children with marasmus.)
The diagnosis is made on the basis of a history of watery diarrhoea of recent onset accompanied by weight loss, corresponding to fluid losses since the onset of diarrhoea. Chronic and persistent diarrhoea does not require rapid rehydration.
The rehydration protocol differs from that used in non-malnourished:
• In the absence of hypovolaemic shock, rehydration is conducted by the oral route (if necessary by nasogastric tube), using specific oral rehydration solutions 6 ( ReSoMal ), containing less sodium and more potassium than standard solutions.
R e S o M a l i s a d m i n i s t e re d u n d e r s t r i c t m e d i c a l s u p e r v i s i o n ( c l i n i c a l evaluation and weight every hour). The dose is 10 ml/kg/hour for the first
2 hours, then 5 ml/kg/hour until the weight loss (known or estimated) has been corrected.

5 Complete curative treatment with vitamin A is reserved for patients presenting with clinically detectable ocular

lesions (see Vitamin A deficiency, page 121).

6 Except for cholera, in which case standard oral rehydration solutions are used.

43

Severe acute malnutrition

In practice, it is useful to determine the target weight before starting rehydration. The target weight is the weight before the onset of diarrhoea.
If the child is improving and showing no signs of fluid overload, rehydration is continued until the previous weight is attained.
If the weight loss cannot be measured (e.g. in newly admitted child), it can be estimated at 2-5% of the child’s current weight. The target weight should not exceed 5% of the current weight (e.g., if the child weighs 5 kg before starting rehydration, the target weight should not exceed 5.250 kg).
Regardless of the target weight, rehydration should be stopped if signs of fluid overload appear.
• The IV route carries a significant risk of fluid overload and cardiac failure. It is used only in cases of hypovolaemic shock (weak or absent radial pulse, cold extremities, altered level of consciousness, associated with recent weight loss, if known): R i n g e r l a c t a t e : 15 to 20 ml/kg over 30 minutes to 1 hour, under strict medical supervision. Every 15 minutes, evaluate clinical response, and check for signs of over-hydration.
- If the clinical condition has improved after 30 minutes (recovery of consciousness, strong pulse, return to previous weight, if known), continue the infusion at the rate of 15 to 20 ml/kg for one hour, then switch to the oral route with ReSoMal : 10 ml/kg/hour for 2 hours.
- If there is no improvement, or worsening (signs of fluid overload) in clinical condition after the first hour of IV therapy, reduce the infusion rate to keep the vein open, and treat for septicaemia.
– Bacterial infections
Lower respiratory infections, otitis, skin and urinary infections are common, but sometimes difficult to identify (absence of fever and specific symptoms).
Infection should be suspected in a drowsy or apathetic child.
Presence of hypothermia or hypoglycaemia is suspicious for severe infection. Since the focus may be difficult to determine, a broad spectrum antibiotic regime using
2 antibiotics is recommended.
– Hypothermia and hypoglycaemia
Hypothermia (rectal temperature < 35.5°C or axillary < 35°C) is a frequent cause of death in the first days of hospitalisation.
Prevention measures include keeping the child close to the mother ’s body
(kangaroo method) and provision of blankets. In case of hypothermia, warm the child as above, monitor the temperature, treat hypoglycaemia and underlying infection.

44

1. A few symptomes and syndromes

In hypoglycaemia, suspected or confirmed (test strip), administer glucose PO if the child is conscious (50 ml of sugar water [50 ml water + a teaspoon of sugar] or 50 ml of milk); if the child is unconscious, 1 ml/kg of 50% glucose IV. Treat underlying infection.
– Oral candidiasis
Should be systematically sought as it interferes with feeding, see treatment page 92.
– Cutaneous lesions of kwashiorkor

• Dry areas: zinc oxide ointment twice daily

• Widespread exudative lesions: gentian violet twice daily (avoid on the face)
• If secondarily infected: treat as impetigo (page 105).
If the child fails to recover despite appropriate nutritional and medical treatment, consider another pathology: tuberculosis, HIV infection, etc.

Adolescents and adults
Clinical examination of the patient (sudden weight loss, loss of mobility from muscle wasting, cachexia, bilateral lower limb oedema in the absence of other causes of oedema) is indispensable for the diagnosis and adapted medical, nutritional and even social care of the patient.
Admission and discharge criteria, as a rough guide, are:
– Admission criteria:
Adolescents: same as in children (but MUAC is not used).
Adults: MUAC < 160 mm or bilateral lower limb oedema (Grade 3 or more, having excluded other causes of oedema) or MUAC < 185 mm in poor general condition (for example, inability to stand, evident dehydration).
A s in c hi l d re n, any mal no urish ed pat ien t presen t in g w it h sign if ic a nt complications should initially be hospitalised, regardless of the anthropometric criteria above.
– Discharge criteria:
Adolescents: as in children.
Adults: weight gain of 10-15% over admission weight and oedema below Grade 2 and good general condition.

45

1

Severe acute malnutrition

Nutritional treatment follows the same principles as in children, but the calorie intake in relation to body weight is lower.
Routine treatment is similar to that in children, with the following exceptions:
• Measles vaccine is only administered to adolescents (up to age 15).
• Antibiotics are not routinely given, but infections should be considered, and treated or excluded, in the assessment of the patient.

For more information on the management of malnutrition in infants, children and adults, refer to the MSF handbook Nutrition.

46

CHAPTER 2

2

Respiratory diseases
Rhinitis and rhinopharyngitis (common cold)

49

Acute sinusitis

50

Acute laryngitis

51

Acute pharyngitis

53

Diphtheria

55

Otitis

57

Whooping cough (pertussis)

60

Bronchitis

62

Bronchiolitis

64

Acute pneumonia

66

Staphylococcal pneumonia

72

Asthma

73

Pulmonary tuberculosis

78

2. Respiratory diseases

Rhinitis and rhinopharyngitis
(common cold)

2

Rhinitis (inflammation of the nasal mucosa) and rhinopharyngitis (inflammation of the nasal and pharyngeal mucosa) are generally benign, self-limited and most often of viral origin. However, they may be an early sign of another infection (e.g. measles or influenza) or may be complicated by a bacterial infection (e.g. otitis media or sinusitis).

Clinical features
– Nasal discharge or obstruction, which may be accompanied by sore throat, fever, cough, lacrimation, and diarrhoea in infants. Purulent nasal discharge is not indicative of a secondary bacterial infection.
– In children under 5 years, routinely check the tympanic membranes to look for an associated otitis media.

Treatment
– Antibiotic treatment is not recommended: it does not promote recovery nor prevent complications. – Treatment is symptomatic:
• Clear the nose with 0.9% sodium chloride1.
• Fever, throat soreness: paracetamol PO for 2 to 3 days (see page 26).

1 For a child: place him on his back, head turned to the side, and instil 0.9% sodium chloride into each nostril.

49

Acute sinusitis

Acute sinusitis
Acute sinusitis is an infection of the sinus mucosa with purulent discharge of nasal
(rhinitis, allergies, obstruction) or dental origin. It may develop into chronic sinusitis, particularly in older children and adults.

Clinical features
– Facial pain or ache and purulent nasal discharge
Older children and adults
– Peri-orbital pain in frontal sinusitis; facial pain in maxillary and/or ethmoidal sinusitis. – Purulent nasal discharge from the side with pain, nasal obstruction and moderate fever.
– On examination
• pain on pressure over the forehead, under the upper border of the orbit or cheek,
• purulent secretions in the meatus and inflammation of the mucosa.
The most common causes are Haemophilus influenzae in children under 5 years and pneumococci in patients over 5 years.
Type specific to infants and small children
– Acute ethmoiditis: high fever, inflammation and swelling of the lower eyelids and the bridge of the nose, purulent nasal discharge.
– Risk of infection spreading to the neighbouring bony structures, orbits and the meninges. The most common causes are Haemophilus influenzae, pneumococci and staphylococci.

Treatment
– Nasal irrigation with 0.9% sodium chloride or Ringer Lactate 4 to 6 times/day to clear the airway.
– Pain and fever: give paracetamol PO (see page 26).
– Antibiotic treatment, depending on the severity of infection: amoxicillin PO: 80 mg/kg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 7 to 10 days
For patients allergic to penicillin: erythromycin PO: 30 to 50 mg/kg/day in 2 to 3 divided doses for 7 to 10 days
– For sinusitis secondary to dental infection: dental extraction while under antibiotic treatment. – In infants with ethmoiditis, strong antibiotic treatment is necessary: ceftriaxone IM: 100 mg/kg/day in 2 injections for 10 days or, failing that, ampicillin IV: 200 mg/kg/day in 3 or 4 injections until improvement is seen, then change to oral treatment with amoxicillin PO: 100 mg/kg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses to complete 10 days of treatment

50

2. Respiratory diseases

Acute laryngitis
Laryngitis is an acute infection of the laryngeal mucosa of viral or sometimes bacterial origin. Clinical features common to all laryngitis
– Inspiratory dyspnoea with cough and hoarse voice. Chest indrawing and stridor may be present.
– Signs of serious illness: sweating, tachycardia, cyanosis, altered level of consciousness. Examine children in a sitting position. Do not lay children down: there is a risk of respiratory airway obstruction.

Aetiology and treatment
Children over 6 months
1st case: rapid onset dyspnoea (over a few hours)
– Acute epiglottitis due to Haemophilus influenzae: sudden onset, severe dyspnoea, chest indrawing, high fever, cervical lymphadenopathy. The child is sitting, breathing through the mouth, drooling clear saliva which he cannot swallow due to dysphagia.
The overall condition may deteriorate very quickly.
• Avoid examining the larynx (risk of respiratory arrest), do not lay the child down, keep him in a sitting position.
• Have the child breathe in a humid environment (next to a bowl of water or a wet towel). • Antibiotic treatment: ceftriaxone IM: 100 mg/kg/day in 2 injections for 5 days or, failing that, ampicillin IV: 200 mg/kg/day in 3 or 4 injections, change as soon as possible to oral treatment with amoxicillin PO: 100 mg/kg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses to complete
5 days of treatment or chloramphenicol IV: 100 mg/kg/day in 3 injections, change as soon as possible to oral treatment, at the same dosages to complete 5 days of treatment
• If a patient has severe respiratory distress: intubation in a specialised setting, or failing that, tracheotomy.
– Spasmodic laryngitis in a child with rhinitis or measles: sudden, nocturnal onset with coughing fits followed by periods of suffocation and inspiratory dyspnoea. The child may develop stridor. The voice remains hoarse after the attack. The child remains afebrile.
• Monitor the child, try to keep him calm. Have him breathe in a humid environment
(near a bowl of water or wet towel).

51

2

Acute laryngitis

• Nasal irrigation with 0.9% sodium chloride or Ringer Lactate, 4 to 6 times/day to clear the airway.
• An antihistamine may be given for 3 days: promethazine PO
Children from 2 to 5 years: 5 to 15 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses
Children from 5 to 10 years: 10 to 25 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses
Children over 10 years: 25 to 50 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses or chlorphenamine PO
Children from 1 to 2 years: 1 mg 2 times daily
Children from 2 to 6 years: 1 mg 4 to 6 times daily
Children from 6 to 12 years: 2 mg 4 to 6 times daily
Adults: 4 mg 4 to 6 times daily
• In children with severe dyspnoea: dexamethasone IM: 0.1 to 0.2 mg/kg as a single dose or hydrocortisone IM: 1 mg/kg as a single dose
2nd case: progressive onset dyspnoea (over more than 24 hours)
– Viral subglottitis: the onset is frequently nocturnal, the dyspnoea is typical, the cry and cough have a raucous sound, but expiration is unobstructed.
• Monitor the child, try to keep him calm. Have him breathe in a humid environment
(near a bowl of water or wet towel).
• dexamethasone IM: 0.1 to 0.2 mg/kg or hydrocortisone IM: 1 mg/kg, to be repeated after 30 minutes if necessary
• Antibiotics are not useful, except in cases of secondary infection (amoxicillin or cotrimoxazole). • In case of deterioration: intubation if possible, or, failing that, tracheotomy.
Note: exclude diphtheria (see Diphtheria, page 55) and retropharyngeal abscess.

Adults
– Usually viral: treatment is symptomatic (paracetamol or acetylsalicylic acid PO).
– Very rarely, epiglottitis due to Haemophilus influenzae, diphtheria or retropharyngeal abscess: same clinical signs and treatment as for children.
– Also consider laryngeal tuberculosis in a patient with tuberculosis, or cancer of the larynx, particularly if the patient smokes.

52

2. Respiratory diseases

Acute pharyngitis
Acute inflammation of the tonsils and pharynx. The majority of cases are of viral origin and do not require antibiotic treatment.
Group A streptococcus is the main bacterial cause, and mainly affects children age 3 to
14 years. Acute rheumatic fever, a serious late complication of streptococcal pharyngitis, is common in developing countries, and can be prevented with antibiotic therapy. One of the main objectives in assessing acute pharyngitis is to identify patients requiring antibiotic treatment.

Clinical features
– Features common to all types of pharyngitis:
Throat pain and dysphagia (difficulty swallowing), with or without fever.
– Specific features, depending on the cause:
Common forms:
• Erythematous (red throat) or exudative (red throat and whitish exudate) pharyngitis:
Since this appearance is common to both viral and streptococcal pharyngitis, other criteria should be considered to distinguish between them:
In children under 3 years, streptococcal pharyngitis is rare and pharyngitis is almost exclusively viral.
In children from 3 to 14 years, the presence of at least 3 of the 4 following features
[absence of cough, fever above 38°C, at least one enlarged and tender anterior cervical lymph node, presence of an exudate] favours streptococcal pharyngitis.
Conversely, presence of cough, runny nose, conjunctivitis or enlarged posterior cervical lymph nodes favours viral pharyngitis.
In patients over 14 years, the probability of streptococcal pharyngitis is low.
Infectious mononucleosis (IM) due to the Epstein-Barr virus should be suspected in adolescents and young adults with extreme fatigue, generalized adenopathy and often splenomegaly.
Erythematous or exudative pharyngitis may also be associated with gonococcal or primary HIV infection. In these cases, the diagnosis is mainly prompted by the patient's history.
• Pseudomembranous pharyngitis (red tonsils/pharynx covered with an adherent grayish white false membrane): see diphtheria, page 55.
Less common forms:
• Vesicular pharyngitis (clusters of tiny blisters on the tonsils): always viral (coxsackie virus or primary herpetic infection).
• Ulcero-necrotic pharyngitis: hard and painless syphilitic chancre of the tonsil; tonsillar ulcer soft on palpation in a patient with poor oral hygiene and malodorous breath (Vincent tonsillitis).
– Local complications:
Peritonsillar abcess: fever, intense pain, hoarse voice, trismus (limitation of mouth opening), unilateral deviation of the uvula.

53

2

Acute pharyngitis

Treatment
– Treat fever and pain in all cases (paracetamol PO, page 26)
– Viral pharyngitis is usually a self-limited illness. Spontaneous resolution typically occurs within a few days (or weeks, for IM): no antibiotic therapy.
– Choice of antibiotic treatment for streptococcal pharyngitis:
• If single-use injection equipment is available, benzathine benzylpenicillin is the drug of choice as streptococcus A resistance to penicillin remains rare; it is the only antibiotic proven effective in reducing the incidence of rheumatic fever; and the treatment is administered as a single dose. benzathine benzylpenicilin IM
Children under 6 years: 600 000 IU as a single dose
Children over 6 years and adults: 1.2 MIU as a single dose
• Penicillin V is the oral reference treatment, but poor adherence is predictable due to the length of treatment. phenoxymethylpenicilin (penicillin V) PO for 10 days
Children under 1 year: 250 mg/day in 2 divided doses
Children from 1 to 5 years: 500 mg/day in 2 divided doses
Children from 6 to 12 years: 1 g/day in 2 divided doses
Adults: 2 g/day in 2 divided doses
• Amoxicillin is an alternative and the treatment has the advantage of being relatively short. However, it can cause adverse skin reactions in patients with undiagnosed IM and thus should be avoided when IM has not been excluded. amoxicillin PO for 6 days
Children: 50 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses
Adults: 2 g/day in 2 divided doses
• Resistance to macrolides is frequent, erythromycin and azithromycin should be reserved for penicillin allergic patients. Poor adherence with erythromycin is predictable due to the length of treatment. Azithromycin treatment has the advantage of being short. erythromycin PO for 10 days
Children: 30 to 50 mg/kg/day in 2 to 3 divided doses
Adults: 2 to 3 g/day in 2 to 3 divided doses or azithromycin PO for 3 days
Children: 20 mg/kg once daily
Adults: 500 mg once daily
– Gonococcal or syphilitic pharyngitis: same treatment as for genital gonorrhoea and syphilis – Diphtherial pharyngitis: see diphtheria, page 55
– Vincent tonsillitis: penicillin V or erythromycin as above
– Peritonsillar abscess: refer for surgical drainage

54

2. Respiratory diseases

Diphtheria
Diphtheria is a bacterial infection due to Corynebacterium diphtheriae, characterized by local proliferation (most commonly ENT) of the bacteria, and systemic diffusion of the diphtheria toxin through the body.
Transmission is by direct contact with an infected person.

Clinical features
– Incubation period: 3 to 5 days
– Local signs:
• febrile tonsillitis with pseudomembranes (grey, tough and very sticky false membranes) sometimes accompanied by signs of serious illness: high fever (greater than 39°C), oliguria, cervical oedema, enlarged cervical lymph glands and signs of haemorrhage (cervical or thoracic purpura, gingival bleeding, epistaxis).
• laryngitis, most commonly secondary to the tonsillitis. Risk of death by asphyxiation. • other local signs: rhinitis (often unilateral); secondary infection of a skin lesion with
C. diphtheriae.
– General signs due to the toxin:
• mycocarditis: clinically detectable arrhythmias or cardiac conduction defects in 25% of patients. These are more serious when appear early (from the 5th day).
• neuropathies may occur 1 to 3 months after the onset of the disease: paralysis of the soft palate, respiratory muscles, limbs and accommodation.
• more rarely: pneumonia, renal failure with oligo-anuria and haematuria.

Laboratory
Confirmation is made by isolating the toxic strain of C. diphtheriae from a throat swab.

Treatment (at hospital level)
– Strict isolation.
– Treatment with antitoxin serum: do not wait for bacteriological confirmation.
For diphtheria antitoxin derived from horse serum, administer according to the
Besredka method1.
Doses are given as a function of the severity of illness, and the delay in treatment:
Dose in units

Administration route

Laryngitis or pharyngitis

20 000 to 40 000

Rhinopharyngitis

40 000 to 60 000

Depends on the volume to be administered: IM or for volumes greater than 20 000 units IV infusion in 200 ml 0.9% NaCl, over one hour

Serious forms or if treatment is started more than 48 hours after onset of symptoms

80 000 and up to 100 000

1 Besredka method: inject 0.1 ml SC and wait 15 minutes. If there is no allergic reaction (no erythema at the injection

site or a flat erythema of less than 0.5 in diameter, inject a further 0.25 ml SC. If there is no reaction after 15 minutes, inject the rest of the product IM or IV depending on the volume to be administered. In the event of an anaphylactic reaction, give epinephrine (adrenaline) IM, to be repeated every 5 minutes if there is no improvement:
Infants and children: 0.01 mg/kg/injection
Adults: 0.25 to 0.75 mg/injection
Insert an IV line. In the event of anaphylactic shock, see Shock, page 17.
55

2

Diphtheria

– Antibiotic treatment:

benzathine benzylpenicillin IM
Children under 6 years: 600 000 IU as a single dose
Children over 6 years and adults: 1.2 MIU as a single dose or procaine benzylpenicillin IM
Children: 50 000 IU/kg once daily for 7 days
Adults: 1.2 MIU once daily for 7 days

For penicillin-allergic patients:

erythromycin PO

Children: 50 mg/kg/day in 2 to 3 divided doses for 7 days
Adults: 2 to 3 g/day in 2 to 3 divided doses for 7 days
– Urgent intervention to secure an airway (intubation, tracheotomy) may be necessary in the event of laryngeal obstruction or cardiac or neurologic complications.

Management of close contacts
– Nose and throat cultures.
– Daily clinical monitoring (throat examination and temperature) for 7 days.
– Quarantine
– Antibiotic treatment: see above.
– Verify vaccination status:
• less than 3 injections: complete with DTP, DT or Td depending on age,
• 3 injections: if the last injection was given more than one year before, give a booster dose. The same precautions should be taken for contacts of healthy carriers.

Prevention
There are 3 combined vaccines:
DTP: diphtheria-tetanus-pertussis
DT: diphtheria (30 IU) and tetanus, for those under 7 years of age
Td: diphtheria (3 IU) and tetanus, for those over 7 years of age
– In the event of an epidemic, mass vaccination:
Update routine vaccinations with DTP for children under 3 years of age; DT for children from 3 to 6 years of age; Td for children over 7 years of age and adults.
– Routine vaccination (EPI). The recommendations vary according to the country. For information: DTP: 3 doses at one month intervals before the age of 1 year, DTP booster one year later, and DT at 6 years of age followed by 3 more boosters at 10 year intervals.
Note: the disease does not give immunity. Update the vaccination of the patients once they have recovered. Vaccination does not prevent individuals from becoming carriers.

56

2. Respiratory diseases

Otitis
2

Acute otitis externa
Diffuse inflammation of the external ear canal, due to bacterial or fungal infection.
Common precipitants of otitis externa are maceration, trauma of the ear canal or presence of a foreign body or dermatologic diseases (such as eczema, psoriasis).

Clinical features
– Ear canal pruritus or ear pain, often severe and exacerbated by motion of the pinna; feeling of fullness in the ear; clear or purulent ear discharge or no discharge
– Otoscopy:
• diffuse erythema and edema, or infected eczema, of the ear canal
• look for a foreign body
• if visible, the tympanic membrane is normal (swelling, pain or secretions very often prevent adequate visualization of the tympanic membrane)

Treatment
– Remove a foreign body, if present.
– Treatment of pain: paracetamol and/or ibuprofen PO (page 29).
– Local treatment (usually 5 to 7 days):
Remove skin debris and secretions from the auditory canal by gentle dry mopping
(use a dry cotton bud or a small piece of dry cotton wool). In addition, 0.5% gentian violet can be applied once a day, using a cotton bud.
Consider ear irrigation (0.9% sodium chloride, using a syringe) only if the tympanic membrane can be fully visualised and is intact (no perforation). Otherwise, ear irrigation is contra-indicated.

Acute otitis media (AOM)
Acute inflammation of the middle ear, due to viral or bacterial infection, very common in children under 3 years, but uncommon in adults.
The principal causative organisms of bacterial otitis media are Streptococcus pneumoniae,
Haemophilus influenzae, Moraxella catarrhalis and in older children, Streptococcus pyogenes.

Clinical features
– Rapid onset of ear pain (in infants: crying, irritability, sleeplessness, reluctance to nurse) and ear discharge (otorrhoea) or fever.
– Other signs such as rhinorrhoea, cough, diarrhoea or vomiting are frequently associated, and may confuse the diagnosis, hence the necessity of examining the tympanic membranes.

57

Otitis

– Otoscopy: bright red tympanic membrane (or yellowish if rupture is imminent) and presence of pus, either externalised (drainage in ear canal if the tympanic membrane is ruptured) or internalised (opaque or bulging tympanic membrane). The combination of these signs with ear pain or fever confirms the diagnosis of AOM.
Note:
The following otoscopic findings are not sufficient to make the diagnosis of AOM:
• A red tympanic membrane alone, with no evidence of bulging or perforation, is suggestive of viral otitis in a context of upper respiratory tract infection, or may be due to prolonged crying in children or high fever.
• The presence of air bubbles or fluid behind an intact tympanic membrane, in the absence of signs and symptoms of acute infection, is suggestive of otitis media with effusion (OME).
– Complications, particularly in high-risk children (malnutrition, immunodeficiency, ear malformation) include chronic suppurative otitis media, and rarely, mastoiditis, brain abscess or meningitis.

Treatment
– In all cases:
• Treatment of pain and fever: paracetamol PO, page 26.
• Ear irrigation is contra-indicated if the tympanic membrane is ruptured, or when the tympanic membrane cannot be fully visualised. Ear drops are not indicated.
– Indications for antibiotic therapy:
• Antibiotics are prescribed in children less than 2 years, children whose assessment suggests severe infection (vomiting, fever > 39°C, severe pain) and children at risk of unfavourable outcome (malnutrition, immunodeficiency, ear malformation).
• For other children:
1) If the child can be re-examined within 48 to 72 hours: it is preferable to delay antibiotic prescription. Spontaneous resolution is probable and a short symptomatic treatment of fever and pain may be sufficient. Antibiotics are prescribed if there is no improvement or worsening of symptoms after 48 to
72 hours.
2) If the child cannot be re-examined: antibiotics are prescribed.
• For children treated with antibiotics: advise the mother to bring the child back if fever and pain persist after 48 hours.
– Choice of antibiotic therapy:
• Amoxicillin is the first-line treatment: amoxicillin PO: 80 to 100 mg/kg/day in 2 to 3 divided doses for 5 days
• Amoxicillin/clavulanic acid is used as second-line treatment, in the case of treatment failure. Treatment failure is defined as persistence of fever and/or ear pain after 48 hours of antibiotic treatment. amoxicillin/clavulanic acid PO (dose expressed in amoxicillin): 45 mg/kg/day in 2 to
3 divided doses for 5 days
Persistence of a ear drainage alone, without fever and pain, in a child who has otherwise improved (reduction in systemic symptoms and local inflammation) does not warrant a change in antibiotic therapy. Clean ear canal by gentle dry mopping until no more drainage is obtained.

58

2. Respiratory diseases

• Azithromycin or erythromycin should be reserved for very rare penicillin-allergic patients, as treatment failure (resistance to macrolides) is frequent. azithromycin PO
Children over 6 months: 10 mg/kg once daily for 3 days erythromycin PO
30 to 50 mg/kg/day in 2 to 3 divided doses for 10 days

Chronic suppurative otitis media (CSOM)
Chronic bacterial infection of the middle ear with persistent purulent discharge through a perforated tympanic membrane.
The principal causative organisms are Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Proteus spp, staphylococcus, other Gram negatives and anaerobes.

Clinical features
– Purulent discharge for more than 2 weeks, often associated with hearing loss or even deafness; absence of pain and fever
– Otoscopy: perforation of the tympanic membrane and purulent exudate
– Complications:
• Consider a superinfection (AOM) in the case of new onset of fever with ear pain, and treat accordingly.
• Consider mastoiditis in the case of new onset of high fever, severe ear pain and/or tender swelling behind the ear, in a patient who appears significantly unwell.
• Consider brain abscess or meningitis in the case of impaired consciousness, neck stiffness and focal neurological signs (e.g. facial nerve paralysis).

Treatment
– Remove secretions from the auditory canal by gentle dry mopping (use a dry cotton bud or a small piece of dry cotton wool) then apply ciprofloxacin (ear drops): 2 drops twice daily, until no more drainage is obtained (max. 4 weeks).
– Complications:
• Chronic mastoiditis is a medical emergency that requires prompt hospitalisation, prolonged antibiotic treatment that covers the causative organisms of CSOM
(ceftriaxone IM 10 days + ciprofloxacin PO for 14 days), atraumatic cleaning of the ear canal; surgical treatment may be required. Before transfer to hospital, if the patient needs to be transferred, administer the first dose of antibiotics.
• Meningitis: see page 165.

59

2

Whooping cough (pertussis)

Whooping cough (pertussis)
Whooping cough is a highly contagious bacterial infection of the lower respiratory tract, of prolonged duration, due to Bordetella pertussis.
B. pertussis is transmitted through inhalation of droplets spread by infected individuals
(coughing, sneezing).
The majority of cases arise in non-vaccinated or incompletely vaccinated individuals.
Whooping cough affects all age groups. Signs and symptoms are usually minor in adolescents and adults. As a result the infection may be ignored, thus contributing to the spread of B. pertussis and infection in infants and young children, in whom the illness is severe.

Clinical features
After an incubation period of 7 to 10 days, the illness evolves in 3 phases:
– Catarrhal phase (1 to 2 weeks): coryza and cough. At this stage, the illness is indistinguishable from a minor upper respiratory infection.
– Paroxysmal phase (1 to 6 weeks):
• Typical presentation: cough of at least 2 weeks duration, occurring in characteristic bouts (paroxysms), followed by a laboured inspiration causing a distinctive sound
(whoop), or vomiting. Fever is absent or moderate, and the clinical exam is normal between coughing bouts; however, the patient becomes more and more fatigued.
• Atypical presentations:
- Infants under 6 months: paroxysms are poorly tolerated, with apnoea, cyanosis; coughing bouts and whoop may be absent.
- Adults: prolonged cough, often without other symptoms.
• Complications:
- Major: in infants, secondary bacterial pneumonia (new-onset fever is an indicator); malnutrition and dehydration triggered by poor feeding due to cough and vomiting ; rarely, seizures, encephalopathy; sudden death.
- Minor: subconjunctival haemorrhage, petechiae, hernias, rectal prolapse
– Convalescent phase: symptoms gradually resolve over weeks or months.

Management and treatment
Suspect cases
– Routinely hospitalise infants less than 3 months, as well as children with severe cases.
Infants under 3 months must be monitored 24 hours per day due to the risk of apnoea. – When children are treated as outpatients, educate the parents about signs that should lead to re-consultation (fever, deterioration in general condition, dehydration, malutrition, apnoea, cyanosis).
– Respiratory isolation (until the patient has received 5 days of antibiotic treatment):
• at home: avoid contact with non-vaccinated or incompletely vaccinated infants;
• in congregate settings: exclusion of suspect cases;
• in hospital: single room or grouping together of cases away from other patients
(cohorting).
60

2. Respiratory diseases

– Hydration and nutrition: ensure children < 5 years are well hydrated; breastfeeding should continue. Advise mothers to feed the child frequently in small quantities after coughing bouts and the vomiting which follows. Monitor the weight of the child during the course of the illness, and consider food supplements for several weeks after recovery.
– Antibiotic therapy:
Antibiotic treatment is indicated in the first 3 weeks after onset of cough. Infectivity is virtually nil after 5 days of antibiotic treatment.

Alernative

First line

Antibiotic

azithromycin PO

once daily, for 5 days

erythromycin PO in 3 divided doses, for 7 days

cotrimoxazole PO in 2 divided doses, for 14 days

Child

Adult

0-5 months:
D1
500 mg
10 mg/kg/day
D2-D5 250 mg/day
≥ 6 months:
D1
10 mg/kg (max 500 mg)
D2-D5 5 mg/kg/d (max 250 mg/d)
50 mg/kg/day
(avoid in infant < 1 month of age)

1 g/day

40 mg/kg/day SMX
1600 mg/day SMX
+ 8 mg/kg/day TMP
+ 320 mg/day TMP
(avoid in infant < 1 month of age, and last month of pregnancy)

– For hospitalised children:
• Place the child in a semi-reclining position (± 30°).
• Oro-pharyngeal suction if needed.
Post-exposure prophylaxis
– Antibiotic prophylaxis (same treatment as for suspect cases) is recommended for unvaccinated or incompletely vaccinated infants of less than 6 months, who have had contact with a suspect case.
– Isolation of contacts is not necessary.
Note: pertussis vaccination should be updated in all cases (suspects and contacts). If the primary series has been interrupted, it should be completed, rather than restarted from the beginning.

Prevention
Routine vaccination with polyvalent vaccines containing pertussis antigens (e.g. DTP, or DTP + Hep B, or DTP + Hib + Hep B) from the age of 6 weeks or according to national protocol.
Neither vaccination nor natural disease confers lasting immunity. Booster doses are necessary to reinforce immunity and reduce the risk of developing disease and transmitting it to young children.

61

2

Bronchitis

Bronchitis
Acute bronchitis
An acute inflammation of the bronchial mucosa, most commonly of viral origin. In older children it can be caused by Mycoplasma pneumoniae. In children over 2 years of age with repetitive acute bronchitis or ‘wheezing’ bronchitis, consider asthma
(see Asthma, page 73). In children under 2 years of age, consider bronchiolitis
(see Bronchiolitis, page 64).

Clinical features
Often begins with a rhinopharyngitis that descends progressively: pharyngitis, laryngitis, tracheitis.
– Heavy cough, dry at the beginning then becoming productive
– Low-grade fever
– No tachypnoea, no dyspnoea
– On pulmonary auscultation: bronchial wheezing

Treatment
– Fever: paracetamol PO (see Fever, page 26).
– Keep the patient hydrated, humidify air (with a bowl of water or a wet towel).
– Children: nasal irrigation with 0.9% sodium chloride or Ringer Lactate, 4 to
6 times/day to clear the airway.
– Antibiotic treatment is not useful for patients in good overall condition with rhinopharyngitis or influenza.
– Antibiotic treatment is indicated only if:
• the patient is in poor general condition: malnutrition, measles, rickets, severe anaemia, cardiac disease, elderly patient etc.
• if the patient has dyspnoea, fever greater than 38.5°C and purulent expectorations: a secondary infection with Haemophilus influenzae or with pneumococcus is probable. amoxicillin PO

Children: 100 mg/kg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 5 days
Adults: 3 g/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 5 days or chloramphenicol PO
Children over 2 months: 50 to 100 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses for 5 days
Adults: 3 g/day in 3 divided doses for 5 days

62

2. Respiratory diseases

Chronic bronchitis
A chronic inflammation of the bronchial mucosa due to irritation (tobacco, pollution), allergy (asthma) or infection (repetitive acute bronchitis). It may develop into chronic obstructive pulmonary disease.

Clinical features
– Productive cough for 3 consecutive months per year for 2 successive years.
– No dyspnoea at onset. Dyspnoea develops after several years, first on exertion, then becoming persistent.
– On pulmonary auscultation: bronchial wheeze (always exclude tuberculosis).
A patient with an acute exacerbation of chronic bronchitis presents with:
– Onset or increase of dyspnoea
– Increased volume of sputum
– Purulent sputum

Treatment
– Antibiotic treatment is not useful in treating simple chronic bronchitis.
– Antibiotic treatment may be useful, for patients in a poor general condition only, for acute exacerbations of chronic bronchitis (see Acute bronchitis, previous page).
– Discourage smoking and other irritating factors.

63

2

Bronchiolitis

Bronchiolitis
Bronchiolitis is an epidemic and seasonal viral infection of the lower respiratory tract in children less than 2 years of age, characterised by bronchiolar obstruction.
Respiratory syncytial virus (RSV) is responsible for 70% of cases of bronchiolitis.
Transmission of RSV is direct, through inhalation of droplets (coughing, sneezing), and indirect, through contact with hands or materials contaminated by infected secretions.
In the majority of cases, bronchiolitis is benign, resolves spontaneously (relapses are possible), and can be treated on an outpatient basis.
Severe cases may occur, which put the child at risk due to exhaustion or secondary bacterial infection. Hospitalisation is necessary when signs/criteria of severity are present (10 to 20% of cases).

Clinical features
– Tachypnoea, dyspnoea, wheezing, cough; profuse, frothy, obstructive secretions.
– On auscultation: prolonged expiration with diffuse, bilateral wheezes; sometimes diffuse fine, end-inspiratory crackles.
Rhinopharyngitis, with dry cough, precedes these features by 24 to 72 hours; fever is absent or moderate.
– Signs of severity:
• Significant deterioration in general condition, toxic appearance (pallor, greyish colouration) • Apnoea, cyanosis (check lips, buccal mucosa, fingernails)
• Respiratory distress (nasal flaring, sternal and chest wall indrawing)
• Anxiety and agitation (hypoxia), altered level of consciousness
• Respiratory rate > 60/min
• Decreased respiratory distress and slow respirations (< 30/min below the age of
1 year and < 20/min below the age of 3 years, exhaustion). Exercise caution in interpreting these signs as indicators of clinical improvement.
• Sweats, tachycardia at rest and in the absence of fever
• Silence on auscultation (severe bronchospasm)
• Difficulty drinking or sucking (reduced tolerance for exertion)

Treatment
Treatment is symptomatic. Obstructive signs and symptoms last for about 10 days; cough may persist for 2 weeks longer.
Hospitalise children with one of the following criteria:
– Presence of any sign of severity
– Pre-existing pathology (cardiac or pulmonary disease, malnutrition, HIV, etc.)
Consider hospitalisation on a case-by-case basis in the following situations:
– Associated acute pathology (viral gastro-enteritis, bacterial infection, etc.)
– Age less than 3 months

64

2. Respiratory diseases

In all other cases, the child may be treated at home, provided the parents are taught how to carry out treatment, and what signs of severity should lead to re-consultation.
Outpatient treatment
– Nasal irrigation with 0.9% NaCl before each feeding (demonstrate the technique to the mother)1.
– Small, frequent feedings to reduce vomiting triggered by bouts of coughing.
– Increased fluids if fever and/or significant secretions are present.
– Treat fever (see page 26).
– Handle the patient the patient as little as possible and avoid unnecessary procedures.
Hospitalisation
– In all cases:
• Place the infant in a semi-reclining position (± 30°).
• Nasal irrigation, small, frequent feeds, treatment of fever: as for outpatient treatment. • Gentle oro-pharyngeal suction if needed.
• Monitor fluid intake: normal requirements are 80 to 100 ml/kg/day + 20 to
25 ml/kg/day with high fever or very profuse secretions.
– According to symptoms:
• Humidified nasal oxygen (1 to 2 litres/min).
• When there is vomiting or significant fatigue when sucking, fluid requirements may be administered by nasogastric tube (small volumes on a frequent basis) or the
IV route, for the shortest possible time. Avoid breastfeeding or oral feeds in children with severe tachypnoea, but do not prolong NG feeds (respiratory compromise) or IV infusions any longer than necessary.
• Bronchodilator therapy: this therapy may be considered after a trial treatment has been given (salbutamol inhaler, 100 micrograms/puff: 2 to 3 puffs with spacer, repeated twice at an interval of 30 minutes). If inhaled salbutamol appears effective in relieving symptoms, the treatment is continued (2 to 3 puffs every 6 hours in the acute phase, then gradual reduction as recovery takes place). If the trial is ineffective, the treatment is discontinued.
• Antibiotics are not indicated unless there is concern about complications such as secondary bacterial pneumonia.
Prevention and control
The risk of transmission of the virus is increased in hospital settings:
– Children with bronchiolitis should be grouped together, away from other children
(cohorting).
– As infection is most commonly transmitted by the hands, the most important prevention measure is hand-washing after any contact with patients, and objects or surfaces in contact with patients on which the virus may survive for several hours.
– In addition, staff should wear gowns, gloves and surgical masks when in contact with patients.

2 Lie the child on his back, head turned to the side and instil 0.9% NaCl into the nose, one nostril at a time.

65

2

Acute pneumonia

Acute pneumonia
Acute pneumonia is a viral, bacterial (pneumococcus, Haemophilus influenzae,
Mycoplasma pneumoniae) or parasitic (Pneumocystis carinii in HIV infected patients) infection of the pulmonary alveoli.

Pneumonia in children under 5 years of age
Clinical features
The most common causes are viruses, pneumococci and Haemophilus influenzae.
Pneumonia should be suspected in all children who present with cough or difficulty breathing. – Often high fever (great than 39°C), but the child may present with low-grade fever or be afebrile (often a sign of serious illness).
– Clinical examination must be done on a calm child in order to correctly count the respiratory rate and to look for signs of serious illness.
– Pulmonary auscultation is often difficult: dullness with diminished vesicular breath sounds, crepitations and sometimes bronchial breathing or normal pulmonary auscultation. – Respiratory rate: because it fluctuates, respiratory rate (RR) should be measured over
1 minute. Use a WHO timer or a watch with a second hand.
A child has tachypnoea (increased respiratory rate) if:
RR > 60 breaths/minute in children under 2 months
RR > 50 breaths/minute in children from 2 to 11 months
RR > 40 breaths/minute in children from 12 months to 5 years
Signs of serious illness (in a calm child who is either resting or asleep) are:
– Chest indrawing: the inferior thoracic wall depresses on inspiration as the superior abdomen expands
– RR > 60 breaths/minute in children under 2 months
– Cyanosis (examine the lips, buccal membranes and fingernails)
– Nasal flaring
– The child refuses to drink or breastfeed
– The child is abnormally sleepy or difficult to wake
– Stridor (hoarse noise on inspiration)
– Grunting (a short repetitive noise produced by a partial closure of the vocal cords) on expiration – Severe malnutrition
Notes:
– In children, fever may cause the RR to increase by 10 breaths/minute with each increase of 1°C.
– In malnourished children, the RR thresholds should be decreased by
5 breaths/minute from those listed above.
– Chest indrawing is not significant if it is not clearly visible and present at all times. If it is only observed when a child is upset or feeding and is not visible when the child is resting, there is no chest indrawing.
66

2. Respiratory diseases

– In children under 2 months of age, moderate chest indrawing is normal as the thoracic wall is flexible.
– If only the soft tissues between the ribs or above the clavicles depress, there is no chest indrawing.
– Exclude severe malaria which may also cause respiratory signs with cough and tachypnoea. Clinical anaemia, splenomegaly, and full, deep breathing are suggestive of severe malaria. Unilateral signs on auscultation, the presence of crepitations and chest indrawing are more suggestive of pneumonia.
– In patients with painful abdominal swelling and diarrhoea, consider staphylococcal pneumonia (see page 72).
Diagnosis of pneumonia in children under 5 presenting with cough or difficulty breathing: Chest indrawing present? with ou without other signs of serious illness

NO

YES

Increased RR?

Severe pneumonia

NO

YES

Children under 2 months

RR > 60 breaths/minute

Children from 2 to 11 months RR > 50 breaths/minute
Children from 12 to 59 months RR > 40 breaths/minute

Cough
Upper respiratory tract infections

Pneumonia

67

2

Acute pneumonia

Treatment
Severe pneumonia (at hospital level)
In children under 2 months of age
Treatment of choice is: ceftriaxone IM or slow IV1
Newborns: 50 mg/kg by infusion over 60 minutes, once daily
Children over 1 month: 50 mg/kg by IM or slow IV injection once daily (over 3 minutes) for a minimum of 3 days, then change to oral treatment with amoxicillin PO:
100 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses to complete 7 to 10 days of treatment or, failing that, ampicillin IV or IM: 100 mg/kg/day in 3 or 4 injections. Once the fever has disappeared or there are no more signs of serious illness, change to oral treatment with amoxicillin at the same dosage, to complete 7 to 10 days of treatment.
+ gentamicin IM: 3 to 6 mg/kg once daily for 7 days
If there is no improvement or if the child’s condition is deteriorating after 48 hours of correct treatment, consider staphylococcal pneumonia (see page 72).
Children from 2 months to 5 years of age ampicillin above). or IV or IM + gentamicin IM at the same doses as for infants under 2 months (see

chloramphenicol

IV or IM: 100 mg/kg/day in 3 injections for a minimum of 5 days, then change to oral treatment at the same dosage to complete 7 to 10 days of treatment
If there is no improvement or if the child’s condition is deteriorating after 48 hours of correct treatment, consider staphylococcal pneumonia (see page 72).

When the correct administration of injectable chloramphenicol or ampicillin 3 times daily cannot be guaranteed, the antibiotic of choice is ceftriaxone IV or IM, followed by amoxicillin PO, at the same dosage as for children under 2 months (see above).
Adjuvant therapy for all patients
Fever: give paracetamol PO (see Fever, page 26).
Nasal irrigation with 0.9% sodium chloride or Ringer Lactate to clear the airway.
Oxygen at a rate of 1 litre/minute.
Maintain adequate hydration and nutrition: in children under 12 months, milk (use a breast pump when appropriate) and water by spoon on demand. In children over
12 months, give food, milk and water on demand.
– If the child refuses to eat, use a nasogastric tube. In children under 12 months:
5 ml/kg/hour. In children over 12 months: 3 to 4 ml/kg/hour; alternate milk, water and ORS if necessary.
– Children under 2 months: keep warm.
–
–
–
–

1 The solvent of ceftriaxone for IM injection contains lidocaine. Ceftriaxone reconstituted using this solvent must
NEVER

68

be administered by IV route. For IV administration, water for injection must always be used

2. Respiratory diseases

Pneumonia with no signs of serious illness (at dispensary level, except for young infants)

Children under 2 months of age

2

Treat in hospital as severe pneumonia (see above).
Children from 2 months to 5 years of age
Haemophilus influenzae is common at this age, as is pneumococcus which is more serious: amoxicillin PO: 100 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses for 5 days
Follow-up in 48 hours or sooner if the child’s condition deteriorates:
– If the child is improving: continue with the same antibiotic to complete treatment.
– If there is no improvement despite correct treatment, change to chloramphenicol PO:
100 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses for 5 days.
– If the child’s condition is deteriorating: hospitalise and treat as severe pneumonia.

Pneumonia in children over 5 years and adults
Clinical features
The most common causes are viruses, pneumococci, and Mycoplasma pneumoniae.
– Cough, with or without purulent sputum, fever, thoracic pain, tachypnoea
– On pulmonary auscultation: decreased vesicular breath sounds, dullness, localised foci of crepitations, sometimes bronchial wheeze.
Sudden onset with high fever (higher than 39°C), thoracic pain and oral herpes are suggestive of pneumoccal infection. Symptoms may be confusing, particularly in children with abdominal pain, meningeal syndrome etc.
Signs of serious illness (severe pneumonia):
– Cyanosis (examine the lips, buccal mucosa, and the fingernails)
– Nasal flaring
– Intercostal or subclavial indrawing
– RR > 30 breaths/minute
– Heart rate > 125 beats/minute
– Altered level of consciousness (drowsiness, confusion)
Those at risk include the elderly, immunocompromised patients (severe malnutrition,
HIV infection with CD4 < 200 cells/mm3 or splenectomy) or patients suffering from heart failure, sickle cell disease or severe chronic bronchitis.

69

Acute pneumonia

Treatment
Severe pneumonia (at hospital level)

benzylpenicillin procaine + benzylpenicillin IM
Children: 100 000 IU/kg once daily for 2 to 3 days then, once the fever or signs of severe illness have disappeared, change to oral treatment with amoxicillin PO:
100 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses to complete 7 days of treatment.
Adults: 3 to 4 MIU once daily for 2 to 3 days then, once the fever or signs of severe illness have disappeared, change to oral treatment with amoxicillin PO: 3 g/day in
3 divided doses to complete 7 days of treatment. or ampicillin IV or IM
Children: 100 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
Adults: 3 g/day in 3 injections
Once the fever or signs of severe illness have disappeared, change to oral treatment with amoxicillin PO at the same dosage to complete 7 days of treatment

If there is no improvement after 48 hours of correct treatment, change antibiotic treatment to: chloramphenicol IV or IM
Children: 100 mg/kg/day in 3 injections for 2 to 3 days
Adults: 3 to 4 g/day in 3 injections for 2 to 3 days
Then change to oral treatment at the same dosage to complete 7 days of treatment.
When the correct administration of injectable chloramphenicol or ampicillin 3 times daily cannot be guaranteed, the antibiotic of choice is ceftriaxone IV or IM, followed by amoxicillin PO:
Children: same dosage as for children under 2 months (see page 68).
Adults: ceftriaxone IM or slow IV (over 3 minutes): 1 g once daily for a minimum of
3 days followed by amoxicillin PO: 3 g/day in 3 divided doses to complete 7 to 10 days of treatment.
Adjuvant therapy for all patients
– Fever (see Fever, page 26).
– Nasal irrigation with 0.9% sodium chloride or Ringer Lactate to clear the airway.
– Oxygen at a rate of 1 litre/minute.
– Maintain adequate hydration and nutrition. Use a nasogastric tube if necessary.

Pneumonia without signs of serious illness (at dispensary level)
Typical pneumonia (acute lobar pneumonia)
Pneumococcus is the most common cause.

benzylpenicillin procaine + benzylpenicillin IM

Children: 100 000 IU/kg once daily for 5 days
Adults: 3 to 4 MIU once daily for 5 days or amoxicillin PO
Children: 100 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses for 5 days
Adults: 3 g/day in 3 divided doses for 5 days

70

2. Respiratory diseases

Follow-up in 48 hours or sooner if the patient’s condition deteriorates:
– if the patient is improving: continue with the same antibiotic to complete treatment.
– if the patient’s condition is deteriorating: hospitalise and treat as severe pneumonia.

2

Persistent pneumonia
Consider an atypical pneumonia (Mycoplasma pneumoniae, Chlamydia pneumoniae).

erythromycin PO
Children: 50 mg/kg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 10 days
Adults: 2 to 3 g/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 10 days

or, failing that, doxycycline PO (contra-indicated in children under 8 years and pregnant or lactating women) Children: 4 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses for 10 days
Adults: 200 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 10 days
If signs persist after 2 consecutive treatments, consider tuberculosis (see Tuberculosis, page 78) or Pneumocystis carinii pneumonia (see HIV infection and AIDS, page 215).

71

Staphylococcal pneumonia

Staphylococcal pneumonia
Pneumonia due to Staphylococcus aureus, specific to infants, often those in a poor general condition (malnutrition, skin lesions etc.). Staphylococcal pneumonia is a classic complication of measles.

Clinical features
– General signs: change in overall condition, grunting, pallor, high fever or hypothermia, frequently signs of shock (see Shock, page 17) and the presence of skin lesions (point of bacterial entry).
– Gastrointestinal signs: nausea, vomiting, diarrhoea, painful abdominal distention.
– Respiratory signs: dry cough, tachypnoea, signs of distress (nasal flaring, chest indrawing). – Pulmonary auscultation: often normal. Sometimes dullness indicating pleural effusion.
If possible, take a chest x-ray: the presence of bullae confirms the diagnosis. Pleural effusion, often unilateral, may also be seen.

Treatment
Treatment is urgent as patients deteriorate quickly: hospitalise.
– Antibiotic treatment: cloxacilline IV: 200 mg/kg/day in 3 injections + gentamicin IM or IV: 7.5 mg/kg once daily. When the child improves, administer cloxacilline PO to complete 10 to 14 days of treatment. or chloramphenicol IV (children over 2 months): 100 mg/kg/day in 3 injections. When the child improves, administer chloramphenicol PO to complete 10 to 14 days of treatment. – Oral (or with a nasogastric tube) or intravenous hydration.
– Oxygen at a rate of 1 litre/minute.
– Local disinfection of skin lesions (see Bacterial skin infections, page 105).
– If there is significant pleural effusion: pleural tap with drainage (for pyopneumothorax; insert 2 drains, one anterior and one posterior) or without drainage (for suppurative pleurisy, make repetitive taps with an IV catheter).

Clinical evolution
– There is a serious risk of decompensation from pneumothorax or suppurative pleurisy or pyopneumothorax.
– On a paediatric ward, adequate equipment for urgent pleural drainage should always be available.

72

2. Respiratory diseases

Asthma
Asthma is a chronic inflammatory disorder of the airways associated with airway hyper-responsiveness that leads to recurrent episodes of wheezing, breathlessness, chest tightness and coughing. These episodes are usually associated with airflow obstruction within the lung, often reversible, either spontaneously or with treatment.
Factors that precipitate/aggravate asthma include: allergens, infection, exercise, drugs
(aspirin), tobacco, etc.
In young children, most initial episodes of asthma-like symptoms are associated with a respiratory tract infection, with no symptoms between infections. Wheezing episodes usually become less frequent with time; most of these children do not develop asthma.

Asthma attack (acute asthma)
Asthma attack is a substantial worsening of asthma symptoms. The severity and duration of attacks are variable and unpredictable.

Assessment of the severity of asthma attack
The severity of the asthma attack must be rapidly evaluated by the following clinical criteria. Not all signs are necessarily present.
Assessment of severity in children under 2 years and adults
MILD TO MODERATE ATTACK
Able to talk in sentences
Respiratory rate (RR)
Child 2-5 years ≤ 40/min
Child > 5 years ≤ 30/min
Pulse
Child 2-5 years
Child > 5 years

≤ 140/min
≤ 125/min

and
No criteria of severity

SEVERE ATTACK

LIFE THREATENING ATTACK

Cannot complete sentences
Altered level of consciousness
(drowsiness, confusion, coma) in one breath or Too breathless to talk or feed Exhaustion
RR
Child 2-5 years
Child > 5 years
Adult
Pulse
Child 2-5 years
Child > 5 years
Adult

Silent chest
> 40/min
> 30/min
≥ 25/min

Paradoxical thoracoabdominal movement
Cyanosis

> 140/min
> 125/min
≥ 110/min

O2 saturation ≥ 92%

Collapse
Bradycardia in children or arrhythmia/hypotension in adults O2 saturation < 92%

73

2

Asthma

Treatment
Treatment and follow-up depend on the severity of the attack and the patient’s response:
Mild to moderate attack
– Reassure the patient; place him in a 1/2 sitting position.
– Administer:
• salbutamol (aerosol): 2 to 4 puffs every 20 to 30 minutes, up to 10 puffs if necessary during the first hour. In children, use a spacer1 to ease administration (use face mask in children under 3 years). Single puffs should be given one at a time, let the child breathe 4 to 5 times from the spacer before repeating the procedure.
• prednisolone PO: one dose of 1 to 2 mg/kg
– If the attack is completely resolved: observe the patient for 1 hour (4 hours if he lives far from the health centre) then give outpatient treatment: salbutamol for 24 to
48 hours (2 to 4 puffs every 4 to 6 hours depending on clinical evolution) and prednisolone PO (1 to 2 mg/kg once daily) to complete 3 days of treatment.
– If the attack is only partially resolved: continue with 2 to 4 puffs of salbutamol every
3 to 4 hours if the attack is mild; 6 puffs every 1 to 2 hours if the attack is moderate, until symptoms subside, then when the attack is completely resolved, proceed as above. – If symptoms worsen or do not improve, treat as severe attack.
Severe attack
– Hospitalise the patient; place him in a 1/2 sitting position.
– Administer:
• oxygen continuously, at least 5 litres/minute or maintain the O2 saturation between
94 and 98%.
• salbutamol (aerosol): 2 to 4 puffs every 20 to 30 minutes, up to 10 puffs if necessary in children under 5 years, up to 20 puffs in children over 5 years and adults. Use a spacer to increase effectiveness, irrespective of age. or salbutamol (solution for nebulisation), see following page.
• prednisolone PO: one dose of 1 to 2 mg/kg
In the case of vomiting, use hydrocortisone IV every 6 hours (children: 5 mg/kg/injection, adults: 100 mg/injection) until the patient can tolerate oral prednisolone.
– If the attack is completely resolved, observe the patient for at least 4 hours. Continue the treatment with salbutamol for 24 to 48 hours (2 to 4 puffs every 4 hours) and prednisolone PO (1 to 2 mg/kg once daily) to complete 3 days of treatment.
Reassess after 10 days: consider long-term treatment if the asthma attacks have been occurring for several months. If the patient is already receiving long-term treatment, reassess the severity of the asthma (see table, page 78) and review compliance and correct use of medication and adjust treatment if necessary.
– If symptoms worsen or do not improve, see life-threatening attack.
1 If a conventional spacer is not available, use a 500 ml plastic bottle: insert the mouthpiece of the inhaler into a hole

made in the bottom of the bottle (the seal should be as tight as possible). The child breathes from the mouth of the bottle in the same way as he would with a spacer. The use of a plastic cup instead of a spacer is not recommended
(ineffective).

74

2. Respiratory diseases

Life-threatening attack (intensive care)
– Insert an IV line.
– Administer:
• oxygen continuously, at least 5 litres/minute or maintain the O2 saturation between
94 and 98%.
• salbutamol (solution for nebulisation):
Children under 5 years or 15 kg: 2.5 mg/nebulisation, to be repeated every 20 to
30 minutes if necessary until clinical improvement is achieved; switch to salbutamol aerosol (using a spacer) as soon as possible.
Children over 5 years and adults: 2.5 to 5 mg/nebulisation, to be repeated every
20 to 30 minutes if necessary until clinical improvement is achieved; switch to salbutamol aerosol as soon as possible.
Salbutamol must be administered via an oxygen-driven nebuliser.
• hydrocortisone IV every 6 hours (children: 5 mg/kg/injection, adults:
100 mg/injection).
– For patients who do not respond rapidly to nebulised salbutamol:
• In adults, administer a single dose of magnesium sulfate (infusion of 1 to 2 g in
0.9% sodium chloride over 20 minutes).
• In children, use continuous nebulisation rather than intermittent nebulisation.
Notes:
– In pregnant women, treatment is the same as for adults. In mild or moderate asthma attacks, administering oxygen reduces the risk of foetal hypoxia.
– For all patients, irrespective of the severity of the asthma attack, look for underlying lung infection and treat accordingly.

Chronic asthma
Clinical features
– Asthma should be suspected in patients with episodic respiratory symptoms
(wheezing, chest tightness, shortness of breath and/or cough) of variable frequency, severity and duration, disturbing sleep, and causing the patient to sit up to breathe.
These symptoms may appear during or after exercise.
– Chest auscultation may be normal or demonstrate diffuse sibilant wheezes.
– Atopic disorders or a personal or family history of atopy (eczema, allergic rhinitis/conjunctivitis) or a family history of asthma increases probability of asthma but their absence does not exclude asthma.
Patients with typical symptoms of asthma and a history of disease that is characteristic of asthma should be considered as having asthma after exclusion of other diagnoses.
The assessment of the frequency of daytime and nigthtime symptoms and limitations of physical activity determines whether asthma is intermittent or persistent.

75

2

Asthma

Treatment
Only patients with persistent asthma need long-term treatment. The mainstay of treatment is inhaled corticosteroids. Treatment is started at the step most appropriate to initial severity then, re-evaluated and adjusted according to clinical response. It aims to abolish symptoms with the lowest possible dose of inhaled corticosteroids. An intervening severe exacerbation or loss of control necessitates reassessment to reevaluate treatment.
Long-term treatment does not mean treatment for life. Asthma attacks may occur over months or years, with intervening asymptomatic intervals when long-term treatment is not required.
Long-term treatment of asthma according to severity
Categories
Intermittent asthma
– Intermittent symptoms (< once/week)
– Night time symptoms < twice/month
– Normal physical activity
Mild persistent asthma
– Symptoms > once/week, but < once/day
– Night time symptoms > twice/month
– Symptoms may affect activity
Moderate persistent asthma
– Daily symptoms
– Symptoms affect activity
– Night time symptoms > once/week
– Daily use of salbutamol
Severe persistent asthma
– Daily symptoms
– Frequent night time symptoms
– Physical activity limited by symptoms

Treatment
No long term treatment
Inhaled salbutamol when symptomatic
Continuous treatment with inhaled beclometasone
+
Inhaled salbutamol when symptomatic
Continuous treatment with inhaled beclometasone
+
Inhaled salbutamol (1 puff 4 times/day)
Continuous treatment with inhaled beclometasone
+
Inhaled salbutamol (1-2 puff/s 4 to 6 times/day)

Inhaled corticosteroid treatment: beclometasone dose varies according to the severity of asthma. Find the minimum dose necessary to both control the symptoms and avoid local and systemic adverse effects:
Children: 50 to 100 micrograms twice daily depending on the severity. Increase to
200 micrograms twice daily if the symptoms are not controlled. In patients with severe chronic asthma the dosage may be as high as 800 micrograms/day.
Adults: start with 250 to 500 micrograms twice daily depending on to the severity. If a total dosage of 1000 micrograms/day (in 2 to 4 divided doses) is ineffective, the dosage may be increased to 1500 micrograms/day, but the benefits are limited.
The number of puffs of beclometasone depends on its concentration in the inhaled aerosol: 50, 100 or 250 micrograms/puff. To avoid dosing errors, use only inhalers of 50 or 100 micrograms/puff for children. Reserve inhalers of
250 micrograms/puff for adults.

76

2. Respiratory diseases

Do not restrict exercise. If exercise is a trigger for asthma attacks, administer 1 or 2 puffs of salbutamol 10 minutes beforehand.
In pregnant women, poorly controlled asthma increases the risk of pre-eclampsia, eclampsia, haemorrhage, in utero growth retardation, premature delivery, neonatal hypoxia and perinatal mortality. Long-term treatment remains inhaled salbutamol and beclometasone at the usual dosage for adults. Whenever possible, avoid oral corticosteroids. If symptoms are not well controlled during a period of at least 3 months, check the inhalation technique and adherence before changing to a stronger treatment.
If symptoms are well controlled for a period of at least 3 months (the patient is asymptomatic or the asthma has become intermittent): try a step-wise reduction in medication, finally discontinuing treatment, if it seems possible. Provide patients with a salbutamol inhaler for any possible attacks. Evaluate after 2 weeks. If the results are satisfactory, continue for 3 months and then re-evaluate. If the patient has redeveloped chronic asthma, restart long-term treatment, adjusting doses, as required.

77

2

Pulmonary tuberculosis

Pulmonary tuberculosis
Pulmonary tuberculosis is a bacterial infection due to Mycobacterium tuberculosis, spread by airborne route. After contamination, M. tuberculosis multiplies slowly in the lungs: this represents the primary infection.
In immunocompetent patients, the pulmonary lesion heals in 90% of cases, but in 10%, patients develop active tuberculosis.
Tuberculosis may also be extrapulmonary: tuberculous meningitis, disseminated tuberculosis, lymph node tuberculosis, spinal tuberculosis, etc.
Patients with HIV infection have an increased risk of developing active tuberculosis.
Tuberculosis is the opportunistic disease that most commonly reveals AIDS. In certain countries, up to 70% of patients with tuberculosis are co-infected with HIV.

Clinical features
Prolonged cough (> two weeks), sputum production, chest pain, weight loss, anorexia, fatigue, moderate fever, and night sweats.
The most characteristic sign is haemoptysis (presence of blood in sputum), however it is not always present and haemoptysis is not always due to tuberculosis. If sputum is smear-negative, consider pulmonary distomatosis (page 149), melioidosis (Southeast
Asia), profound mycosis or bronchial carcinoma.
In an endemic area, the diagnosis of tuberculosis is to be considered, in practice, for all patients consulting for respiratory symptoms for over two weeks who do not respond to non-specific antibacterial treatment.

Diagnosis
– Sputum smear microscopy; culture
– Chest X-rays are useful for the diagnosis of smear negative tuberculosis and tuberculosis in children.

Treatment
The treatment is a combination of several of the following antituberculous drugs
[isoniazid (H), rifampicin (R), pyrazinamide (Z), ethambutol (E), streptomycin (S)]. The regimen is standardised and organized into 2 phases (initial phase and continuation phase). The treatment of drug-sensitive tuberculosis lasts a minimum of 6 months.
It takes significant investment to cure a TB patient, both from the patient and the medical team. Only uninterrupted treatment for several months may lead to cure and prevent the development of resistance, which complicates later treatment. It is essential that the patient understands the importance of treatment adherence and that he has access to correct case management until treatment is completed.

78

2. Respiratory diseases

Prevention
When BCG is correctly carried out, it confers protection that is not insignificant
(probably over 50%). It has been proven that BCG protects against severe forms of the disease, in particular tuberculous meningitis and miliary tuberculosis.
BCG vaccination does not diminish transmission of tuberculosis.
For more information on the diagnosis, treatment and prevention of tuberculosis, and on the follow-up of tuberculosis patients, refer to the MSF handbook, Tuberculosis.

79

2

3

CHAPTER 3

Gastrointestinal disorders Acute diarrhoea

83

Shigellosis

86

Amoebiasis

88

Disorders of the stomach and duodenum

89

Stomatitis

92

3. Gastrointestinal disorders

Acute diarrhoea

– Acute diarrhoea is defined as at least 3 liquid stools per day for less than 2 weeks.
– There are 2 clinical types of acute diarrhoea:
• Simple diarrhoea without blood, caused by viruses in 60% of cases (rotavirus, enterovirus), bacteria (Vibrio cholerae, enterotoxigenic Escherichia coli, non-typhi
Salmonella, Yersinia enterocolitica) or parasites (giardiasis). Diseases, such as malaria or upper and lower respiratory tract infections, can be accompanied by this type of diarrhoea. • Dysentery or bloody diarrhoea, caused by bacteria (Shigella in 50% of cases,
Campylobacter jejuni, enteroinvasive or enterohaemorrhagic Escherichia coli,
Salmonella) or parasites (intestinal amoebiasis).
– Infectious diarrhoeas are transmitted by direct (dirty hands) or indirect (ingestion of contaminated water or food) contact.
– The high mortality rate from diarrhoeal diseases, even benign, is due to acute dehydration and malnutrition. This can be prevented by adequate rehydration and nutrition. Clinical features
– First assess for signs of dehydration. See Assessment of diarrhoeal patients for dehydration, WHO, page 305.
– Then look for other signs:
• profuse watery diarrhoea (cholera, enterotoxigenic E. coli),
• repeated vomiting (cholera),
• fever (salmonella, viral diarrhoea),
• presence of red blood in stools: see Shigellosis, page 86 and Amoebiasis, page 88.
– In a patient over 5 years with severe and rapid onset of dehydration, suspect cholera.

Treatment
General principles:
– Prevent or treat dehydration: rehydration consists of prompt replacement of fluid and electrolyte losses as required, until the diarrhoea stops.
– Administer zinc sulfate to children under 5 years.
– Prevent malnutrition.
– Do not systematically administer antimicrobials: only certain diarrhoeas require antibiotics (see antimicrobial treatment, following page).
– Do not administer anti-diarrhoeal drugs or antiemetics.

83

3

Acute diarrhoea

Prevention of dehydration (outpatient)
Follow Treatment plan A to treat diarrhoea at home, WHO, page 306.

Treatment of dehydration
Moderate dehydration (at dispensary level)
Follow Treatment plan B to treat dehydration, WHO, page 308.
Severe dehydration (at hospital level)
Follow Treatment plan C to treat severe dehydration quickly, WHO, page 311.
– In the event of hypovolaemic shock or if there is no improvement after one hour: increase the infusion rate.
– Check for signs of fluid overload: palpebral oedema is the first sign of overhydration.
Stop rehydration until oedema disappear.
– If there are signs of acute pulmonary oedema (laryngeal crackles, dyspnoea and increased respiration rate, coughing with or without frothy sputum, distress, bilateral lung crepitations, tachycardia etc.), administer IV furosemide immediately and repeat after one to 2 hours if required:
Children: 1 mg/kg/injection
Adults: 40 mg/injection
Special situations
– Cholera
An adult may require up to 10 to 15 litres of Ringer Lactate on the first day.
After 24 hours infusion, particularly if the patient does not start to eat again, there is a risk of hypokalaemia. This can be compensated for by adding 1 to 2 g of potassium chloride/litre of Ringer Lactate (1 to 2 ampoules of 10 ml 10% KCl). It is essential to carry out a clinical examination beforehand, and the administration must be monitored carefully (an over-rapid infusion of KCl can be fatal).
– Rehydration and severe malnutrition
The principle is the same, but the oral rehydration salts used and the volume of fluids required differ from those used for healthy children (see Severe acute malnutrition, page 40).

Zinc supplementation (in children under 5 years)
Zinc sulfate is given in combination with oral rehydration solution in order to reduce the duration and severity of diarrhoea, as well as to prevent further occurrences in the
2 to 3 months after treatment: zinc sulfate PO
Children under 6 months: 10 mg once daily (1/2 tablet once daily) for 10 days
Children from 6 months to 5 years: 20 mg once daily (1 tablet once daily) for 10 days
Place the half-tablet or full tablet in a teaspoon, add a bit of water to dissolve it, and give the entire spoonful to the child.

Prevention of malnutrition
Follow Treatment plan A to treat diarrhoea at home, WHO, page 306.

84

3. Gastrointestinal disorders

Antimicrobial treatment
Diarrhoea without blood
Most acute diarrhoeas are caused by viruses unresponsive to antimicrobials.
Antimicrobials can be beneficial in the event of cholera or giardiasis.
– Cholera: the most important part of treatment is rehydration. In the absence of resistance, antibiotic treatment may shorten the duration of illness. doxycycline PO
Children: 100 mg as a single dose
Adults: 300 mg as a single dose
Note: doxycycline is usually contraindicated in pregnant women and children under
8 years. However, for treating (but not preventing) cholera, the administration of a single dose should not provoke any adverse effects. Check national recommendations.
– Giardiasis: tinidazole or metronidazole, see page 147.
Bloody diarrhoea (dysentery)
– Shigellosis is the most frequent cause of dysentery (amoebic dysentery is much less common). If there is no laboratory diagnosis to confirm the presence of amoebae, first line treatment is for shigellosis (see page 86).
– Amoebiasis: antiparasitic treatment only if motile E. histolytica amoebae are found in stools or if a correct shigellosis treatment has been ineffective (see page 88).

Prevention
– Breastfeeding reduces infant morbidity and mortality from diarrhoea and the severity of diarrhoea episodes.
– When the child is weaned preparation and storage of food are associated with the risk of contamination by faecal micro-organisms: discourage bottle-feeding; food must be cooked well; milk or porridge must never be stored at room temperature.
– Access to sufficient amounts of clean water and personal hygiene (washing hands with soap and water before food preparation and before eating, after defecation etc.) are effective methods of reducing the spread of diarrhoea.

85

3

Shigellosis

Shigellosis
– There are 4 serogroups of shigella: S. flexneri, S. boydii, S. sonnei and S. dysenteriae.
Shigella dysenteriae type 1 (Sd1) is the only strain that causes large scale epidemics. Of the 4 serogroups it has the highest case fatality rate (up to 10%).
– Ciprofloxacin is currently the only effective treatment for shigellosis. It is therefore essential to prevent the development of resistances.

Clinical features
Bloody diarrhoea with or without fever, abdominal pain and tenesmus, which is often intense. Patients with at least one of the following criteria have an increased risk of death:
– Signs of serious illness: • fever > 38.5°C
• malnutrition (< 80% of the median)
• severe dehydration
• confusion, seizures or coma
– Age groups at risk:
• children under 5 years
• adults over 50 years

Treatment
– Antibiotic treatment:
• ciprofloxacin PO is the first line treatment
Children: 30 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses for 3 days
Adults: 1 g/day in 2 divided doses for 3 days
• in pregnant women, ciprofloxacin is contra-indicated in principle, use ceftriaxone
IM: 1 g once daily for 3 to 5 days
Amoxicillin is ineffective in vivo. The use of nalidixic acid favours the development of ciprofloxacin resistance.
– For pain:

hyoscine butylbromide PO

Children from 6 to 12 years: 10 mg, to be repeated every 8 hours if necessary
Adults: 10 to 20 mg, to be repeated every 8 hours if necessary
All opioid analgesics are contra-indicated as they slow peristalsis.

– Supportive therapy:
• nutrition: all patients with dysentery should receive nutritional supplements
2500 kcal/day during hospitalisation
1000 kcal/day as outpatients
Children already in nutritional centres should be isolated.
• rehydration: systematic administration of ORS (follow the WHO protocols, pages 306 to 311).
86

3. Gastrointestinal disorders

– Never give loperamide or any other antidiarrhoeal.
– Complications of shigellosis due to Sd1:
• septicaemia: see antibiotic treatment of septic shock (page 20)
• acute abdomen: see antibiotic treatment of septic shock (page 20) and laparotomy
• seizures: diazepam (page 23) and fluid restriction
• moderate to severe haemolytic uraemic syndrome, may require transfusion and/or haemodialysis. Shigellosis in an epidemic context (Sd1)
– Antibiotic resistance develops rapidly (sometimes during the course of an epidemic).
After confirming the causal agent, antimicrobial susceptibility should be monitored monthly by culture and sensitivity tests.
– Patients presenting with signs of serious illness or with risk factors are hospitalised for the duration of treatment and are monitored daily (clinically and for compliance).
– Patients with neither signs of serious illness nor risk factors are treated as outpatients.
Organise home visits for daily monitoring (clinically and for compliance); hospitalise if the patient develops signs of serious illness.
– Hygiene measures: isolate patients as for cholera, individual and collective hygiene.
Shigellosis is an extremely contagious disease (the ingestion of 10 bacteria is infective). Note: over the past few years, Sd1 epidemics of smaller scale and with lower case fatality rates (less than 1%) have been observed.

87

3

Amoebiasis

Amoebiasis
Amoebiasis is a parasitic infection due to the intestinal protozoa Entamoeba histolytica.
Transmission is faecal-oral, by ingestion of amoebic cysts from food or water contaminated with faeces. Usually, ingested cysts release non-pathogenic amoebae and
90% of carriers are asymptomatic.
In 10% of infected patients, pathogenic amoebae penetrate the mucous of the colon: this is the intestinal amoebiasis (amoebic dysentery). The clinical picture is similar to that of shigellosis, which is the principal cause of dysentery.
Occasionally, the pathogenic amoebae migrate via the blood stream and form peripheral abscesses. Amoebic liver abscess is the most common form of extra-intestinal amoebiasis. Clinical features
– Amoebic dysentery
• diarrhoea containing red blood and mucus
• abdominal pain, tenesmus
• no fever or moderate fever
• possibly signs of dehydration
– Amoebic liver abscess
• painful hepatomegaly; mild jaundice may be present
• anorexia, weight loss, nausea, vomiting
• intermittent fever, sweating, chills; change in overall condition

Laboratory
– Amoebic dysentery: identification of mobile trophozoites (E. histolytica histolytica) in fresh stool samples
– Amoebic liver abscess: indirect haemoagglutination and ELISA

Treatment
– Amoebic dysentery
• The presence of cysts alone should not lead to the treatment of amoebiasis.
• Amoebiasis confirmed with a parasitological stool examination: tinidazole PO
Children: 50 mg/kg once daily for 3 days (without exceeding 2 g/day)
Adults: 2 g once daily for 3 days or metronidazole PO
Children: 45 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses for 5 days
Adults: 1.5 g/day in 3 divided doses for 5 days
• If there is no laboratory, first line treatment for dysentery is for shigellosis (see page 86). Treat for amoebiasis if correct treatment for shigellosis has been ineffective. • Oral rehydration salts (ORS) if there is risk of, or if there are signs of dehydration
(follow the WHO protocols, pages 306 to 311).
– Amoebic liver abscess tinidazole PO: same treatment as for amoebic dysentery for 5 days metronidazole PO: same treatment as for dysentery for 5 to 10 days
88

3. Gastrointestinal disorders

Disorders of the stomach and duodenum
Gastro-oesophageal reflux disease

3

Clinical features
Burning stomachache or heartburn, generally relieved by antacids; acid regurgitation
(often postural: while sitting forward or lying down). In the absence of dysphagia
(oesophageal stenosis), these signs are benign.

Treatment
– First instance, encourage the patient to avoid alcohol and tobacco use.
Give aluminium hydroxide PO1: 1.5 to 3 g/day in 3 divided doses one hour after meals or Instruct the patient to take 500 mg at the time of a painful attack.
– If antacids are insufficient: omeprazole PO: 20 mg once daily in the morning for 3 days or, if not available, cimetidine PO: 400 mg once daily at bedtime for 3 days
– In small children: no drug treatment, rest and sleep on an incline (30° to 45°).

Peptic ulcer diseases
Clinical features
Burning epigastric pain or epigastric cramps between meals, that wake the patient at night. They are most characteristic when they occur as episodes of a few days and when accompanied by nausea and even vomiting.
The most common complications are perforation and bleeding.

Treatment of non-complicated ulcers
– For an isolated episode:
• identify patients taking NSAID or acetylsalicylic acid; stop treatment
• encourage patients to avoid alcohol and tobacco use
• omeprazole PO: 20 mg once daily in the morning for 7 to 10 days or, if not available, cimetidine PO: 800 mg once daily at bedtime for 7 to 10 days
– If the patient has frequent recurrences, unrelated to NSAID use, that require repeated treatment with antiulcer drugs: see eradication of Helicobacter pylori, next page.
1 Aluminium hydroxide may decrease absorption of drugs taken at the same time, leave an interval of at least

2 hours between taking aluminium hydroxide and other drugs.

89

Disorders of the stomach and duodenum

Treatment of complicated ulcers
Perforation
Perforation should be considered in patients presenting with sudden onset intense epigastric pain, particularly if there is rigidity of the abdominal wall. The risk of peritonitis is increased if the perforation occurs on a full stomach.
– To start:
• place the patient on a strict fast (NPO); insert a nasogastric tube and aspirate if possible
• place an intravenous line and hydrate (alternate between 5% glucose and Ringer
Lactate)
• hyoscine butylbromide IV or IM: 10 to 20 mg, to be repeated every 8 hours if necessary
• omeprazole IV infusion: 40 mg/day over 20 to 30 minutes or, if not available, cimetidine continuous IV infusion: 1600 mg over 24 hours
– Refer to a surgeon if the patient has eaten during the 6 hours prior to the onset of pain or if there is no improvement within 12 hours despite medical treatment.
– Continue treatment for 3 days then restart oral feeding if the perforation occurred on an empty stomach and if the patient improved during the first 12 hours of treatment.
Then start PO treatment to eradicate Helicobacter pylori (see further).
Gastrointestinal bleeding
Passing of black stool (maelena) and/or vomiting blood (haematemesis). In 80% of cases the bleeding stops spontaneously.
– Insert a nasogastric tube for aspiration and insert an IV line (16G).
If the haemodynamic state is stable (pulse and blood pressure are normal)
– Hydrate (Ringer Lactate), monitor, keep NPO for 12 hours.
– If there is no active haemorrhage, restart oral feeding after 12 hours.
– Gastric lavage with cold water is not essential, but may help evaluate persistence of bleeding. If the haemorrhage continues (haematemesis) and/or if the haemodynamic state deteriorates (pulse increases, BP drops):
– Intensive care and transfusion according to the severity of the bleeding (see
Haemorrhagic shock, page 19).
– Emergency surgical intervention.
Most peptic ulcers are caused by Helicobacter pylori infection. If a diagnosis of ulcer is probable, and the patient has frequent attacks requiring repeated treatment with antiulcer drugs or, in cases of complicated ulcers (perforation or gastrointestinal bleeding) treatment to eradicate H. pylori should be considered to prevent relapses.
Once the acute phase has passed, prescribe one of the following treatments:
Treatment of choice (10 days)

metronidazole PO 2

1 g/day in 2 divided doses
+ amoxicillin PO
2 g/day in 2 divided doses
+ omeprazole PO
40 mg/day in 2 divided doses

metronidazole PO 2

1 g/day in 2 divided doses
+ amoxicillin PO
2 g/day in 2 divided doses
+ bismuth subcitrate PO
480 mg/day in 4 divided doses

Alternative (14 days)

metronidazole PO 2

1 g/day in 2 divided doses
+ amoxicillin PO
2 g/day in 2 divided doses
+ cimetidine PO
1600 mg/day in 2 divided doses 2 Metronidazole PO can be replaced with tinidazole PO: 1 g/day in 2 divided doses.

90

3. Gastrointestinal disorders

Notes:
– Acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin) and NSAID (indometacin, ibuprofen, diclofenac etc) are contra-indicated in patients suffering from or with a history of ulcers.
– Omeprazole is as effective PO as IV.

3

Dyspepsia
Clinical features
Epigastric pain or discomfort following meals, often accompanied by bloating, sensation of fullness and nausea. Dyspepsia is most commonly functional, linked with stress and not linked to the quantity of gastric acid (antiacids and antiulcer drugs are ineffective). Resolution is usually spontaneous.

Treatment
If the symptoms persist, short term symptomatic treatment may be considered: metoclopramide PO in 2 or 3 divided doses 1/2 hour before meals for 2 to 3 days may be helpful particularly in cases of nausea, vomiting, bloating etc.
Children over 20 kg: 0.4 mg/kg/day
Adults: 15 to 30 mg/day
In adults, hyoscine butylbromide PO: 30 mg/day in 3 divided doses, 1/2 hour before meals for 2 to 3 days may be helpful, particularly in cases of spasmodic pain.

Note: consider and treat possible intestinal parasites (taeniasis, ascariasis, ancylostomiasis, giardiasis, amoebiasis).

91

Stomatitis

Stomatitis
Stomatitis is an inflammation of the mucous membranes of the mouth caused by a fungal, viral or bacterial infection, a vitamin deficiency, an injury, etc.
Prolonged, painful stomatitis may contribute to malnutrition or dehydration in children: always treat carefully and show the mother how to treat.

Clinical signs and treatment
– Pain, difficulty eating, dysphagia, anorexia, sometimes nausea and vomiting. In a patient with these signs, examine the mucosa of the mouth, particularly in children.
– In all cases: maintain feeding and hydration (use a nasogastric tube for 3 days, only if pain is preventing the patient from eating) and keep the affected areas clean to prevent secondary infections or recurrence.

Infectious stomatitis
– Candidiasis (oral thrush)
Infection due to Candida albicans. It occurs frequently in infants, malnourished children and HIV infected patients.
White patches on the tongue may spread to cover the whole mouth.
• Clean the mouth with sodium bicarbonate 4 times/day (1/2 teaspoon in 250 ml of boiled and then cooled water).
• Apply nystatin to the affected area between meals: 4 lozenges of 100 000 IU/day in
4 divided doses for 7 days. Have the patient suck the tablets. For young children crush the tablets before applying to the affected area.
• If nystatin is not available, apply gentian violet 2 times/day for 7 days.
• Consider treating for intestinal candidiasis if oral thrush continues despite correct local treatment: nystatin PO
Children: 400 000 IU/day in 4 divided doses for 20 days
Adults: 2 000 000 IU/day in 4 divided doses for 20 days
• In patients with extensive forms or with frequent recurrences, consider HIV infection. Do a thorough clinical examination and for treatment, see HIV infection and AIDS, page 214.
– Herpes
Infection due to the herpes simplex virus, very common in children.
Primary infection: very painful lesions, in the form of vesicles, erosions or yellowish ulcerations on the lips and buccal mucosa with general malaise, peripheral lymph swelling and fever.
Recurrence: clusters of vesicles in the nasolabial area (see Herpes simplex, page 116).

92

3. Gastrointestinal disorders

Both forms of herpes are contagious. Recurrences may be provoked by an infectious disease such as malaria or pneumonia.
• Clean the affected area with a solution of sodium bicarbonate + polyvidone iodine
4 times/day (preparation: 1/2 teaspoon sodium bicarbonate + 1 teaspoon 10% polyvidone iodine in 250 ml of boiled and then cooled water).
• Treat pain with paracetamol PO.
• Spontaneous resolution usually occurs within 7 to 10 days. Secondary infections may develop.
• In patients with extensive forms or with frequent recurrences, consider HIV infection. Do a thorough clinical examination and for treatment, see HIV infection and AIDS, page 214.
– Other infectious causes
Tonsillitis (page 53), diphtheria (page 55), measles (page 189).
For scarlet fever (strawberry tongue associated with a skin rash):
PO for 10 days
Children under 1 year: 250 mg/day in 2 divided doses
Children from 1 to 5 years: 500 mg/day in 2 divided doses
Children from 6 to 12 years: 1 g/day in 2 divided doses
Adults: 2 g/day in 2 divided doses

phenoxymethylpenicillin (pencillin V)

Stomatitis from vitamin deficiencies
– Stomatitis from scurvy
Bleeding gums caused by vitamin C deficiency. In infants it is associated with lower limb pain caused by subperiosteal haemorrhage. It is common in contexts of poor food quality or in populations completely dependent on food aid (refugee camps).
• Clean the mouth and apply gentian violet as for candidiasis.
• ascorbic acid (vitamin C) PO
Children: 150 to 200 mg/day in 3 or 4 divided doses
Adults: 500 to 750 mg/day in 3 or 4 divided doses
The treatment is continued until symptoms improve (1 to 2 weeks), then a preventive treatment (children and adults: 25 to 50 mg/day) is given as long as the situation requires. – Other stomatitis
Other vitamin deficiencies may provoke mouth lesions: angular stomatitis of the lips and glossitis from vitamin B2 (riboflavin), niacin (see Pellagra, page 118) or vitamin B6
(pyridoxine) deficiencies.
Iron deficiency may also provoke angular stomatitis (see Anaemia, page 37).
Give the corresponding vitamins at curative doses. Multivitamins are insufficient to treat true vitamin deficiencies.

93

3

CHAPTER 4

4

Skin diseases
Dermatology

97

Scabies

98

Lice (pediculosis)

101

Superficial fungal infections

103

Bacterial skin infections

105

Cutaneous anthrax

109

Treponematoses

111

Leprosy

113

Herpes simplex and herpes zoster

116

Other skin disorders

117

4. Skin diseases

Dermatology
Skin diseases, particularly infectious skin diseases, are very common. They must be treated individually or collectively, but must also be considered as indicators of the sanitary condition of a population. A high prevalence of infectious skin diseases may reflect a problem of insufficient water quantity and lack of hygiene in a population.

Dermatological examination
– Observe the type of lesion:
• Macule: flat, non palpable lesion that is different in colour than the surrounding skin • Papule: small (< 1 cm) slightly elevated, circumscribed, solid lesion
• Vesicle (< 1 cm), bulla (> 1 cm): clear fluid-filled blisters
• Pustule: vesicle containing pus
• Nodule: firm, elevated palpable lesion (> 1 cm) that extend into the dermis or subcutaneous tissue.
• Erosion: loss of the epidermis that heals without leaving a scar
• Excoriation: erosion caused by scratching
• Ulcer: loss of the epidermis and at least part of the dermis that leaves a scar
• Scale: flake of epidermis that detaches from the skin surface
• Crust: dried serum, blood, or pus on the skin surface
• Atrophy: thinning of the skin
• Lichenification: thickening of the skin with accentuation of normal skin markings
– Look at the distribution of the lesions over the body; observe their arrangement: isolated, clustered, linear, annular (in a ring). Ask if the lesions are itchy.
– Look for a possible cause: insect bites; scabies, lice, other parasitic skin infections; contact with plants, animals, jewellery, detergents, etc.
– Ask about any ongoing treatment: topical, oral or parenteral.
– Look for local or regional signs (secondary infection, lymphangitis, adenopathy, erysipelas) and/or systemic signs (fever, septicaemia, distant infectious focus).
– Consider the sanitary condition of the family, particularly for contagious skin diseases (scabies, scalp ringworm, lice).
– Check tetanus vaccination status.
Patients with skin disease often present late. At this stage, primary lesions and specific signs may be masked by secondary infection. In these cases, it is necessary to reexamine the patient, after treating the secondary infection, in order to identify and treat the underlying skin disease.

97

4

Scabies

Scabies
Scabies is a cutaneous parasitosis due to the presence of the mite Sarcoptes scabiei hominis within the epidermis. It exists in two forms: ordinary scabies, relatively benign and moderately contagious; and crusted scabies, favoured by immune deficiency, extremely contagious and refractory to conventional treatment. Person to person transmission takes place chiefly through direct skin contact, and sometimes by indirect contact (sharing clothing, bedding). The challenge in management is that it must include simultaneous treatment of both the patient and close contacts, and at the same time, decontamination of clothing and bedding of all persons undergoing treatment, in order to break the transmission cycle.

Clinical features
Ordinary scabies
In older children and adults
– Itching, worse at night, very suggestive of scabies if close contacts have the same symptom and
– Typical skin lesions:
• Scabies burrows (common): fine wavy lines of 5 to 15 mm, corresponding to the tunnels made by the parasite within the skin. Burrows are most often seen in the interdigital spaces of the hand and flexor aspect of the wrist, but may be present on the areolae, buttocks, elbows, axillae. The back and the face are spared. Burrows may be associated with vesicles, corresponding to the entry point of the parasite in the skin.
• Scabies nodules (less common): reddish-brown nodules, measuring 2 to 20 mm, on the genitals in men, persisting after effective treatment (they are not necessarily indicative of active infection). and/or – Secondary skin lesions: resulting from scratching (excoriations, crusts) or superinfection (impetigo).
Typical lesions and secondary lesions may co-exist, or specific lesions may be entirely masked by secondary lesions.
In infants and young children
– Vesicular eruption; often involving palms and soles, back, face, and limbs. Secondary infection or eczematisation is frequent. Isolated scabies nodules in the axillae may be the only manifestation.
– Examination of the mother’s hands may support the diagnosis.

Crusted (Norwegian) scabies
Thick, scaly, erythematous plaques, generalised or localised, resembling psoriasis, with or without itching (50% of cases). Delay in diagnosis may lead to a scabies epidemic.

98

4. Skin diseases

Treatment
In all cases
– Close contacts of the patient are treated simultaneously, even in the absence of symptoms. – Clothing and bedding (including that of contacts) are changed after each treatment.
They are washed at ≥ 60°C then dried in the sun, or exposed to sunlight for 72 hours, or sealed in a plastic bag for 72 hours.

Ordinary scabies
Topical treatment
Topical scabicides are applied over the entire body (including the scalp, post-auricular areas, umbilicus, palms and soles), avoiding mucous membranes and face, and the breasts in breastfeeding women. Particular attention should be paid to common infestation sites. The recommended contact time should not be shortened or exceeded; the patient must not wash his hands while the product is in use (or the product should be reapplied if the hands are washed). In infants, the hands must be wrapped to prevent accidental ingestion of the product. Topical scabicides should not be applied to broken or inflamed skin. Treatment of secondary bacterial infection, if present, should be initiated 24 to 48 hours before use of topical scabicides (see Impetigo, page 105).

The preferred treatment is 5% permethrin (lotion or cream):
Child > 2 months and adult: one application, with a contact time of 8 hours, then rinse off. Permethrin is easier to use (no dilution required), and preferred over benzyl benzoate in children, and pregnant/lactating women. One application may be sufficient, but a second application 7 days later reduces the risk of treatment failure. or, if not available, benzyl benzoate 25% lotion:
Child < 2 years

Child 2-12 years

Child > 12 years and adult

Lotion must be diluted before use:
Dilution

1 part 25% lotion
+ 3 parts water

1 part 25% lotion
+ 1 part water

Use undiluted 25% lotion

Contact time 12 hours (6 hours for infants
< 6 months), then rinse off

24 hours, then rinse off

24 hours, then rinse off

A second application of benzyl benzoate (e.g. after 24 hours, with a rinse between the
2 applications; or two successive applications, 10 minutes apart, when the first application has dried, with a rinse after 24 hours) reduces the risk of treatment failure. Second applications are not recommended in pregnant women and children < 2 years.
Oral treatment

Treatment with ivermectin PO (200 micrograms as a single dose) is an alternative: it is more practical than topical treatment (e.g. in the case of an epidemic or for treating contacts) and can be started right away in the case of secondary infection. A single dose may be sufficient; a second dose 7 days later reduces the risk of treatment failure. 99

4

Scabies

Ivermectin is not recommended for children < 15 kg or pregnant women (safety not established)1. Administration of ivermectin to patients with loiasis carries a risk of severe neurological complications when significant Loa loa microfilaraemia is present (see Filariasis, page 157)2.
Weight
Ivermectin 3 mg tab
Ivermectin 6 mg tab

15 to 24 kg

25 to 35 kg

36 to 50 kg

51 to 65 kg

1 tab

2 tab

3 tab

4 tab

1 tab

11/2 tab

2 tab

1/2

tab

Treatment effectiveness is judged on clinical grounds. Itching may persist for 1 to
3 weeks after elimination of the parasite.
Persistence of typical burrows beyond 3 weeks should lead to suspicion of treatment failure (insufficient treatment, e.g. the scalp was not included in topical treatment or the patient washed his hands during the treatment period), or early re-infestation
(contacts and environment not treated). In these cases, patient and contacts should be retreated. Persistent itching may be due to another condition, initially masked by scabies.

Crusted scabies
Treatment combines simultaneous administration of oral ivermectin and topical scabicide at regular intervals, e.g. every week for 2 to 3 weeks or more, according to severity and clinical response.
Crusts should be softened (salicylic acid ointment) and removed before applying local treatment (otherwise, local treatment is ineffective).
As exfoliated skin scales may spread the parasite, the patient should be isolated during the treatment, staff should use protection (gloves, gowns and hand washing after contact), and environment (bedding, floors and surfaces) should be decontaminated.

1 Treatment with ivermectin in these patients is reserved for severe cases for which no alternative exists (see

crusted scabies).

2 In areas where loiasis is endemic, certain precautions are recommended before administering ivermectin: e.g.

measure the Loa loa microfilaraemia, if possible, or ensure that the patient has no history of loiasis (migration of an adult worm under the conjunctiva or transient « Calabar » swellings), nor history of severe adverse reactions following a previous treatment with ivermectin, or if in doubt, use topical treatment in preference to oral.

100

4. Skin diseases

Lice (pediculosis)
Pediculosis is a benign contagious parasitic infection due to 3 species of lice specific to humans: head lice, body lice and pubic lice. Transmission from person to person occurs through direct or indirect contact.
Body lice are potential vectors of relapsing fever (page 182), typhus (page 185) and trench fever.

Clinical features
– Head lice mainly affect children: itching and scratch marks (nape of neck and around the ears), which may become secondarily infected (impetigo) in prolonged infestation; presence of live lice and/or live (shiny, grey) nits attached to the hair shaft within 5 mm of the scalp.
– Body lice mainly affect populations living under poor conditions (refugees, prisoners, the homeless): itching and scratch marks (back, belt line and armpits), often inflamed and infected; presence of lice and nits in the clothing (parasites are not found on the body). – Pubic lice are considered to be a sexually transmitted infection (STI): itching and scratch marks (pubic and perianal area), but other hairy areas may also be affected
(armpits, thighs, eyelashes); lice and nits at the base of the hair shaft, rarely visible.
– Examine contacts; check for associated systemic infection (body lice) or STI (pubic lice). Treatment
Head lice

Apply to dry hair 1% permethrin lotion (leave on for 10 min) or 0.5% malathion lotion
(leave on for 12 hours; 8 hours in children 6 months-2 years). Do not reduce or exceed the recommended duration of treatment. Rinse thoroughly. Decontaminate combs, headwear and bedding (wash ≥ 60°C/30 min, iron or dry in the sun or, if not feasible, seal in a plastic bag for 2 weeks). Treat those contacts with lice and/or live nits, not those with dead nits alone (dull, white, > 1 cm from scalp) as above. It is recommended to repeat the application after 10 days.
Body lice
For mass treatment (outbreak): apply 30 to 60 g (2 to 4 heaped soup spoons) of
0.5% permethrin powder to the inside of the clothes and underclothes in contact with the skin (front and back, neck and waistline, sleeves and socks) in a fully clothed patient, then rub in the powder by hand. Leave for 12 to 24 hours. Treat other clothing
(including headwear) and bedding in a plastic bag with 0.5% permethrin powder. Repeat in 8 to 10 days if the infestation persists.

101

4

Lice (pediculosis)

For individual treatment: disinfection of clothing and bedding as above or as for head lice. Pubic lice

Shave and/or apply 1% permethrin lotion to hairy areas (as for head lice). Treat the partner at the same time. Decontaminate clothing and bedding (as for head lice). Repeat the application after 7 days.
Treatment of secondary bacterial infection, if present, should begin 24 to 48 hours before local antiparasitic treatment (see Impetigo, page 105) ; local treatment is applied later when tolerated.

102

4. Skin diseases

Superficial fungal infections

Benign fungal infections of the skin, scalp and nails caused by Candida albicans and dermatophytes (tinea).

4

Clinical features and treatment
Candidiasis
– Diaper dermatitis: erythema of the perineum with peripheral desquamation and sometimes pustules. Secondary infection may develop.

• Clean the skin with ordinary soap and water, dry well and apply gentian violet
2 times/day for 2 to 3 weeks according to the clinical evolution. Do not use
Whitfield’s ointment.

• Avoid humidity: remove plastic pants and diapers, expose the buttocks to air.
• If diaper dermatitis is severe and persistent despite correct local treatment, treat as an intestinal infection (nystatin PO: 400 000 IU/day in 4 divided doses for 20 days).
– Other candidiases: of the dermal folds (treat as above), of the mouth (see Stomatitis, page 92), of the vagina (see Abnormal vaginal discharge, page 233).

Dermatophytoses (ringworm)
– Scalp ringworm: mainly in children.
Depending on the species:
– one or more round, scaly, erythematous plaques with the ends of broken hairs
– inflammation, suppuration, crusting and peripheral lymphadenopathy (kerion);
– permanent hair loss (favus).

• Shave the hair, clean with soap et water 2 times/day and apply Whitfield’s ointment
2 times/day for at least 2 weeks and if necessary for the entire duration of treatment with griseofulvin.

• griseofulvin PO
Children: 10 to 20 mg/kg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses for 6 weeks
Adults: 500 mg to 1 g maximum/day in 1 or 2 divided doses for 6 weeks
Treatment may last up to 12 weeks in severe infections.
• For painful kerion: paracetamol PO.

• For infected scalp ringworm: treat the secondary infection before applying
Whitfield’s ointment (see Impetigo, page 105).
• Some scalp ringworms are contagious: simultaneously examine and treat symptomatic contacts.

103

Superficial fungal infections

– Ringworm of the body (of glabrous skin): erythematous, scaly, pruritic macule with a well-demarcated, raised, vesicular border and central healing.
• Clean with soap et water 2 times/day, dry well and apply Whitfield’s ointment
2 times/day for 3 weeks if the lesions are not very extensive .

• Keep griseofulvin PO for extensive lesions (at least 4 weeks of treatment).
– Other dermatophytoses
– Ringworm of the foot (athlete’s foot): pruritus, fissures and whitish scales in the
3rd and/or 4th interdigital spaces (these differ from Candida albicans lesions which are usually in the 1st and 2nd interdigital spaces).
– Ringworm of the groin: circumscribed, pruritic, erythematous plaque, with a pale centre surrounded by vesiculo-pustules, extending outward from the groin.
• Clean with soap et water 2 times/day, dry well and apply Whitfield’s ointment
2 times/day for 3 weeks.

• If the lesions ooze, apply gentian violet 2 times/day before starting treatment with
Whitfield’s ointment.
Note: fungal infections of the fingernails and toenails due to Candida albicans and dermatophytes require 12 to 18 months of oral treatment which, in practice, is difficult.

104

4. Skin diseases

Bacterial skin infections
Impetigo
– Impetigo is a benign, contagious infection of the epidermis due to group A ß-haemolytic streptococcus and Staphylococcus aureus. Co-infection is common. Transmission is by direct contact. Lack of water and poor hygiene increase spread.
– Primary infections are most common in children. Secondary infections complicating pre-existing pruritic dermatoses (lice, scabies, eczema, herpes, chickenpox etc.) are more common in adults.

Clinical features
– Classic form: flaccid vesicule on erythematous skin which becomes pustular and forms a yellowish crust. Different stages of the infection may be present simultaneously. The lesion does not leave a scar. The most common sites of infection are around the nose and mouth, on the limbs or on the scalp. There is no fever.
– Bullous impetigo: large flaccid bullae and erosions of the skin in the ano-genital region in newborns and infants.
– Ecthyma: an ulcerative form of impetigo that leaves scars. Lesions usually occur on the lower limbs. This form is most common in the immunocompromised, diabetics and alcoholics.
– Rare complications:
• abscess, pyodermitis, lymphangitis, osteomyelitis, septicaemia;
• systematically look for signs of acute glomerulonephritis.

Treatment
– Localised impetigo (less than 3 lesions on the same region of the body):
• Clean with soap and water 2 times/day and dry then, apply 0.5% gentian violet.
• Soften crusts if present by applying vaseline and gently remove them.
• Keep dry (do not cover with an occlusive dressing; if on the buttocks of children, leave uncovered, etc.).
• Keep fingernails short.
– Extensive impetigo (more than 3 lesions or impetigo on more than one region of the body), bullous impetigo, ecthyma, abscess; immunocompromised patient:
• Treat locally as above.
• Incise abscesses.
• Treat systematically with antibiotics: cloxacillin PO
Children: 50 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses for 10 days
Adults: 2 g/day in 2 divided doses for 10 days
For patients allergic to penicillin: erythromycin PO
Children: 30 to 50 mg/kg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 10 days
Adults: 2 to 3 g/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 10 days

105

4

Bacterial skin infections

– For all patients:
• Quarantine from school.
• Treat any pre-existing skin disease: lice (see page 101), scabies (see page 98), eczema (see page 117), herpes (see page 116), scalp ringworm (see page 103), or an
ENT infection (see Chapter 2).
• Trace and treat contacts.
• Systematically check for proteinuria (use a reagent strip) 3 weeks after the infection. Furuncles (boils) and carbuncle
A necrotising perifollicular infection, usually due to Staphylococcus aureus. Development is favoured by humidity, breaks in the skin, lack of hygiene, diabetes mellitus, malnutrition, iron deficiency or compromised immunity.

Clinical features
– Furuncle: red, warm, painful nodule with a central pustule, usually around a hair follicle. It becomes fluctuant, discharges a core of purulent exudate, and leaves a depressed scar. It occurs most frequently on the thighs, groin, buttocks, armpits, neck and back. There is no fever.
– Carbuncle: a cluster of interconnected furuncles, sometimes with fever and peripheral adenopathies. It leaves a depressed scar.

Treatment
– For a single furuncle:
Clean with soap and water 2 times/dayand cover with a dry dressing.
Warm moist compresses encourage furuncle to drain.
After drainage, clean and apply an antiseptic until the lesion has completely healed.
– For furuncles on the face, carbuncles, multiple furuncles (furunculosis) or in immunocompromised patients, treat systematically with antibiotics: cloxacillin PO
Children: 50 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses for 8 days
Adults: 2 g/day in 2 divided doses for 8 days
For patients allergic to penicillin: erythromycin PO
Children: 30 to 50 mg/kg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 8 days
Adults: 2 to 3 g/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 8 days
– Excise the furuncle only when it becomes fluctuant.
– For all cases:
• Daily cleaning, frequent hand washing, wash bedding;
• Never manipulate a furuncle on the face as there is a risk of serious complication: unilateral facial inflammation with high fever and risk of cavernous sinus thrombosis. In this case treat with: cloxacillin slow IV
Children: 75 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
Adults: 3 g/day in 3 injections
Change to oral treatment as soon as possible, at the same doses, to complete
10 days of treatment.
106

4. Skin diseases

Or, for patients allergic to penicillin: chloramphenicol IM
Children over 2 months: 100 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
Adults: 3 g/day in 3 injections
Change to oral treatment as soon as possible, at the same doses, to complete
10 days of treatment.

Erysipela
Erysipela is an acute non-necrotising hypodermal infection, due to group A streptococcus. Common in adults, rare in children.

Clinical features
– Painful, inflammatory, oedematous plaque on a lower limb, high fever, peripheral adenopathies and lymphangitis).
– May occur on the face: bilateral, oedematous plaques, with peripheral swelling.
– Look for a cutaneous portal of entry: ulcer, wound, intertrigo.
– Local complications: most commonly superficial abscess, sometimes deep abscess
(secondary staphylococcal infection), rarely develops into necrotising faciitis.
– Rare generalised complications: septicaemia, acute glomerulonephritis, erythema nodosum. Treatment

– benzylpenicillin procaine IM
Children: 50 000 IU/kg once daily
Adults: 1.5 MIU once daily until the fever disappears and there is clinical improvement, then change to oral treatment to complete 7 to 10 days of treatment with: phenoxymethylpenicillin (penicillin V) PO
Children under 1 year: 250 mg/day in 4 divided doses
Children from 1 to 5 years: 500 mg/day in 4 divided doses
Children from 6 to 12 years: 1 g/day in 4 divided doses
Adults: 2 g/day in 4 divided doses or amoxicillin PO: 50 mg/kg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses
For patients allergic to penicillin: erythromycin PO
Children: 50 mg/kg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 7 to 10 days
Adults: 3 g/day in 3 divided doses for 7 to 10 days
– Hospitalise patients who show marked generalised signs, signs of local complications, patients in poor general condition (chronic disease, the elderly) or if there is a risk of non-compliance during outpatient treatment.
– Note: other bacteria (Staphylococcus aureus, Gram negative bacteria) may cause acute cellulitis resembling erysipela. In the event of treatment failure with penicillin, consider these infections and change to amoxicillin + clavulanic acid (co-amoxiclav).
107

4

Bacterial skin infections

– For all patients:
• Bed rest with the affected leg elevated.
• Non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAID) are contra-indicated (risk of necrotising fasciitis).
• Treat the portal of entry (ulcer, wound, intertrigo).
• Systematically check for proteinuria, on reagent strip, 3 weeks after the infection.

Necrotising infections of the skin and soft tissue
Necrosis of the hypodermis, with a vascular thrombosis, and sometimes a necrosis of the underlying superficial aponeurosis (fasciitis) and secondarily necrosis of the dermis. The clinical picture varies depending on the causal bacteria, most often Group
A streptococcus, commonly associated with other bacteria (Staphylococcus aureus, anaerobic, enterobacteria, enterococcus).

Clinical features
Intensely painful, poorly demarcated, erythematous plaque with oedema and severe septic syndrome. Some patients then develop hemorrhagic blisters and bluish or blackish, cold, hypoaesthetic spots. The presence of gas or crepitation on palpation is linked to certain bacteria (Clostridium perfringens, enterobacteria).

Treatment
In case of necrotising fasciitis or gas gangrene: refer.
– Urgent surgical drainage of the wound and excision of the necrotic tissue.
– Antibiotic treatment (the length of treatment varies according to the clinical evolution): • Necrotising fasciitis: benzylpenicillin IV
Children: 600 000 IU (360 mg)/kg/day in 6 injections or infusions given every
4 hours
Adults: 24 MIU (14.4 g)/day in 6 injections or infusions given every 4 hours
+
clindamycin IV
Children: 40 mg/kg/day in 3 infusions given every 8 hours (maximum 1.3 g/day)
Adults: 1.8 g/day in 3 infusions given every 8 hours
• Gas gangrene: benzylpenicillin IV: as above
+
metronidazole IV
Children: 30 mg/kg/day in 3 infusions given every 8 hours (maximum 1.5 g/day)
Adults: 1.5 g/day in 3 infusions given every 8 hours
+
gentamicin IM
Children and adults: 3 to 6 mg/kg/day in 2 injections

108

4. Skin diseases

Cutaneous anthrax
– A toxic infection of herbivores due to Bacillus anthracis that is transmitted to humans by inoculation through the skin (contact with infected dead animals, flies). Cutaneous anthrax is common in the tropics.
– Pulmonary (transmitted by inhalation) and intestinal (transmitted by eating infected meat) forms also exist.

Clinical features
– Papule, then pruritic vesicle that ulcerates and becomes a black eschar surrounded by significant oedema with lymphangitis, regional adenopathy and/or generalised signs. Cutaneous anthrax usually occurs on uncovered areas of the body (head, neck, limbs) and is painless.
– If not treated promptly, there is a risk of extensive, malignant oedema and septicaemia. Treatment
– Simple cutaneous anthrax (at dispensary level):
• Antibiotic treatment:

phenoxymethylpenicillin (penicillin V) PO
Children under 1 year: 250 mg/day in 4 divided doses for 7 to 10 days
Children from 1 to 5 years: 500 mg/day in 4 divided doses for 7 to 10 days
Children from 6 to 12 years: 1 g/day in 4 divided doses for 7 to 10 days
Adults: 2 g/day in 4 divided doses for 7 to 10 days

For patients allergic to penicillin: doxycycline PO (except for children under 8 years and pregnant or lactating women)
Children over 8 years and adults: 200 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 7 to 10 days or erythromycin PO
Children: 30 to 50 mg/kg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 7 to 10 days
Adults: 2 to 3 g/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 7 to 10 days
• Do not excise the eschar. Daily dry dressings.
– Cutaneous anthrax with extensive oedema or generalised signs or cutaneous anthrax localised on the head or neck (at hospital level): benzylpenicillin procaine + benzylpenicillin or benzylpenicillin procaine IM

Children: 100 000 IU/kg/day in 1 or 2 injections
Adults: 4 MIU/day in 1 or 2 injections

109

4

Cutaneous anthrax

Change to oral treatment as soon as possible with phenoxymethylpenicillin (penicillin V)
PO to complete 10 days of treatment:
Children under 1 year: 250 mg/day in 4 divided doses
Children from 1 to 5 years: 500 mg/day in 4 divided doses
Children from 6 to 12 years: 1 g/day in 4 divided doses
Adults: 2 g/day in 4 divided doses
For patients allergic to penicillin: chloramphenicol IV
Children: 100 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
Adults: 3 g/day in 3 injections
Change to oral treatment as soon as possible with chloramphenicol PO at the same doses to complete 10 days of treatment.

Prevention
– Antibiotic prophylaxis for adult contacts: doxycycline PO (except for pregnant and lactating women): 200 mg/day for 6 weeks
– Bury or burn the carcasses of animals that die of anthrax.

110

4. Skin diseases

Treponematoses
– Bacterial infections caused by 3 different types of treponema (other than Treponema pallidum). – Human-to-human transmission may be direct or indirect.
– The 3 non-venereal treponematoses result in positive syphilis serology (TPHAVDRL), but this test is not necessary as diagnosis is clinical.
– For treatment of syphilis see Genital infections, page 229.

Clinical features
See table following page.

Treatment
– For the 3 treponematoses

benzathine benzylpenicillin IM

Children under 6 years: 600 000 IU as a single injection
Children over 6 years and adults: 1.2 MIU as a single injection
For patients allergic to penicillin: erythromycin PO
Children: 50 mg/kg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 14 days
Adults: 2 to 3 g/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 14 days or doxycycline PO (except for children under 8 years and pregnant and lactating women)
Children over 8 years: 100 to 200 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses for 14 days
Adults: 200 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses for 14 days
Notes:
• Antibiotic treatment will cure early stage cases and may relieve the pain of osteitis.
It may be ineffective for late stage infections.
• Syphilis serology will remain positive despite clinical cure.
– Prophylactic treatment of contacts

Examine contacts and treat with benzathine benzylpenicillin IM as a single dose as above (also treat patients in the latent stage with positive serology in endemic zones).

111

4

112
Children and adults
Annular, erythematous, scaly plaques, usually on uncovered body parts (face, extremities), resemble dermatophytes.
Lesions heal spontaneously leaving scars.

Pintids: plaques of various colours (bluish,
– mucous patches of the mouth common: reddish, whitish). May occur anywhere on the very contagious ulcerated, round in body. form, indurated, with white coating, bleed easily, usually occur on the inside of the lips, cheek and tongue or labial folds – condyloma in the anogenital region (rare)
– cutaneous lesions are rare: vegetal aspect, in dermal folds
– bone destruction identical to that of yaws, in the legs and forearms
Symmetrical white patches on the limbs. The depigmentation is permanent, remaining after treatment.

Children between 4 and 14 years

Yaws chancre: skin coloured lesion, non-indurated, itchy, on the lower limbs in
95% of cases, with peripheral adenopathy.
Spontaneous healing or development of a large yaw surrounded by smaller yaws.

Lesions appear 3 weeks after the initial chancre, occur in crops and heal spontaneously: – frambesioma (papillomatous lesion, vegetal, very contagious)
– isolated or associated with yaws (round, squamous papules, not very contagious)
– osteoperiostitis of the long bones
(phalanges, nasal process of the maxilla, tibia) After some years of latency: periostitis; painful, debilitating osteitis; ulcerating and disfiguring rhinopharyngitis; juxta-articular nodules

Population

First stage

Second stage

Late stage

After several years of latency:
– gummatous lesions of skin and long bones
– plantar and palmar keratosis
– juxta-articular nodules
– hyper- and hypo-pigmented patches
(as in pinta)

Discrete chancre: moist papule, most commonly on the mucous membranes or in dermal folds, with peripheral adenopathy.

Nomadic populations, particularly children

Tropical zones of Latin America

Arid areas, semi-desert of the Middle East and Africa

Treponema pallidum type M

Tropical and humid forests

Treponema carateum

Treponema pertenue

BEJEL (endemic syphilis)

Geographic distribution Pathogen

PINTA

YAWS

Clinical signs of treponematoses

Treponematoses

4. Skin diseases

Leprosy (Hansen’s disease)
An endemic, chronic bacterial infection due to Mycobacterium leprae. Humans are the only reservoir of proven significance. Leprosy is not very contagious with transmission through prolonged, close, direct contact, particularly between household members.
Children are most at risk of contracting the disease.

Clinical features
Leprosy should be considered in any patient presenting with hypopigmented skin lesions or peripheral neuropathy. In suspect cases, conduct a thorough clinical examination:
– skin and mucous membranes (patient must be undressed)
– neurological examination: sensitivity to light touch, pinprick and temperature (hotcold test)
– palpation of the peripheral nerves
Different clinical forms and classification of leprosy exist.
The Ridley-Jopling classification differentiates 5 forms based on several factors, including the bacteriological index.
The WHO clinical classification is simplified to include only 3 forms (see next page)
The Ridley-Jopling classification of leprosy
Paucibacillary forms
(least contagious forms)

Multibacillary forms
(most contagious forms)

Tuberculoid

Borderline
Tuberculoid

Borderline

Borderline
Lepromatous

Lepromatous

T.T.

B.T.

B.B.

B.L.

L.L.

Tuberculoid leprosy
– The primary characteristic is peripheral nerve involvement: tender, infiltrated and thickened nerves; loss of thermal, then tactile and pain sensation. This may lead to trophic ulcers and mutilations of the extremities.
– Lesions are single or few in number:
• plaque with a well-demarcated raised border and an atrophic, clear centre or • erythematous macule on pale skin, hypopigmented macule on dark skin
– Nerve involvement develops late in the disease.
Lepromatous leprosy
– The primary characteristic is multiple muco-cutaneous lesions:
• macules, papules or infiltrated nodules on the face, ear lobes and the upper and lower limbs. Lesions are bilateral, symmetrical, pigmented. Initially, there is no sensory loss.
• involvement of the nasal mucosa with crusting and nose bleeds
• oedema of the lower limbs
– Nerve involvement develops late in the disease.

113

4

Leprosy

Borderline leprosy
Forms between tuberculoid and lepromatous.
Indeterminate leprosy (I)
Form that does not fall in the Ridley-Jopling classification, frequent in children: a single well-demarcated macule, hypopigmented on dark skin, slightly erythematous on pale skin. Absence of sweat and hair, and loss of sensation are inconstant.
Lesion heals spontaneously or the disease evolves towards tuberculoid or lepromatous leprosy. Lepra reactions
– Reversal reactions: occur in patients with borderline leprosy, during treatment, when evolving towards tuberculoid leprosy. Skin lesions become swollen and painful with a risk of necrosis and ulceration. Acute painful neuritis (ulnar nerve) requires urgent treatment (see page 115) as there is a risk of permanent sequelae.
– Downgrading reactions: occur in untreated patients with borderline leprosy, when the disease evolves towards lepromatous leprosy. These reactions are difficult to distinguish from reversal reactions.
– Erythema nodosum leprosum: crops of tender subcutaneous nodules, purplish-red, then yellowish in colour. This reaction is seen exclusively in patients with lepromatous leprosy during the first year of treatment.
In order to simplify diagnosis and to promote rapid implementation of treatment, the
WHO simplified clinical classification of leprosy and differentiates only 3 forms:
– Multibacillary leprosy: more than 5 skin lesions
– Paucibacillary leprosy: 2 to 5 skin lesions
– Single skin lesion paucibacillary leprosy

Laboratory
Demonstration of acid-fast bacilli in a Ziehl-Neelsen stained smear:
– nasal smear
– skin-split smear taken from the ear lobe or from a skin lesion
In tuberculoid leprosy, bacilli are usually not found.

Treatment
Treatment of leprosy
– Leprosy is a curable disease. Early antibiotic treatment prevents functional sequelae and transmission of the disease.
– In countries where leprosy is endemic, it is important to be informed about national control programmes.
– The high rates of resistance and of recurrences after single drug therapy have led to the use of effective multi-drug therapy regimens which are easy to administer in the field and for which no resistance has been reported.
– Teach the patient to recognise and quickly report a lepra reaction or relapse in order to modify or restart treatment.

114

4. Skin diseases

Treatment recommended by the WHO, based on the simplified clinical classification of leprosy
Multibacillary leprosy
(more than 5 skin lesions)

Paucibacillary leprosy
(2 to 5 skin lesions)

dapsone PO: 25 mg once

dapsone PO: 25 mg once

Children between dapsone PO: 50 mg once
10 and 14 years daily, self-administered
+ rifampicin PO: 450 mg once monthly, under supervision + clofazimine PO: 150 mg once monthly, under supervision and 50 mg on alternate days, self-administered

Paucibacillary leprosy
(single skin lesion)

dapsone PO: 50 mg once

Children under
10 years

Adults

Duration

daily, self-administered
+ rifampicin PO: 300 mg once monthly, under supervision + clofazimine PO: 100 mg once monthly, under supervision and 50 mg 2 times weekly, self-administered daily, self-administered
+ rifampicin PO: 300 mg once monthly, under supervision 4

daily, self-administered
+ rifampicin PO: 450 mg once monthly, under supervision dapsone PO: 100 mg once daily, self-administered
+ rifampicine PO: 600 mg once monthly, under supervision + clofazimine PO: 300 mg once monthly, under supervision and 50 mg once daily, self-administered dapsone PO: 100 mg once daily, self-administered
+ rifampicine PO: 600 mg once monthly, under supervision rifampicin PO: 600 mg
+ ofloxacin PO: 400 mg
+ minocycline PO: 100 mg

12 months

6 months

single dose

Treatment of leprosy reactions

– Reversal or downgrading reactions: prednisolone (or prednisone) PO: 1 mg/kg/day for
3 to 5 days then progressively decrease the dosage (reduce the dosage by 10% each week). – Erythema nodosum leprosum: clofazimine PO, 100 to 300 mg/day associated with an
NSAID (do not administer dosages equal to or greater than 300 mg/day for more than 3 months).

115

Herpes simplex and herpes zoster

Herpes simplex and herpes zoster
Herpes simplex
Recurrent viral infection of the skin and mucous membranes due to the herpes simplex virus. Recurrent lesions have a different presentation than primary infection.

Clinical features
– Recurrent herpes labialis: tingling feeling followed by an eruption of vesicles on an erythematous base, located on the lips (‘fever blisters’) and around the mouth, they may extend onto the face. Recurrence corresponds to a reactivation of the latent virus after a primary infection. No associated malaise, adenopathy or fever.
– Carefully consider other sites: buccal (page 92), genital (page 236), ophthalmic, and secondary bacterial infections.

Treatment
– Clean with soap and water 2 times/day until the lesions have healed.
– For patients with secondary bacterial infections: antibiotic treatment as for impetigo
(see page 105).

Herpes zoster (shingles)
Acute viral infection due to the varicella-zoster virus. Chickenpox is the primary infection and herpes zoster the reactivation of the latent virus.

Clinical features
– Unilateral neuralgic pain followed by an eruption of vesicles on a erythematous base, that follow the distribution of a nerve pathway.
– Lesions most commonly occur on the thorax, but herpes zoster may also develop on the face with a risk of ophthalmic complications.
– Herpes zoster is more common in adults than in children.

Treatment
– Similar to that of herpes simplex, with the addition of systematic analgesics: paracetamol PO (see Pain, page 29).
– aciclovir PO given within the first 48 hours after the eruption of lesions is only indicated for severe forms: necrotic or extensive lesions or lesion on the face which may spread to the eyes (see HIV infection and AIDS, page 219).

116

4. Skin diseases

Other skin disorders
Eczema (dermatitis)
– Acute eczema: erythematous plaque, pruritic, vesicular, oozing, with poorly demarcated and crumbly borders.
– Chronic eczema: erythematous plaque, scaly, dry, poorly demarcated and pruritic.
– Look for a cause (contact allergic dermatitis, fungal or bacterial infection with a distant focus, malnutrition) and ask about family history.

Treatment
– Clean with soap and water 2 times/day.
– Then apply:
• for acute eczema: calamine lotion 2 times/day
• for chronic eczema: zinc oxide ointment 2 times/day
– Look for and treat any pre-existing skin disease (scabies, lice etc.).
– For patients with secondary infections: treat as impetigo (see page 105).
– For patients with intense pruritus: promethazine PO
Children from 2 to 5 years: 5 to 15 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses
Children from 5 to 10 years: 10 to 25 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses
Children over 10 years and adults: 25 to 50 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses or chlorphenamine PO
Children from 1 to 2 years: 1 mg 2 times daily
Children from 2 to 6 years: 1 mg 4 to 6 times daily
Children from 6 to 12 years: 2 mg 4 to 6 times daily
Adults: 4 mg 4 to 6 times daily

Urticaria
– Papules: transient, erythematous, oedematous, pruritic, resembling nettle stings.
– Look for a cause: food or drug (particularly antibiotic) allergy, insect bites; the invasive stage of a bacterial or parasitic infection (ascariasis, strongylodiasis, ancylostomiasis, schistosomiasis, loiasis), viral infection (hepatitis B or C); generalised disease (cancer, lupus, dysthyroidism, vasculitis).

117

4

Other skin disorders

Treatment

– If the pruritus is intense, antihistamines (promethazine PO or chlorphenamine PO at the dosages indicated above) for a minimum of 7 days.
– For patients with Quincke’s oedema: epinephrine (adrenaline) IM
Infants and children: 0.01 mg/kg/injection
Adults: 0.25 to 0.75 mg/injection to be repeated every 5 minutes if necessary according to the clinical evolution give with hydrocortisone IM
Children: 2 to 4 mg/kg/injection
Adults: 100 to 500 mg/injection
– In the event of anaphylactic shock, see Shock, page 19.

Pellagra
Pellagra is a dermatitis resulting from niacin and/or tryptophane deficiency (in persons whose staple food is sorghum, maize not treated with lime; patients with malabsorption, or during famine).

Clinical features
Classically, disease of the ‘three Ds’: dermatitis, diarrhoea and dementia.
– Dark red plaques, well demarcated, symmetric, located on exposed areas of the body
(forehead, neck, forearms, legs). The skin becomes very scaly, pigmented, sometimes with haemorrhagic bullae.
– Gastrointestinal (glossitis, stomatitis and diarrhoea) and neuropsychiatric symptoms are seen in more serious forms.

Traitement

– nicotinamide PO
Children and adults: 300 to 500 mg/day in 2 divided doses, give with a diet rich in protein until the patient is fully cured.
– In the event of an epidemic of pellagra, for example in a refugee camp, it is vital that the food ration be modified (add groundnuts or dry vegetables) in order to meet the daily requirements (approximately 15 mg/day for adults).

118

CHAPTER 5

Eye diseases

5

Xerophthalmia (vitamin A deficiency)

121

Conjunctivitis

123

Trachoma

126

Other pathologies

128

Onchocerciasis
Loiasis
Pterygium
Cataract

5. Eye diseases

Xerophthalmia (vitamin A deficiency)
The term xerophthalmia covers all the ocular manifestations of vitamin A deficiency.
Xerophthalmia can progress to irreversible blindness if left untreated.
In endemic areas, vitamin A deficiency and xerophthalmia affect mainly children
(particularly those suffering from malnutrition or measles) and pregnant women.
Disorders due to vitamin A deficiency can be prevented by the routine administration of retinol.

Clinical features
– The first sign is hemeralopia (crepuscular blindness): the child cannot see in dim light, may bump into objects and/or show decreased mobility.
– Then, other signs appear gradually:
• Conjunctival xerosis: bulbar conjunctiva appears dry, dull, thick, wrinkled and insensitive • Bitot’s spots: greyish foamy patches on the bulbar conjunctiva, usually in both eyes
(specific sign, however not always present).
• Corneal xerosis: cornea appears dry and dull
• Corneal ulcerations
• Keratomalacia (the last and most severe sign of xerophthalmia): softening of the cornea, followed by perforation of the eyeball and blindness (extreme care must be taken during ophthalmic examination due to risk of rupturing cornea).

Treatment
It is essential to recognise and treat early symptoms to avoid the development of severe complications. Vision can be saved provided that ulcerations affect less than a third of the cornea and the pupil is spared. Even if deficiency has already led to keratomalacia and irreversible loss of sight, it is imperative to administer treatment, in order to save the other eye and the life of the patient.

– Retinol (vitamin A) PO
Regardless of the clinical stage:
Children from 6 to 12 months (or under 8 kg): 100 000 IU once daily on D1, D2 and D8
Children over 1 year (or over 8 kg):
200 000 IU once daily on D1, D2 and D8
Adults (except pregnant women):
200 000 IU once daily on D1, D2 and D8
Vitamin A deficiency is rare in breast fed infants under 6 months, if needed: 50 000 IU once daily on D1, D2 and D8.
In pregnant women, treatment varies according to the stage of illness:
• Hemeralopia or Bitot's spots: 10 000 IU once daily or 25 000 IU once weekly for at least 4 weeks. Do not exceed indicated doses (risk of foetal malformations).
• If the cornea is affected, risk of blindness outweighs teratogenic risk. Administer
200 000 IU once daily on D1, D2 and D8.

121

5

Xerophthalmia

– Corneal lesions are a medical emergency. In addition to the immediate administration of retinol, treat or prevent secondary bacterial infections: apply 1% tetracycline eye ointment twice daily (do not apply eye drops containing corticosteroids) and protect the eye with an eye-pad after each application.

Prevention
– Systematically administer retinol PO to children suffering from measles (one dose on
D1 and D2) or malnutrition (single dose).
– In areas where vitamin A deficiency is common, routine supplementation of retinol PO:
Children under 6 months: 50 000 IU as a single dose
Children from 6 to 12 months: 100 000 IU as a single dose every 4 to 6 months
Children from 1 to 5 years: 200 000 IU as a single dose every 4 to 6 months
Mothers after giving birth: 200 000 IU as a single dose immediately after delivery or within 8 weeks of delivery

Note: to avoid excessive dosage, record any doses administered on the health/ immunisation card and do not exceed indicated doses. Vitamin A overdose may cause raised intracranial pressure (bulging fontanelle in infants; headache, nausea, vomiting) and, in severe cases, impaired consciousness and convulsions. These adverse effects are transient; they require medical surveillance and symptomatic treatment if needed.

122

5. Eye diseases

Conjunctivitis

Conjunctivitis is an acute inflammation of the conjunctiva due to a bacterial or viral infection, allergy, or irritation. Endemic or epidemic, conjunctivitis may be associated with measles or rhinopharyngitis in children. In the absence of hygiene and effective treatment, secondary bacterial infections may develop, affecting the cornea (keratitis) and leading to blindness.

Clinical features
– Clinical signs of all conjuctivites include: redness of the eye and irritation. Visual acuity is not affected.
– Depending on the cause:
• abundant and purulent secretions, eyelids stuck together on waking, unilateral infection at onset: bacterial conjunctivitis
• watery (serous) secretions, no itching: viral conjunctivitis
• excessive lacrimation, eyelid oedema, intense itching: allergic conjunctivitis
– In endemic areas, turn both upper eyelids up to check for signs of trachoma (see
Trachoma, page 126).
– Suspect keratitis if patient reports intense pain (more than is usually associated with conjunctivitis) and photophobia. Instill one drop of 0.5% fluorescein to check for possible ulcerations.
– Always check for foreign bodies (subconjunctival or corneal) and remove after administering 0.4% oxybuprocaine anaesthetic eye drops (two drops maximum). Never give bottle of eye drops to the patient.

Treatment
– Bacterial conjunctivitis
• Clean eyes 4 to 6 times/day with boiled water or 0.9% sodium chloride.
• Apply 1% tetracycline eye ointment 2 times/day into both eyes for 7 days.
• Never use corticosteroid drops or ointment.
– Viral conjunctivitis
• Clean eyes 4 to 6 times/day with boiled water or 0.9% sodium chloride.
• Apply local antibiotics if there is a (risk of) secondary bacterial infection (see above). 123

5

Conjunctivitis

– Allergic conjunctivitis
• Local treatment as for viral conjunctivitis.
• Antihistamines for one to 3 days: promethazine PO
Children from 2 to 5 years: 5 to 15 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses
Children from 5 to 10 years: 10 to 25 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses
Children over 10 years and adults: 25 to 50 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses or chlorphenamine PO
Children from 1 to 2 years: 1 mg 2 times daily
Children from 2 to 6 years: 1 mg 4 to 6 times daily
Children from 6 to 12 years: 2 mg 4 to 6 times daily
Adults: 4 mg 4 to 6 times daily
Note: in the event of a foreign body, check tetanus immunisation status.

Neonatal conjunctivitis
Conjunctivitis due to Neisseria gonorrhoeae and/or Chlamydia trachomatis in children born to infected mothers.

Clinical features
– Purulent conjunctivitis within the first 28 days of life.
– Gonococcal conjunctivitis usually occurs 2 to 7 days after birth. The infection is bilateral in 50% of cases, highly contagious and may rapidly lead to severe corneal lesions and blindness. – Chlamydial conjunctivitis usually occurs 5 to 14 days after birth. The infection is often unilateral. Prevention
Immediately at birth:
– Clean eyelids with sterile 0.9% sodium chloride.
– Apply 1% tetracycline eye ointment once into both eyes.
Failing the above, use 1% silver nitrate: one drop into both eyes (silver nitrate is toxic and difficult to prepare and keep in solution. It is therefore not suitable for isolated settings). Note:
In case of maternal herpes simplex virus infection at delivery:
– Clean eyelids with sterile 0.9% sodium chloride.
– Apply 3% aciclovir eye ointment once into both eyes, then wait 12 hours to apply
1% tetracycline eye ointment.

Treatment
At dispensary level
Treatment is urgent and the child should be referred. When immediate hospitalisation is not possible, clean and apply 1% tetracycline eye ointment into both eyes every hour, until systemic treatment is available.

124

5. Eye diseases

At hospital level
– If possible isolate the newborn for 24 to 48 hours.
– Treatment of choice is ceftriaxone IM: 50 mg/kg as a single dose (without exceeding
125 mg) if only the eyes are infected.
Failing the above, use spectinomycin IM: 25 mg/kg as a single dose (without exceeding 75 mg).
– Clean eyes with an isotonic sterile solution (0.9% sodium chloride or Ringer Lactate) to prevent secretions from adhering, and apply 1% tetracycline eye ointment
4 times/day.
– If systemic treatment is not immediately available, apply 1% tetracycline eye ointment into both eyes every hour until the treatment is available.
– Treat mother and partner (see Genital infections, page 229)
– If treatment with ceftriaxone fails, treat for chlamydia: erythromycin PO: 50 mg/kg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 14 days

5

Viral epidemic keratoconjunctivitis
(corneal and conjunctival lesions)
– Treat as viral conjunctivitis. If possible, refer to an ophthalmologist.
– Protect the eye with a compress as long as photophobia lasts. Remove as soon as possible. – If necessary, administer a preventive dose of vitamin A (see page 122).

125

Trachoma

Trachoma
Trachoma is a highly contagious keratoconjunctivitis due to Chlamydia trachomatis. The disease is endemic in the poorest rural areas of Africa, Asia, Central and South America and the Middle East.
Infection is usually first contracted early in childhood by direct or indirect contact (dirty hands, contaminated towels, flies). In the absence of hygiene and effective treatment, the inflammation intensifies with successive infections, causing scars and deformities on the upper tarsal conjunctiva. The resulting ingrowing eyelashes (trichiasis) cause corneal lesions followed by permanent blindness, usually in adulthood.
The WHO classifies trachoma into 5 stages. Early diagnosis and treatment of first stages is essential to avoid the development of trichiasis and associated complications.

Clinical features
Several stages can occur simultaneously:
– Stage I: trachomatous inflammation - follicular (TF)
Presence of five or more follicles in the upper tarsal conjunctiva. Follicles are whitish, grey or yellow elevations, paler than the surrounding conjunctiva.
– Stage II: trachomatous inflammation - intense (TI)
The upper tarsal conjunctiva is red, rough and thickened. The blood vessels, normally visible, are masked by a diffuse inflammatory infiltration or follicles.
– Stage III: trachomatous scarring (TS)
Follicles disappear, leaving scars: scars are white lines, bands or patches in the tarsal conjunctiva. – Stage IV: trachomatous trichiasis (TT)
Due to multiple scars, the margin of the eyelid turns inwards (entropion); the eyelashes rub the cornea and cause ulcerations and chronic inflammation.
– Stage V: corneal opacity (CO)
Cornea gradually loses its transparency, leading to visual impairment and blindness.

126

5. Eye diseases

Treatment
– Stages I and II:
• Clean eyes and face several times per day.
• Antibiotic therapy:
The treatment of choice is azithromycin PO:
Child over 6 months or over 6 kg: 20 mg/kg as a single dose
Adult: 1 g as a single dose
Failing the above, apply 1% tetracycline eye ointment: 2 times/day for 6 weeks
In children under 6 months or 6 kg: erythromycin PO (40 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses for 14 days)
– Stage III: no treatment
– Stage IV: surgical treatment
While waiting for surgery, if regular patient follow-up is possible, taping eyelashes to the eyelid is a palliative measure that can help protect the cornea. In certain cases, this may lead to permanent correction of the trichiasis within a few months.
The method consists in sticking the ingrowing eyelashes to the external eyelid with thin strip of sticking-plaster, making sure that the eyelid can open and close perfectly.
Replace the plaster when it starts to peel off (usually once a week); continue treatment for 3 months.
Note: epilation of ingrowing eyelashes is not recommended since it offers only temporary relief and regrowing eyelashes are more abrasive to the cornea.
– Stage V: no treatment

Prevention
Cleaning of the eyes, face and hands with clean water reduces direct transmission and the development of secondary bacterial infections.

127

5

Other pathologies

Other pathologies
Onchocerciasis (river blindness)
Ocular lesions result from the invasion of the eye by microfilariae. They generally develop in adults and progress to blindness in the absence of early treatment.

Clinical features and treatment
Ocular lesions are always associated with onchocercal skin lesions (see page 157).
– Pruritus, hemeralopia (crepuscular blindness), decrease in visual acuity, narrowing of the visual field, awareness of microfilariae in the visual field (the patient sees “little wiggling worms before his eyes”).
– Lesions of the cornea (punctuate, then sclerosing, keratitis), iris (iridocyclitis) or posterior segment (chorioretinopathy and optic atrophy); microfilariae within the anterior chamber or vitreous humor (slit lamp).
For treatment, see Onchocerciasis, page 157. Ivermectin treatment may improve anterior segment lesions (sclerosing keratitis, iridocyclitis) and visual acuity. Severe lesions
(chorioretinal lesions, optic atrophy) continue to progress despite treatment.

Loiasis
Clinical features and treatment
Migration of an adult worm under the palpebral or bulbar conjunctiva (white, filiform worm, measuring 4 to 7 cm in length, mobile) and ocular pruritus, lacrimation, photophobia or eyelid oedema.
For treatment, see Loiais, page 159. The migration of the worm is often of very brief duration. Do not attempt to extract it, or administer anaesthetic drops; simply reassure the patient, the event is harmless. Surgical removal is likewise futile if the worm is dead/calcified. Pterygium
A whitish, triangular growth of fibrovascular tissue extending slowly from the conjunctiva to the cornea. It occurs most frequently in patients who are exposed to wind, dust, or arid climates and never disappears spontaneously.

Clinical features and treatment
Two stages:
– Benign pterygium develops slowly, does not reach the pupil: no treatment.
– Progressive vascularized pterygium: red and inflamed growth covers the pupil and may impair vision:
• Clean eye with sterile water or 0.9% sodium chloride.
• Surgical removal if facilities are available.

Cataract
Opacity of the lens that causes a progressive loss of visual acuity. Cataract is common in the tropics and can occur at a younger age than in Europe. The presence of cataract in both eyes leads to blindness. Surgery is the only treatment.
128

CHAPTER 6

Parasitic diseases
Protozoan infections
Malaria

131

Human african trypanosomiasis

139

American trypanosomiasis

142

Leishmaniases

144

Intestinal protozoan infections (parasitic diarrhoea) 147

Helminthic infections
Flukes

149

Schistosomiases

150

Cestodes

152

Nematode infections

154

Filariasis

157

6

6. Parasitic diseases

Malaria
Malaria is a parasitic infection due to protozoa of the genus Plasmodium, transmitted to humans by the bite of Anopheles mosquitoes. Transmission by transfusion of parasite infected blood and transplacental transmission are also possible.
Most infections are due to four species: P. falciparum, P. vivax, P. ovale and P. malariae. All species may cause uncomplicated malaria; severe malaria (defined by the presence of complications) is almost always due to P. falciparum.
Clinical suspicion of malaria should be confirmed whenever possible by a parasitological diagnosis. However, treatment of suspected malaria should not be delayed when confirmatory testing is not available: uncomplicated malaria can progress rapidly to severe malaria, and severe malaria may cause death within a few hours if left untreated.

Clinical features
Malaria should always be considered in a patient living in or coming from an endemic area, who presents with fever (or history of fever in the previous 48 hours).
Uncomplicated malaria
Fever is frequently associated with chills, sweating, headache, muscular ache, malaise, anorexia or nausea. In children, fever may be associated with abdominal pain, diarrhoea and vomiting. Anaemia is frequent in children and pregnant women.
Severe malaria
In addition to the above, the patient presents with one or more of the following complications: – Impaired consciousness, delirium or coma
– Seizures, generalised or focal (e.g. abnormal eye movements)
– Prostration (extreme weakness; in children: inability to sit or drink/suck)
– Respiratory distress: rapid and laboured breathing or slow, deep breathing
– Circulatory collapse (shock): cold extremities, weak or absent pulse, slow capillary refill time (> 3 seconds), cyanosis
– Jaundice (check mucosal surfaces of the mouth, conjunctivae and palms)
– Haemoglobinuria: dark red urine
– Abnormal bleeding: skin (petechiae), conjunctivae, nose, gums; blood in stools
– Acute renal failure: urine output < 12 ml/kg/day in children and < 400 ml/day in adults, despite adequate hydration
Patients presenting with any of the above features or with severe anaemia (see page 37) must be hospitalised immediately.

Laboratory diagnosis
Parasitological diagnosis
– Microscopy
Thin and thick blood films enable parasite detection, species identification, quantification and monitoring of parasitaemia.
Note: blood films may be negative due to sequestration of the parasitized erythrocytes in peripheral capillaries in severe malaria, as well as in placental vessels in pregnant women.
131

6

Malaria

– Rapid diagnostic tests (RDTs)1
Rapid tests detect parasite antigens. They give only a qualitative result (positive or negative) and may remain positive several days or weeks following effective treatment. Note: even with positive diagnostic results, rule out other causes of fever.
Additional examinations
– Haemoglobin (Hb) level: to be measured routinely in all patients with clinical anaemia, and in all patients with severe malaria.
– Blood glucose level: to be measured routinely to detect hypoglycaemia (< 3 mmol/l or < 54 mg/dl) in patients with severe malaria and those with malnutrition.

Treatment of malaria due to P. vivax 2, P. malariae, P. ovale chloroquine (CQ)

PO
Children and adults: 10 mg base/kg once daily on D1, D2
5 mg base/kg on D3

P. vivax and P. ovale can cause relapses due to activation of dormant parasites in the liver. A treatment with primaquine3 can be given to eliminate these parasites, after the initial treatment with CQ. However, this treatment is reserved for patients living in areas where re-infection is unlikely, i.e. non-endemic or low transmission areas.

Treatment of uncomplicated falciparum malaria
Antimalarial treatment (for pregnant women, see page 138)
The treatment is an artemisinin-based combination therapy (ACT)4 given by the oral route for 3 days. The first-line ACT is chosen according to therapeutic efficacy in the area under consideration. Coformulations (2 antimalarials combined in the same tablet) are preferred over coblisters (2 distinct antimalarials presented in the same blister). For dosing information, see table next page.
Artemisinin derivatives should not be used alone except in specific circumstances:
1) In young infants who have not attained the age required to be eligible for an ACT: artesunate PO is given alone in a dose of 4 mg/kg on D1, followed by 2 mg/kg once daily on D2 to D7.
2) When vomiting precludes oral therapy: treatment is started using the rectal (see artesunate suppositories, page 134) or IM route (see artemether IM, page 134), until the patient can tolerate a complete 3-day oral treatment with an ACT.
1 Most rapid tests detect the following antigens alone or in combination: HRP2 protein specific to P. falciparum;

an enzyme (Pf pLDH) specific to P. falciparum; an enzyme (pan pLDH) common to all 4 plasmodium species.
HRP2 may continue to be detectable for 2 to 3 weeks or more after parasite clearance; pLDH remains detectable for several days (up to 2 weeks) after parasite clearance.
2 In general, P. vivax remains sensitive to CQ but resistance is found in Papua New Guinea, the Solomon Islands,
Burma, India, Indonesia and East Timor. In these regions, follow national recommendations.
3 Primaquine for 14 days: 0.25 to 0.5 mg/kg once daily in children > 4 years; 15 mg once daily in adults.
Primaquine is contra-indicated in individuals with G6PD deficiency. The decision to prescribe primaquine must take into account the prevalence of G6PD deficiency in the population.
4 ACT: a combination of artemisinin or one of its derivatives (e.g. artesunate, artemether) with another antimalarial of a different class.
132

6. Parasitic diseases

Treatment of uncomplicated falciparum malaria with ACTs

artemether/ lumefantrine (AL)

ACT

Presentation

Dosage

Coformulated tablets of 20 mg artemether/ 120 On D1, the first dose is given at 0 hour and the mg lumefantrine, in blister
2nd dose at 8-12 hours. Subsequent doses on D2 and
D3 are given twice daily (morning and evening).
Blister child < 3 years (5 to 14 kg), 6 tab/blister

==> 1 tab twice daily on D1, D2, D3

Blister child 3-8 years (15 to 24 kg), 12 tab/blister ==> 2 tab twice daily on D1, D2, D3
Blister child 9-14 years (25 to 34 kg), 18 tab/blister ==> 3 tab twice daily on D1, D2, D3
Blister > 14 years-adults (> 34 kg), 24 tab/blister

==> 4 tab twice daily on D1, D2, D3

Coformulated tablets, in blister

artesunate-amodiaquine
(AS-AQ)

Blister child 2-11 months (4.5 to 8 kg), tab of AS 25 mg/AQ base 67.5 mg, 3 tab/blister

==> 1 tab once daily on D1, D2, D3

Blister child 1-5 years (9 to 17 kg), tab of AS 50 mg/AQ base 135 mg, 3 tab/blister

==> 1 tab once daily on D1, D2, D3

Blister child 6-13 years (18 to 35 kg),
==> 1 tab once daily on D1, D2, D3 tab of AS 100 mg/AQ base 270 mg, 3 tab/blister
Blister ≥ 14 years-adults (≥ 36 kg),
==> 2 tab once daily on D1, D2, D3 tab of AS 100 mg/AQ base 270 mg, 6 tab/blister
Co-blister
Coblister child ≤ 6 years, containing:
3 tab of AS 50 mg + 3 tab of AQ base 153 mg

5-11 months ==> 1/2 tab AS + 1/2 tab once daily on
D1, D2, D3
1-6 years
==> 1 tab AS + 1 tab AQ once daily on
D1, D2, D3

Coblister child 7-13 years, containing:
6 tab of AS 50 mg + 6 tab of AQ base 153 mg

==> 2 tab AS + 2 tab AQ once daily on D1, D2, D3

Coblister ≥ 14 years/adults, containing:
12 tab of AS 50 mg + 12 tab of AQ base 153 mg

==> 4 tab AS + 4 tab AQ once daily on D1, D2, D3

artesunatesulfadoxine/pyramethamine
(AS-SP)

Co-blister
Coblister child ≤ 6 years, containing:
3 tab of AS 50 mg + 1 tab of SP 500/25 mg

2-11 months ==> 1/2 tab AS once daily on D1, D2, D3
+ 1/2 tab SP as a single dose on D1
1-6 years
==> 1 tab AS once daily on D1, D2, D3
+ 1 tab SP as a single dose on D1

Coblister child 7-13 years, containing:
6 tab of AS 50 mg + 2 tab of SP 500/25 mg

==> 2 tab AS once daily on D1, D2, D3 + 2 tab SP as a single dose on D1

Coblister ≥ 14 years/adults, containing:
12 tab of AS 50 mg + 3 tab of SP 500/25 mg or Coblister ≥ 14 years/adults, containing:
6 tab of AS 100 mg + 3 tab of SP 500/25 mg

==> 4 tab AS once daily on D1, D2, D3 + 3 tab SP as a single dose on D1
==> 2 tab AS once daily on D1, D2, D3 + 3 tab SP as a single dose on D1

When coblisters are not available, administer separate tablets of artesunate 50 mg and sulfadoxine/pyrimethamine 500/25 mg, following the doses indicated for coblisters, as above.

artesunate-mefloquine
(AS-MQ)

Separate tablets of artesunate (AS) 50 mg and mefloquine (MQ) 250 mg

3-11 months ==> 1/2 tab AS once daily on D1, D2, D3
+ 1/2 tab MQ as a single dose on D1
1-6 years ==> 1 tab AS once daily on D1, D2, D3
+ 1 tab MQ as a single dose on D1
If the patient is nauseous, artesunate may be started alone on D1, and the dose of mefloquine deferred to D2.
7-13 years ==> 2 tab AS once daily on D1, D2, D3
+ 2 tab MQ on D1 and 1 tab MQ on D2
≥ 14 years/adults ==> 4 tab AS once daily on D1, D2, D3
+ 4 tab MQ on D1 and 2 tab MQ on D2
If the patient is nauseous, artesunate may be started alone on D1, and mefloquine doses deferred to D2 and D3 (instead of D1 and D2).

133

6

Malaria

In the event of failure of correctly administered treatment with a first line ACT, use another ACT or quinine PO. quinine PO D1 to D7
Children and adults ≤ 50 kg: 30 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses at 8-hour intervals
Adults > 50 kg: 1800 mg/day in 3 divided doses at 8-hour intervals
Reduced susceptibility to quinine has been observed in South-East Asia and Amazon region. In these areas, quinine is given in combination with doxycycline or clindamycin: doxycycline PO D1 to D7
Children > 8 years and adults: 200 mg once daily or, in children < 8 years: clindamycin PO D1 to D7
20 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses
Note: P. falciparum is resistant to chloroquine (CQ) in Africa, South America, South-East
Asia and Oceania but appears to remain sensitive to CQ in Haiti and the Dominican
Republic. In these regions, CQ remains the first line treatment (see non-falciparum malaria, page 132).
Symptomatic treatment
– Fever: paracetamol PO, see page 26.

Treatment of severe malaria
The patient must be hospitalised.
Antimalarial treatment (for pregnant women, see page 138)
At dispensary level:
Before transfer, administer either the first dose of artemether IM (loading dose, see below) or one dose of rectal artesunate:
Weight
3-5 kg
6-10 kg
11-20 kg
21-40 kg
41-60 kg
61-80 kg

50 mg artesunate suppository
1
2
–
–
–
–

200 mg artesunate suppository
–
–
1
2
3
4

At hospital level:
The drugs of choice are artemether IM or artesunate IV or IM: artemether IM

(into the anterior thigh):
Loading dose 3.2 mg/kg on D1, followed by 1.6 mg/kg once daily, until the patient can tolerate oral treatment (patient able to eat and drink).

134

6. Parasitic diseases

Weight

20 mg ampoule artemether
(20 mg/ml, 1 ml)

80 mg ampoule artemether
(80 mg/ml, 1 ml)

Loading dose

Maintenance dose

Loading dose

Maintenance dose

(3.2 mg/kg on D1)

(1.6 mg/kg/day)

(3.2 mg/kg on D1)

(1.6 mg/kg/day)

< 3 kg

0.5 ml

0.3 ml

–

–

3-4 kg

0.8 ml

0.4 ml

–

–

5-6 kg

1.2 ml

0.6 ml

–

–

7-9 kg

1.6 ml

0.8 ml

–

–

10-14 kg

2.5 ml

1.2 ml

-

–

15-19 kg

3.2 ml

1.6 ml

-

–

20-29 kg

–

–

1.2 ml

0.6 ml

30-39 kg

–

–

1.6 ml

0.8 ml

40-49 kg

–

–

2 ml

1 ml

50-59 kg

–

–

2.5 ml

1.2 ml

Use a 1 ml syringe graduated in 0.01 ml when the dose required is less than 1 ml. or artesunate IV

(or IM into the anterior thigh, if the IV route is not possible):
2.4 mg/kg at 0, 12, 24 hours, then once daily until the patient can tolerate oral treatment. Follow manufacturer’s instructions to make the appropriate dilution.

After the initial treatment with parenteral artemether or artesunate, administer a 3-day course of ACT5 (see uncomplicated falciparum malaria, page 132).
Exclusively in children who have not attained the age required to be eligible for an
ACT, oral completion treatment is provided with artesunate PO to complete 7 days of treatment (page 132).
Quinine IV is an alternative. The dose is expressed in quinine salt:
– Loading dose: 20 mg/kg to be administered over 4 hours, then, keep the vein open with an infusion of 5% glucose over 4 hours; then
– Maintenance dose: 8 hours after the start of the loading dose, 10 mg/kg every 8 hours
(alternate quinine over 4 hours and 5% glucose over 4 hours).
For adults, administer each dose of quinine in 250 ml of glucose. For children under
20 kg, administer each dose of quinine in a volume of 10 ml/kg of glucose.
Do not administer a loading dose to patients who have received oral quinine, mefloquine or halofantrine within the previous 24 hours: start with maintenance dose. As soon as the patient can tolerate oral treatment, administer either a 3-day course of
ACT5 or oral quinine (± doxycycline or clindamycin, if necessary, see page 134) to complete 7 days of treatment.
If the combination AS-MQ is used as oral completion treatment following IV quinine, an interval of 12 hours should elapse between the last dose of quinine and the administration of MQ.
5 Do not use AS-MQ if the patient developed neurological signs during the acute phase.

135

6

Malaria

Artemisinin derivatives may not be well absorbed when administered IM to patients in shock: for these patients, use artesunate IV or quinine IV.
Note: in isolated areas, when it is absolutely impossible to transfer a patient to a facility where parenteral antimalarial treatment can be administered, artesunate suppositories must be administered once daily, until the patient is able to take a 3-day course of ACT.
Symptomatic treatment and management of complications
Hydration
Maintain adequate hydration. As a guide, volume to be administered per 24 hours by oral or IV route:
Weight
Total volume/24 hours

5 to 9 kg

10 to 19 kg

20 to 29 kg

≥ 30 kg

120 ml/kg

80 ml/kg

60 ml/kg

50 ml/kg

Adjust the volume according to clinical condition in order to avoid dehydration or fluid overload (risk of pulmonary oedema).
When the IV route is used, alternate Ringer lactate (or 0.9% sodium chloride) and
5% glucose. Volumes of fluids used to administer drugs are included in the total volume to be administered over 24 hours.
Treat dehydration, if present (pages 306 to 311).
Fever
– Paracetamol, see page 26.
Severe anaemia
– Blood transfusion is indicated:
• In children with Hb < 4g/dl (or between 4 and 6 g/dl with signs of decompensation6).
• In pregnant women with Hb < 7g/dl (before 36 weeks) or Hb < 8 g/dl (at 36 weeks or later).
– In other patients with Hb < 7 g/dl, monitor clinical status and Hb level and consider transfusion on a case-by-case basis.
Hypoglycaemia
– If the patient is able to swallow:
50 ml of 10% glucose, or 40 ml of water + 10 ml of 50% glucose, or 50 ml of water
+ 5 g (1 teaspoon) of granulated sugar, or 50 ml of milk.
– Chez un patient inconscient :
10% glucose: 5 ml/kg by infusion or slow IV injection (5 minutes), or 50% glucose:
1 ml/kg by slow IV injection (5 minutes). 10% glucose is preferred in children as it is less viscous and irritating than 50% glucose7).
– Check blood glucose level after 30 minutes. If blood glucose level remains
< 3 mmol/l or < 54 mg/dl, administer another dose or give glucose by oral route, according to the patient’s clinical condition. Hypoglycaemia may recur: maintain regular sugar intake (5% glucose, milk, according to circumstances) and continue to monitor for several hours.
6 Clinical signs of decompensation may include: shock, impaired consciousness or respiratory distress (acidosis).
7 Glucose 50% at 1 ml/kg may be used in children, but must first be diluted with an equal volume of infusion fluid

to reduce viscosity, then administered by slow IV injection.

136

6. Parasitic diseases

Notes
– In an unconscious or prostrated patient, in case of emergency or when venous access is unavailable or awaited, use granulated sugar by the sublingual route to correct hypoglycaemia: place a level teaspoon of sugar, moistened with a few drops of water, under the tongue, then place the patient in the recovery position. Repeat after 15 min if the patient has not regained consciousness. As with other methods for treating hypoglycaemia, maintain regular sugar intake, and monitor.
– The risk of hypoglycaemia is higher in patients receiving IV quinine, especially pregnant women.
Coma
Check/ensure the airway is clear, measure blood glucose level and assess level of consciousness (Blantyre or Glasgow coma scale).
In the event of hypoglycaemia or if blood glucose level cannot be measured, administer glucose. If the patient does not respond to administration of glucose, or if hypoglycaemia is not detected: – Exclude meningitis (lumbar puncture) or proceed directly to administration of an antibiotic (see Meningitis, page 165).
– Insert a urinary catheter; place the patient in the recovery position.
– Reposition the patient every 2 hours; ensure eyes and mouth are kept clean and moist, etc.
– Monitor vital signs, blood glucose level, level of consciousness, urine output, hourly until stable, then every 4 hours.
– Monitor fluid balance.
Seizures
See page 23. Address possible causes (e.g. hypoglycaemia; fever in children).
Respiratory distress
– Rapid laboured breathing:
Check for pulmonary oedema, which may occur with or without fluid overload: reduce IV infusion rate if the patient is receiving IV therapy, nurse semi-sitting, oxygen, furosemide IV: 1 mg/kg in children, 40 mg in adults. Repeat after 1 to 2 hours if necessary.
Associated pneumonia should also be considered (see Pneumonia, page 66).
– Slow, deep breathing (acidosis):
Look for dehydration (and correct if present), decompensated anaemia (and transfuse if present).
Oliguria and acute renal failure
Look first for dehydration (page 305), especially due to inadequate fluid intake or excessive fluid losses (high fever, vomiting, diarrhoea). Treat dehydration, if present
(pages 306 to 311). Be aware of the risk of fluid overload and acute pulmonary oedema.
Monitor for the return of urine output.
Acute renal failure (ARF) is found almost exclusively in adults and is more common in
Asia than Africa. ARF should be suspected if urine output remains < 400 ml/day or
< 20 ml/hour (< 12 ml/kg/day in children) despite adequate rehydration. Insert a urinary catheter, measure output. Restrict fluids to 1 litre/day (30 ml/kg/day in children), plus additional volume equal to urine output. Renal dialysis is often necessary. 137

6

Malaria

Antimalarial treatment in pregnant women
– Malaria due to P. vivax, P. ovale, P. malariae chloroquine PO, as in other patients (see page 132).
Primaquine (radical cure of P. vivax and P. ovale) is contra-indicated.
– Uncomplicated falciparum malaria
During the first trimester, quinine PO (± clindamycin) is recommended. The safety of artemisinin derivatives has not yet been definitely established. However, given the risks associated with malaria, an ACT may be used if it is the only effective treatment available. During the 2 nd and 3 rd trimesters, the treatment of choice is an ACT; quinine
(± clindamycin) is an alternative.
– Severe malaria
During the first trimester, quinine IV is recommended. However, a parenteral artemisinin derivative may be used if it is the only effective treatment available.
During the 2 nd and 3 rd trimesters, preferred first-line treatment is a parenteral artemisinin derivative, followed by a 3-day course of ACT; quinine (± clindamycin) is an alternative.

Prevention 8
– In pregnant women, in areas with high risk of infection with P. falciparum sensitive to sulfadoxine/pyrimethamine, an intermittent preventive treatment (IPT) can be administered at regular intervals (refer to the MSF handbook, Obstetrics).
– In malaria endemic zones and in epidemic-prone contexts, all in-patient facilities
(including HIV treatment centres and feeding centres), should be furnished with long-lasting insecticidal nets (LLINs).

8 See specialised literature for other information regarding anti-vector measures and prevention of malaria in

travellers.

138

6. Parasitic diseases

Human african trypanosomiasis
(sleeping sickness)
Human african trypanosomiasis (HAT) is a zoonosis caused by protozoa
(trypanosomes), transmitted to humans through the bite of a tsetse fly (Glossina).
Transmission by contaminated blood transfusion and transplacental transmission are also possible.
The disease is found only in sub-Saharan Africa. There are two forms: Trypanosoma brucei gambiense HAT in western and central Africa and Trypanosoma brucei rhodesiense
HAT in eastern and southern Africa.

Clinical features
Inoculation may be followed by an immediate local reaction (trypanosomal chancre).
This chancre arises in about 50% of all rhodesiense but rarely in gambiense.
Gambiense HAT
– Incubation lasts from a few days to several years.
– The first stage of the disease (haemolymphatic stage) corresponds to the haematogenous and lymphatic dissemination of the parasite. Signs include intermittent fever, joint pain, lymphadenopathy (firm, mobile, painless lymph nodes, mainly cervical), frequent hepatosplenomegaly and skin signs (facial oedema, pruritus). – The second stage of the disease (meningoencephalitic stage) corresponds to the invasion of the central nervous system. Signs of the haemolymphatic stage recede or disappear and varying neurological signs progressively develop: sensory disturbances (deep hyperaesthesia), psychiatric disorders (apathy or agitation), disturbance of the sleep cycle (with daytime somnolence alternating with insomnia at night), impaired motor functions (paralysis, seizures, tics) and neuroendocrine disorders (amenorrhoea, impotence, thyroid dysfunction).
– In the absence of treatment: cachexia, lethargy, coma and death.
Rhodesiense HAT
The first stage is the same as above, but the disease evolves more rapidly and symptoms are more severe. Patients often die of myocarditis in 3 to 6 months without having developed signs of the meningoencephalitic stage.
In practice, gambiense and rhodesiense HAT can be difficult to differentiate: e.g., there exist cases of acute gambiense infection and others of chronic rhodesiense infection.

Laboratory
– Diagnosis involves 3 steps for gambiense HAT (screening test, diagnostic confirmation and stage determination) and 2 steps for rhodesiense HAT (diagnostic confirmation and stage determination).
139

6

Human african trypanosomiasis

– The CATT (Card Agglutination Test for Trypanosomiasis) is the recommended screening test for T.b. gambiense infection. It detects the presence of specific antibodies in the patient’s blood or serum.
– Diagnostic confirmation: presence of trypanosomes in lymph node aspirates or in blood using concentration techniques: thick blood film, capillary tube centrifugation technique (Woo test), quantitative buffy coat (QBC), mini-anion exchange centrifugation technique (mAEC).
– Stage determination: detection of trypanosomes (after single or double centrifugation) and white cell count in the cerebrospinal fluid (lumbar puncture):
• Haemolymphatic stage: no trypanosomes AND ≤ 5 white cells/mm3
• Meningoencephalitic stage: evidence of trypanosomes OR > 5 white cells/mm3

Treatment (except in pregnant women)
– Due to the toxicity of trypanocides, detection of the parasite is essential before initiating treatment. In the absence of parasitological diagnostic confirmation, treatment may nevertheless be justified in certain cases: very strong clinical suspicion, patients in life-threatening condition, strong serological suspicion (CATT
1:16 positive) in a population where the disease is highly prevalent (>2%).
– Several treatment regimens exist. Check national recommendations and local resistance levels.
– Treatment must be administered under close medical supervision. Patients receiving pentamidine can be treated as outpatients; those receiving suramin or melarsoprol or eflornithine should be hospitalised.
– After treatment, patients should be checked every 6 months (clinical examination, lumbar puncture and examination for trypanosomes) over 2 years, to look for relapse.

Haemolymphatic stage
Gambiense HAT

pentamidine isetionate deep

IM
Children and adults: 4 mg/kg once daily for 7 to 10 days
Patients should receive a source of glucose (meal, sweet tea) one hour before injection
(risk of hypoglycaemia); they should remain supine during administration and one hour after injection (risk of hypotension).
Rhodesiense HAT

suramine slow

IV
Children and adults: D1: test dose of 4-5 mg/kg
D3, D10, D17, D24, D31: 20 mg/kg without exceeding 1 g/injection
Suramin may cause anaphylactic reactions, a test dose is therefore recommended prior to starting treatment. In the event of an anaphylactic reaction after the test dose, the patients must not be given suramin again.

Meningoencephalitic stage
Before administrating trypanocides, the priority is to improve the patient’s general condition (rehydration, treatment of malaria, intestinal worms, malnutrition, bacterial infections). It is nonetheless recommended not to postpone the trypanocidal treatment for more than 10 days.

140

6. Parasitic diseases

Gambiense HAT

First choice: eflornithine IV infusion over 2 hours
Children under 12 years: 600 mg/kg/day in 4 divided infusions (every 6 hours) for
14 days
Adults: 400 mg/kg/day in 4 divided infusions (every 6 hours) for 14 days
The catheter must be handled with great attention to avoid local or general bacterial infections: thoroughly disinfect the insertion site, ensure secure catheter fixation, protect the insertion site with a sterile dressing, systematically change the catheter every 48 hours or earlier in case of signs of phlebitis.

Second choice: melarsoprol slow IV
Children and adults: 2.2 mg/kg once daily for 10 days
Outdated therapeutic regimens, based on 3 to 4 series of 3 to 4 injections (one injection/day) given with a drug-free interval of 7 to 10 days between each series, are still used in certain countries.
Prednisolone PO (1 mg/kg once daily) is frequently combined throughout the duration of treatment.
Melarsoprol is highly toxic: reactive encephalopathy (coma, or recurrent or prolonged seizures) in 5 to 10% of treated patients, fatal in around 50% of cases; peripheral neuropathy, invasive diarrhoea, severe skin rash, phlebitis, etc.
Rhodesiense HAT

melarsoprol slow IV
Children and adults: 3.6 mg/kg/day for 3 to 4 days, repeated 3 or 4 times with an interval of 7 to 10 days between each series

Treatment in pregnant women
All trypanocides are toxic for the mother and the foetus (risk of miscarriage, malformation). However, due to the life-threatening risk for the mother and the risk of mother-to-child transmission, treatment must be initiated as follows:
Haemolymphatic stage: pentamidine for gambiense HAT as of the second trimester and suramin for rhodesiense HAT.
Meningoencephalitic stage:
Treatment depends on the mother's condition:
– If in immediately life-threatening condition: treatment with eflornithine or melarsoprol cannot be deferred until after delivery.
– If not immediately life-threatening condition: pentamidine for gambiense HAT and suramin for rhodesiense HAT. Treatment with eflornithine or melarsoprol is to be administered after delivery.

Prevention and control
– Individual protection against tsetse fly bites: long sleeves and trousers, repellents, keeping away from risk areas (e.g. near rivers).
– Disease control: mass screening and treatment of patients (T. b. gambiense), trypanocide treatment of cattle (T. b. rhodesiense), vector control using tsetse fly traps or insecticides.

141

6

American trypanosomiasis

American trypanosomiasis
(Chagas’ disease)

– Chagas’ disease is a zoonosis due to the flagellated protozoan parasite Trypanosoma cruzi, transmitted to man by triatomine bugs (reduviidae) through a break in the skin or mucous membranes. Transmission by contaminated blood transfusion and transplacental transmission are also possible.
– The disease is only found on the American continent in the area between the south of
Mexico and the south of Argentina.

Clinical features
– Acute phase
• Depending on the inoculation site, the first sign is a skin chancre or unilateral purplish orbital oedema (Romaña's sign) with local lymphadenopathy and fever
(38°C, higher in children) over several weeks.
• This is followed by multiple lymphadenopathies, hepatosplenomegaly, myocarditis
(chest pain, heart failure), sometimes meningoencephalitis (seizures, paralysis).
• Acute phase may be asymptomatic or subclinical.
The transition from the acute to chronic phase does not always occur.
– Chronic phase
• Follows a long latent period after the acute phase: cardiac lesions (arrhythmia and conduction disorders, cardiomyopathy, heart failure, chest pain, thromboembolism) and gastrointestinal lesions (megaoesophagus and megacolon).
• Most patients are asymptomatic.

Laboratory
– Acute phase
• Thin or thick film: detection of the parasite in blood or lymph nodes.
• Serologic tests: detection of anti-Trypanosoma cruzi antibodies.
• Xenodiagnosis: examination of the faeces of uninfected triatomine bug fed with the patient's blood.
– Chronic phase
• Serologic tests: detection of anti-Trypanosoma cruzi antibodies.

142

6. Parasitic diseases

Treatment
– Acute phase

nifurtimox PO (contra-indicated in the first trimester of pregnancy, breast-feeding or in patients with history of mental disorders or seizures):
Patient under 40 kg: 10 to 12 mg/kg/day in 2 to 3 divided doses for 30 to 60 days
Patient over 40 kg: 8 mg/kg/day in 2 to 3 divided doses for 30 to 60 days
The adverse effects of nifurtimox (anorexia, nausea, gastric pain, agitation, sleeping disorders, seizures) occur in less than 20% of cases and must not result in treatment discontinuation. Avoid alcohol during treatment. or benznidazole PO (contra-indicated in the first trimester of pregnancy and breastfeeding):
Patient under 40 kg: 7.5 mg/kg/day in 2 to 3 divided doses for 30 to 60 days
Patient over 40 kg: 5 mg/kg/day in 2 to 3 divided doses for 30 to 60 days
The minor adverse effects of benznidazole (nausea, skin rash) occur in about 50% of patients. In the event of purpura with fever, paraesthesia or peripheral polyneuritis, stop treament.

– Chronic phase in children under 12 years benznidazole PO

6

Children under 40 kg: 7.5 mg/kg/day in 2 to 3 divided doses for 30 to 60 days
Children over 40 kg: 5 mg/kg/day in 2 to 3 divided doses for 30 to 60 days

– Chronic phase in children over 12 years and adults
Do not treat in the event of pregnancy, breast-feeding, hepatic or renal failure, or a severe intercurrent pathology. nifurtimox PO: 8 to 10 mg/kg/day in 2 to 3 divided doses for 60 to 90 days or benznidazole PO: 5 mg/kg/day in 2 to 3 divided doses for 60 days
– Symptomatic treatment
See seizures (page 23), pain (page 29) and heart failure (page 294).

Prevention
– Improvement of housing and vector control: plastered walls and cement floors, corrugated-iron roofs, insecticide spraying.
– Blood transfusions: screening donor blood for T. cruzi infection.

143

Leishmaniases

Leishmaniases
– Leishmaniases are parasitic diseases of man and numerous animals due to protozoa of the genus Leishmania, transmitted by the bite of sandflies.
– Cutaneous leishmaniasis occurs in Southern Europe, Asia (Middle-East, Afghanistan,
Pakistan), Africa and Latin America.
– Mucocutaneous leishmaniasis occurs in Latin America and, more rarely, in Africa
(Ethiopia, Sudan).
– Visceral leishmaniasis or kala-azar occurs in East and North Africa, Asia (India,
Pakistan, Bangladesh, Nepal, China), Southern Europe and Latin America.

Clinical features
Cutaneous and mucocutaneous leishmaniases
Single or multiple lesions on the uncovered parts of the body: a papule that extends in surface and depth to form a scabbed ulcer in the “dry” forms. The “wet” forms progress more rapidly and are more damaging.
Usually, lesions heal spontaneously, leaving a scar. Lesions may also spread to the mucosa (mouth, nose, conjunctiva) giving rise to the mucocutaneous form which may cause severe disfigurement.
Visceral leishmaniasis
Fever (of any type: persistent, undulating, in peaks) and splenomegaly are the 2 main signs. Weight loss and lymphadenopathies are frequent. Other signs: epistaxis, pallor, anaemia, hepatomegaly and diarrhoea.
Untreated visceral leishmaniasis leads to death.
Post-kala-azar dermal leishmaniasis
Cutaneous lesions of unknown aetiology, occuring after treatment of visceral leishmaniasis. The mucosa may be involved. In severe cases, systemic treatment as for visceral leishmaniasis is necessary (pentavalent antimonials, paromomycin).

Laboratory
– Parasitological diagnosis:
• tissue biopsy from the edge of the ulcer for cutaneous forms or • splenic, bone marrow, lymph nodes aspiration-biopsy for the visceral form (splenic aspiration is the most sensitive technique but carries a theoretical risk of potentially fatal haemorrhage) then • demonstration of Leishmania in smear, Giemsa staining: parasites lying free or sometimes intracellular (inside macrophages).

144

6. Parasitic diseases

– Serological diagnosis: ELISA and IFAT. Direct agglutination test (DAT) can be used in the field when a laboratory is not available.
– In visceral leishmaniasis: raised ESR and pancytopenia.

Treatment
The various species of Leishmania respond differently to drugs. Consider national recommendations. For information:
Cutaneous and mucocutaneous leishmaniases
– Forms with a single lesion or few lesions: start by local treatment with a pentavalent antimonial: meglumine antimoniate or sodium stibogluconate: 1 to 3 ml infiltrated into the edge and base of the lesion and repeated if necessary. The IM route is restricted to severe cases and must be administered under close medical supervision.
– Mucocutaneous forms: systemic treatment as for visceral leishmaniasis, with meglumine antimoniate or sodium stibogluconate or amphotericin B (see below).
Visceral leishmaniasis
– Start treatment with a pentavalent antimonial: meglumine antimoniate IM (81 mg Sb 5+ /ml) or sodium stibogluconate IM (100 mg
Sb5+/ml)
The doses, expressed in terms of antimony, are the same for both drugs:
Children and adults: 20 mg/kg once daily for 30 days
– Symptomatic treatment of fever, anaemia (iron + folic acid, see anaemia, page 37) and the frequent intercurrent infections (malaria, dysentery, pneumonia, etc.) is crucial.
HIV infection may also be present.
– Hydration and high-protein high-calorie diet.
Second-line treatment in the event of non-response to pentavalent antimonials

– paromomycin (aminosidine) IM
Children and adults: 15 mg/kg once daily for 21 days in combination with a pentavalent antimonial as above.
Paromomycin may also be used alone. The dosage and treatment duration vary depending on the regimen. or – liposomal amphotericin B (less toxic than amphotericin B) by strict IV infusion in 5% glucose over one hour:
Children and adults: the total dose administered over the full course of treatment is usually 24 mg/kg divided in 6 infusions, i.e. 4 mg/kg/infusion once daily for 6 days or on alternate days for 2 weeks.
Start with a 1-mg dose administered by slow IV route (over 10 to 15 minutes) to test for allergic reactions and patient tolerance.

145

6

Leishmaniases

or, failing that,
– amphotericin B IV infusion in 5% glucose over 4 hours:
The drug is active but nephrotoxic. Do not exceed the indicated doses.
Children and adults: start with a 1-mg dose by slow IV (over 20 to 30 minutes) to test for allergic reactions and patient tolerance. Gradually increase, by increments of 5 to
10 mg/day, to a dose of 0.5 to 1 mg/kg/day, maximum, administered on alternate days. The total dose administered over the full course of treatment is usually
20 mg/kg. or – pentamidine slow deep IM injection (with the patient supine):
Can be used, but the drug is more toxic and less effective than pentavalent antimonials. Children and adults: 4 mg/kg/injection on alternate days for a total treatment duration of 5 to 25 weeks, until no parasites are detected on microscopy (for visceral leishmaniasis, 2 negative biopsy-aspirates at an interval of 14 days).

Prevention
– Insecticide-impregnated mosquito nets.
– Vector control and elimination of animal reservoir hosts.

146

6. Parasitic diseases

Intestinal protozoan infections
(parasitic diarrhoea)
The most important intestinal protozoan infections are amoebiasis (Entamoeba histolytica), giardiasis (Giardia lamblia), cryptosporidiosis (Cryptosporidium sp), cyclosporiasis (Cyclospora cayetanensis) and isosporiasis (Isospora belli).
Intestinal protozoa are transmitted by the faecal-oral route (soiled hands, ingestion of food or water contaminated with faeces) and may cause both individual cases of diarrhoea and epidemic diarrhoea outbreaks.

Clinical features
– Amoebiasis gives rise to bloody diarrhoea, see Chapter 3, page 88.
– Clinical presentation of giardiasis, cryptosporidiosis, cyclosporiasis and isosporiasis is very similar:
• Diarrhoea is usually mild and self-limiting, except in children and patients with advanced HIV disease (CD4 < 200). These patients are likely to develop severe, intermittent or chronic diarrhoea that may be complicated by malabsorption with significant wasting (or failure to gain weight in children) or severe dehydration.
• Stools are usually watery, but steatorrhoea (pale, bulky, fatty stools) may be found in the event of secondary fat malabsorption; stools may contain mucus.
• Diarrhoea is usually associated with non-specific gastrointestinal symptoms
(abdominal distension and cramps, flatulence, nausea, anorexia), but patients have low-grade fever or no fever.

Laboratory
Definitive diagnosis relies on parasite identification in stool specimens
(trophozoites and cysts for giardia; oocysts for cryptosporidium, cyclospora, isospora). Two to three samples, collected 2 to 3 days apart are necessary, as pathogens are shed intermittently.

Treatment
– Correct dehydration if present (for clinical features and management, see pages 305 and 311).

147

6

Intestinal protozoan infections (parasitic diarrhoea)

– If the causal agent has been identified in the stool:
Giardiasis

tinidazole

PO as a single dose or metronidazole PO for 3 days
Children: 50 mg/kg (max.2 g)
Children: 30 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses
Adults: 2 g
Adults: 2 g/jour en une prise

Cryptosporidiosis In immunocompetent patients, no aetiological treatment; spontaneous resolution in 1 to 2 weeks.
Cyclosporiasis

co-trimoxazole

Isoporiasis

co-trimoxazole

PO for 7 days
Children: 50 mg SMX + 10 mg TMP/kg/day in 2 divided doses
Adults: 1600 mg SMX + 320 mg TMP/day in 2 divided doses
In immunocompetent patients, symptoms usually resolve spontaneous in
1 to 3 weeks. Treatment is given in case of severe or prolonged symptoms.
PO for 7 to 10 days
Adults: 1600 to 3200 mg SMX + 320 to 640 mg TMP/ day in 2 divided doses In immunocompetent patients, symptoms usually resolve spontaneous in
2 to 3 weeks. Treatment is given in case of severe prolonged symptoms.

– If reliable stool examination cannot be carried out: parasitic diarrhoeas cannot be differentiated on clinical grounds, nor is it possible to distinguish these from nonparasitic diarrhoeas. An empirical treatment (using tinidazole or metronidazole and cotrimoxazole as above, together or in succession) may be tried in the case of prolonged diarrhoea or steatorrhoea. In patients with HIV infection, see empirical treatment, page 213.
– In patients with advanced HIV disease, cryptosporidiosis, cyclosporiasis and isosporiasis are opportunistic infections; the most effective intervention is the treatment of the underlying HIV infection with antiretrovirals. Patients remain at high risk for dehydration/death until immunity is restored.

148

The two most prominent symptoms are prolonged (> 2 weeks) productive cough and intermittent haemoptysis (rusty-brown sputum). In endemic areas, paragonimosis should be considered whenever pulmonary tuberculosis is suspected as the clinical and radiological features overlap. Paragonimosis is confirmed when eggs are detected in sputum (or possibly in stools).

During migration phase: asthenia, prolonged fever, myalgia, right upper quadrant pain, mid hepatomegaly; sometimes, allergic signs (e.g. pruritus). At this stage, the diagnosis is rarely considered and can only be confirmed through serology; parasitological examination of stools is always negative.
Once adult flukes are present in the biliary tract: presentation resembles cholelithiasis: right upper quadrant pain, recurrent episodes of obstructive jaundice/febrile cholangitis. The diagnosis is confirmed when parasite eggs are detected in stools (or flukes are seen in the biliary tract with sonography).

Abdominal pain and diarrhoea. With heavy infection, hepatobiliary symptoms: hepatomegaly, right upper quadrant pain, jaundice or episodes of febrile cholangitis.
The diagnosis is confirmed when parasite eggs are detected in stools.

Symptoms are limited to diarrhoea and epigastric or abdominal pain.
With massive infection, F. buski can cause oedematous allergic reactions (including ascites, anasarca).
The diagnosis is confirmed when parasite eggs are detected in stools.

Hepatobiliary flukes
Fasciola hepatica and gigantica
Distribution: worldwide, in areas where sheep and cattle are raised
Transmission: eating uncooked aquatic plants Opisthorchis felineus
(Asia, Eastern Europe)
Opisthorchis viverrini
(Cambodia, Laos, Vietnam, Thailand)
Clonorchis sinensis
(China, Koera, Vietnam)
Transmission: eating raw/undercooked freshwater fish

Intestinal flukes
Fasciolopsis buski
(India, Bangladesh, South-East Asia)
Heterophyes heterophyes
(South-East Asia, Nile delta)
Metagonimus yokogawai
(Siberia, China, Korea)
Transmission: eating uncooked aquatic plants (F. buski), raw/undercooked fish
(other species)

Clinical features/Diagnosis

Lung flukes
Paragonimus sp
Distribution: South-East Asia, China, parts of Cameroon, Nigeria, Gabon,
Congo, Colombia, Peru
Transmission: eating raw freshwater crustaceans Infection/Epidemiology

Flukes

praziquantel PO
Children > 2 years and adults: 75 mg/kg/day in
3 divided doses for 1 day

Children > 2 years and adults: 75 mg/kg/day in
3 divided doses for 1 or
2 days

praziquantel PO

triclabendazole PO
Children and adults:
10 mg/kg as a single dose
May repeat in 24 hours in the event of severe infection

praziquantel PO
Children > 2 years and adults: 75 mg/kg/day in
3 divided doses for 2 to
3 days

Treatment

6. Parasitic diseases

6

149

Schistosomiases

Schistosomiases
Schistosomiases are acute or chronic visceral parasitic diseases due to 5 species of trematodes (schistosomes).
The three main species infecting humans are Schistosoma haematobium, Schistosoma mansoni and Schistosoma japonicum. Schistosoma mekongi and Schistosoma intercalatum have a more limited distribution (see table next page).
Humans are infected while wading/bathing in fresh water infested with schistosome larvae. Symptoms occurring during the phases of parasite invasion (transient localized itching as larvae penetrate the skin) and migration (allergic manifestations and gastrointestinal symptoms during migration of schistosomules) are frequently overlooked. In general, schistosomiasis is suspected when symptoms of established infection become evident (see table next page).
Each species gives rise to a specific clinical form: genito-urinary schistosomiasis due to
S. haematobium, intestinal schistosomiasis due S. mansoni, S. japonicum, S. mekongi and
S. intercalatum.
The severity of the disease depends on the parasite load. Heavily infected patients are prone to visceral lesions with potentially irreversible sequelae.
Children aged 5 to 15 years are particularly at risk: prevalence and parasite load are highest in this age group.
An antiparasitic treatment should be administered to reduce the risk of severe lesions, even if there is a likelihood of re-infection.
Geographic distribution of schistosomiasis in Africa (WHO)

150

1

Genito-urinary schistosomiasis

– Urinary manifestations:
• In endemic areas, urinary schistosomiasis should be suspected in any patients who complain of macroscopic haematuria (red coloured urine throughout, or at the end of, micturition). Haematuria is frequently associated with polyuria/dysuria (frequent and painful micturition).
• In patients, especially children and adolescents, with urinary symptoms, visual inspection of the urine (and dipstick test for microscopic haematuria if the urine appears grossly normal) is indispensible.
• Presumptive treatment is recommended in the presence of macro- or microscopic haematuria, when parasitological confirmation (parasite eggs detected in urine) cannot be obtained.
– Genital manifestations:
In women, symptoms of genital infection (white-yellow or bloody vaginal discharge, itching, lower abdominal pain, dyspareunia) or vaginal lesions resembling genital warts or ulcerative lesions on the cervix; in men, haematospermia (blood in the semen).
– If left untreated: risk of recurrent urinary tract infections, fibrosis/calcification of the bladder and ureters, bladder cancer; increased susceptibility to sexually transmitted infections and risk of infertility.
– In endemic areas, genito-urinary schistosomiasis may be a differential diagnosis to the genito-urinary tuberculosis, and in women, to the sexually transmitted infections
(especially in women with an history of haematuria).
– Non-specific digestive symptoms (abdominal pain; diarrhoea, intermittent or chronic, with or without blood) and hepatomegaly.
– For S. intercalatum: digestive symptoms only (rectal pain, tenesmus, rectal prolapse, bloody diarrhoea).
– If left untreated: risk of hepatic fibrosis, portal hypertension, cirrhosis, gastrointestinal haemorrhage (hematemesis, melanea, etc.), except with S. intercalatum (less pathogenic than other intestinal schistosomes, no severe hepatic lesions).
– The diagnosis is confirmed when parasite eggs are detected in stools.
– In the absence of reliable parasitological diagnosis: in areas where intestinal schistosomiasis is common, diarrhoea (especially bloody diarrhoea) with abdominal pain and/or hepatomegaly may be a basis for presumptive diagnosis and treatment.

S. haematobium
Distribution: Africa, Madagascar and the Arabian peninsula

S. mansoni
Distribution: tropical Africa,
Madagascar, the Arabian peninsula, South America
(especially Brazil)
S. japonicum
Distribution: China, Indonesia, the Philippines
S. mekongi
Distribution: parts of Lao PDR,
Cambodia (along the Mekong River)
S. intercalatum
Distribution: parts of DRC, Congo,
Gabon, Cameroon, Chad

Clinical features/Diagnosis (established infection)

For the treatment of schistosomiasis, praziquantel may me administered to pregnant women.

Intestinal schistosomiasis

Parasite/Epidemiology

praziquantel PO
Children > 2 years and adults1 :
40 mg/kg as a single dose

The same antiparasitic treatment is used for all species: Treatment

6. Parasitic diseases

151

6

152

1

praziquantel PO1

Children over 4 years and adults:
In the event of heavy infection:
15 to 25 mg/kg as a single dose gastrointestinal disturbances (epigastric pain) or niclosamide PO
Laboratory: eggs in stools
Adults: 2 g as a single dose on D1, then 1 g/day for 6 days
Thoroughly chew the tablets before swallowing and wash down with as little water as possible.

Often asymptomatic

Laboratory: eggs in stools

Prevention:
• individual: hand washing, nail cutting
• collective: hygiene and sanitation
(water, latrines, etc.)

Transmission by faecal-oral route or auto-infection Transmission by eating raw or undercooked
Children over 4 years and adults: freshwater fish
10 to 25 mg/kg as a single dose or Individual prevention: cook fish niclosamide PO thoroughly Children: 50 mg/kg as a single dose
Adults: 2 g as a single dose
Thoroughly chew the tablets before swallowing and wash down with as little water as possible.
If anaemia: vitamin B 12 + folic acid

praziquantel PO1

Prevention:
• individual: cook meat thoroughly
• collective: slaughterhouse monitoring

Transmission by eating raw or undercooked meat: • beef for T. saginata
• pork for T. solium

Transmission / Prevention

Praziquantel must be administered to pregnant women with T. solium taeniasis and cysticercosis. For the other indications, treatment can usually be deferred until after delivery.

Hymenolepiasis
Hymenolepis nana
(worldwide)

praziquantel PO1

Treatment

Children over 4 years and adults:
5 to 10 mg/kg as a single dose
Sometimes gastrointestinal disturbances or (epigastric or abdominal pain, nausea, niclosamide PO diarrhoea) Children: 50 mg/kg as a single dose
Adults: 2 g as a single dose
Laboratory: eggs in stools or collected from
Thoroughly chew the tablets before swallowing perianal skin (scotch tape method), segments and wash down with as little water as possible. in stools

Often asymptomatic or segments expelled in the stools.

Clinical features / Laboratory

Diphyllobothriasis
Often asymptomatic
Diphyllobothrium latum
(temperate or cold lake In the event of heavy infection: areas) mild gastrointestinal disturbances, anaemia due to vitamin B12 deficiency associated with (rare) neurological sequelae

Taeniasis
Taenia saginata
Taenia solium
(worldwide)

Parasites

Cestodes (adult forms)

Cestodes

3

2

In the event of neurocysticercosis: hospitalize, treat convulsions and combine with prednisolone PO for the entire duration of treatment, starting 2 or 3 days before.

Children over 2 years: 15 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses (without exceeding 800 mg/day) for 8 to 30 days
Adults: 800 mg/day in 2 divided doses for
8 to 30 days, repeat if necessary or praziquantel PO3
Children over 4 years and adults:
50 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses for 14 to
30 days

albendazole PO2

Treatment

Cysts located in the liver (60% of cases); lungs First-line treatment: surgical excision
(30% of cases), and, less frequently, in other sites including the brain. albendazole PO2 is useful in addition to, or instead of, surgery:
Long asymptomatic period. The cyst becomes Children over 2 years and adults under symptomatic when complications develop
60 kg: 15 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses
(biliary obstruction; anaphylactic shock in
Adults over 60 kg: 800 mg/day in 2 divided the event of rupture into peritoneal cavity, doses vessels or an organ; febrile painful jaundice in the event of rupture into the biliary tree,
Treatment duration: etc.) .
In addition to surgery (pre-operatively or post-operatively): continuous course of minimum 2 months or at least two 28-day courses with a drug-free interval of 14 days.
Inoperable cases: 28-day courses with drugfree intervals of 14 days, for 3 to 6 months
(on average), possibly up to 1 year.

Laboratory: hypereosinophilia in blood and cerebrospinal fluid

- Muscular: asymptomatic or myalgia
- Subcutaneous: nodules
- Neurological (neurocysticercosis) headache, convulsions, coma, etc.
- Ocular: exophthalmia, strabismus, iritis, etc.

Clinical features / Laboratory

Albendazole is contra-indicated during the first trimester of pregnancy.
Praziquantel is contra-indicated in the event of ocular cysticercosis.

Hydatid cyst
Echinococcus granulosus
(South America, North,
East and South Africa,
Western Europe)

Cysticercosis
Taenia solium
(worldwide)

Parasites

Cestodes (larvae)

Prevention:
• individual: avoid contact with dogs
• collective: eliminate stray dogs, monitor slaughterhouses

Transmission:
• direct: contact with dogs
• indirect: water and food contaminated by dog faeces

Individual prevention:
• treat T. solium carriers
• hygiene
• cook meat thoroughly

Transmission by eating food contaminated with T. solium eggs or auto-infection

Transmission / Prevention

6. Parasitic diseases

6

153

154

– In heavy infection: abdominal pain and diarrhoea
– In massive infection: chronic bloody diarrhea, tenesmus, rectal prolapse due to frequent attempts to defecate, especially in children.
Worms may sometimes be seen on the rectal mucosa when prolapsed: these are grayish-white, 3-5 cm in length, in the shape of a whip, with a thickened body and a long, threadlike extremity.
– Trichuris eggs may be detected through parasitological examination of stools.

Trichuriasis (whipworms)1
Trichuris trichiura
Distribution and transmission: as for A. lumbricoides

ascariasis) is much more effective than mebendazole as a single dose.
When using mebendazole, a 3-day treatment (as for ascariasis) is recommended. Treatment of anaemia (see page 37).

albendazole as a single dose (as for

Children > 6 months and adults:
400 mg once daily (200 mg once daily in children > 6 months but < 10 kg) or mebendazole PO for 3 days, as for ascariasis. A single dose of albendazole or mebendazole is often insufficient.

albendazole PO for 3 days

Children > 6 months and adults: 400 mg
(200 mg in children > 6 months but
< 10 kg) or mebendazole PO for 3 days
Children > 6 months and adults:
200 mg/day in 2 divided doses
(100 mg/day in 2 divided doses in children > 6 months but < 10 kg)

albendazole PO as a single dose

Treatment

1 Roundworms, whipworms and hookworms frequently co-infect the same host. This should be taken into account when prescribing antihelminthic treatment.

Hookworm infection1
– During larval penetration/migration
Ancylostoma duodenale
Cutaneous signs (pruritic papulo-vesicular rash at the site of penetration, usually the
Necator americanus feet) and pulmonary symptoms (similar to ascariasis).
Distribution: tropical and
– Once adult worms are present in the intestine subtropical regions
Mild abdominal pain. Attachment of the parasite to the mucosa leads to chronic
Transmission: larval skin blood loss and anaemia (in endemic areas, antihelminthic treatment is recommended penetration following contact for patients with iron-deficiency anaemia.)
(feet, hands) with contaminated – Hookworm eggs may be detected through parasitological examination of stools. soil – During larval migration
Loeffler’s syndrome: transient pulmonary symptoms (dry cough, dyspnoea, wheezing) and mild fever.
– Once adult worms are present in the intestine
Abdominal pain and distension. In general, the diagnosis is made when adult worms are expelled from the anus (or occasionally from the mouth). Ascaris are large
(15-30 cm), cylindrical worms, pinkish-white, with slightly tapered ends.
– Complications
Ascariasis is usually benign, but massive infestation may cause intestinal obstruction
(abdominal pain, vomiting, constipation), especially in children < 5 years. Worms may accidentally migrate to gall bladder, liver or peritoneum, causing jaundice, liver abscess, or peritonitis.
– Ascaris eggs may be detected through parasitological examination of stools.

Clinical features/Diagnosis

Ascariasis (roundworms)1
Ascaris lumbricoides
Distribution: worldwide, mainly in tropical and subtropical Transmission: ingestion of ascaris eggs

Infection/Epidemiology

Nematode infections

Nematode infections

Clinical features/Diagnosis

A second dose may be given after 2 to
4 weeks.

ascariasis) or mebendazole PO as a single dose:
Children > 6 months and adults:
100 mg (50 mg in children > 6 months but < 10 kg)

albendazole PO as a single dose (as for

Hyperinfections are refractory to conventional therapy. Prolonged or intermittent multiple-dose regimens are required.

While less effective, a 3-day treatment with albendazole PO (as for trichuriasis) may be an alternative.

First line treatment is ivermectine PO2 as a single dose:
Children > 15 kg and adults:
200 micrograms/kg, on an empty stomach Treatment

(200 micrograms/kg as a single dose).

2 The migrating larvae of Ancylostoma braziliense and caninum (hookworms of cats and dogs) also present as a pruritic, inflammatory, creeping eruption in humans (cutaneous larva migrans) but with a slower rate of progression and a longer duration (several weeks or months). Treatment is with albendazole
(400 mg as a single dose or once daily for 3 days in children > 6 months and adults; 200 mg in children > 6 months but < 10 kg) or ivermectin

Enterobiasis (pinworms)
– Anal pruritus, more intense at night, vulvovaginitis in girls (rare). In practice, the
Enterobius vermicularis diagnosis is most often made when worms are seen on the perianal skin (or in the
Distribution: worldwide stool in heavy infestation). Pinworms are small (1 cm), mobile, white, cylindrical
Transmission: faecal-oral route worms with slightly tapered ends. or auto-infection
– Pinworm eggs may be collected from the anal area (scotch tape method) and detected under the microscope.

Strongyloidiasis
– Acute strongyloidiasis
Strongyloides stercoralis
• During larval penetration/migration: cutaneous signs (erythema and pruritus at
Distribution: humid tropical the site of penetration, which may persist several weeks) and pulmonary symptoms regions (similar to ascariasis).
Transmission: larval skin
• Once larvae are present in the intestine: gastrointestinal symptoms (bloating, penetration and auto-infection abdominal and epigastric pain, vomiting, diarrhoea).
– Chronic strongyloidiasis
Intestinal larvae may re-infect their host (auto-infection) by penetrating through the intestinal wall or by migrating transcutaneously from perianal skin. Chronic infections result in prolonged or recurrent pulmonary and gastrointestinal symptoms.
Transcutaneous migration of intestinal larvae gives rise to a typical rash (larva currens), mainly in the anal region and on the trunk: sinuous, raised, linear, migrating lesion, intensely pruritic, moving rapidly (5 to 10 cm/hour) and lasting several hours or days2. – Complications
Hyperinfection (massive infestation) results in exacerbation of pulmonary and gastrointestinal symptoms, and possible dissemination of larvae to atypical locations,
(CNS, heart, etc.). This form occurs mainly in patients receiving immunosuppressive therapy (e.g. corticosteroids).
– Strongyloides larvae may be detected through parasitological examination of stools.

Infection/Epidemiology

6. Parasitic diseases

155

6

156

Clinical features/Diagnosis

Trichinellosis
– Enteric phase (1 to 2 days after ingestion of infected meat)
Trichinella sp
Self-limited episode of diarrhoea and abdominal pain lasting several days.
Distribution: worldwide,
– Muscular phase (about 1 week after ingestion) particularly frequent in Asia
High fever; muscular pain (ocular [pain on eye movement], masseters [limitation of
(Thailand, Laos, China, etc.) mouth opening], throat and neck [pain with swallowing and speech], trunk and
Transmission: consumption of limbs); facial or bilateral peri-orbital oedema; conjunctival haemorrhage, subungual raw or undercooked meat haemorrhage; headache. Typical features are not always present and the patient may containing trichinella larvae present with a non-specific flu-like syndrome.
(pork, wart-hog, bear, dog, etc.)
Other features, such as dietary habits (consuming pork/raw meat), suggestive symptoms (fever > 39°C and myalgia and facial oedema) in several individuals who have shared the same meal (e.g. ceremony) or hypereosinophilia > 1000/mm3, reinforce the clinical suspicion.
– Definitive diagnosis: muscle biopsy; serology (ELISA, Western Blot).

Infection/Epidemiology

plus, regardless of which antihelminthic is chosen: prednisolone PO: 0.5 to 1 mg/kg/day for the duration of treatment

Children > 2 years: 10 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses
Adults: 800 mg/day in 2 divided doses or mebendazole PO for 10 to 15 days
Children > 2 years: 5 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses
Adults: 400 mg/day in 2 divided doses

albendazole PO for 10 to 15 days

Treatment

Nematode infections

6. Parasitic diseases

Filariasis
Filariases are helminthiases due to tissue-dwelling nematode worms (filariae). Human to human transmission takes place through the bite of an insect vector.
The most important pathogens are outlined in the table below. Mixed infections are common in co-endemic regions.
Each filarial species is found in 2 principal developmental stages: macrofilariae (adult worms) and microfilariae (larval offspring). The treatment depends on the pathogenic stage of the species considered and targets microfilariae for O. volvulus and macrofilariae for the other species.
Location of macrofilariae Location of microfilariae Pathogenic stage Presence of
Wolbachia

Onchocerca volvulus
(onchocerciasis)

Subcutaneous nodules Skin and eye

Microfilariae

Yes

Loa loa
(loiasis)

Subcutaneous tissue Blood

Macrofilariae

No

Wuchereria bancrofti,
Brugia malayi and
Brugia timori
(lymphatic filariasis)

Lymph vessels

Blood

Macrofilariae

Yes

Species /Infections

6

Classical antifilarial agents include diethylcarbamazine (DEC), ivermectin and albendazole. Doxycycline is used solely in the treatment of O. volvulus and lymphatic filarial worms, which harbour an endosymbiotic bacterium (Wolbachia) sensitive to doxycycline. Onchocerciasis (river blindness)
The distribution of onchocerciasis is linked to that of its vector (Simulium), which reproduces near rapidly flowing rivers in intertropical Africa (99% of cases), Latin
America (Guatemala, Mexico, Ecuador, Colombia, Venezuela, Brazil) and Yemen.

Clinical features
In endemic areas, the following signs, alone or in combination, are suggestive of onchocerciasis: – Onchocercomas: painless subcutaneous nodules containing adult worms, usually found over a bony prominence (iliac crest, trochanters, sacrum, rib cage, skull, etc.), measuring several mm or cm in size, firm, smooth, round or oval, mobile or adherent to underlying tissue; single, or multiple and clustered.
– Acute papular onchodermatitis: papular rash, sometimes diffuse but often confined to the buttocks or lower extremities, intensely itchy, associated with scratch marks,
157

Filariasis

often superinfected (« filarial scabies ») 1. This arises from dermal invasion by microfilariae. – Late chronic skin lesions: patchy depigmentation on the shins (« leopard skin »), skin atrophy or areas of dry, thickened, peeling skin (lichenification; “lizard skin”).
– Visual disturbances and ocular lesions: see page 128.

Laboratory
– Detection of the microfilariae in the skin (skin snip biopsy, iliac crest).
– If the skin biopsy is positive, look for loiasis in regions where loiasis is co-endemic
(mainly in Central Africa).

Treatment
Antiparasitic treatment
– Diethylcarbamazine is contra-indicated (risk of severe ocular lesions).

– Doxycycline PO (200 mg/day for 4 weeks; if possible 6 weeks) kills a significant percentage of adult worms and progressively reduces the number of O. volvulus microfilariae2. It is contra-indicated in children < 8 years and pregnant or breastfeeding women.

– Ivermectin PO is the drug of choice: 150 micrograms/kg as a single dose; a 2nd dose should be administered after 3 months if clinical signs persist. Repeat the treatment every 6 or 12 months to maintain the parasite load below the threshold at which clinical signs appear3. Ivermectin is not recommended in children < 5 years or < 15 kg and pregnant women.

– In case of co-infection with Loa loa or in regions where loiasis is co-endemic, ivermectin should be administered with caution (risk of severe adverse reactions in patients with high L. loa microfilarial load):
• If it is possible to test for Loa loa (thick blood film):
Confirm and quantify the microfilaraemia. Administer the appropriate treatment according to the microfilarial load (see Loiasis, page 159).
• If it is not possible to perform a thick film examination, take a history from the patient: If the patient has received a previous treatment with ivermectin without developing serious adverse reactions (see page 160), administer the treatment.
If the patient has never received ivermectin nor developed signs of loiasis
(migration of an adult worm under the conjunctiva, or « Calabar » swellings), administer the treatment.
If the patient already has developed signs of loiaisis and if onchocerciasis has a significant clinical impact, administer ivermectin under close supervision (see
Loiasis, page 159) or use an alternative (doxycycline, as above).
– In the case of concomitant lymphatic filariasis: administer ivermectin first then start treatment for lymphatic filariasis with doxycycline PO (see page 162) one week later. 1 Differential diagnosis is sarcoptic scabies (page 98).
2 Elimination of Wolbachia reduces the longevity and fertility of the macrofilariae, and thus the production of new

microfilariae within the organism.

3 Ivermectin kills microfilariae and disrupts production of microfilariae by adult worms. However the treatment

must be administered at regular intervals since it does not kill adult worms.

158

6. Parasitic diseases

Nodulectomy (surgical removal of onchocercomas)
Nodules are benign, often deep, and their ablation does not treat onchocerciasis. Thus, nodulectomy is reserved for cranial nodules (their proximity to the eye is a risk factor for visual compromise) or nodules which are cosmetically unacceptable. In other cases, refrain from nodulectomy. Nodulectomy is performed under local anaesthesia, in an appropriately equipped facility.

Loiasis
The distribution of loiasis is linked to that of its vector (Chrysops) in forests or savannah with gallery forests in West or Central Africa (limits West: Benin; East: Uganda; North:
Sudan and South: Angola).

Clinical features
– The subconjunctival migration of an adult worm is pathognomonic of Loa loa infection. – Localised subcutaneous swellings, allergic in origin, transient (several hours or days), painless, non-pitting, appearing anywhere on the body, frequently the upper extremities and face, often associated with localised or generalised pruritus
(« Calabar swellings »).
– Onset of pruritus, in the absence of other signs.
– Subcutaneous migration of an adult worm: pruritic, palpable red cord-like linear lesion, sinuous, advancing (1 cm/hour), disappearing rapidly with no trace4. Such migration generally arises following treatment with diethylcarbamazine, rarely spontaneously. Laboratory
– Detection of microfilariae in the peripheral blood (thick film, stained with Giemsa).
Blood specimens should be collected between 10 am and 5 pm. Quantify microfilaraemia even if the diagnosis is certain, since treatment is determined by the intensity of the parasite load.
– If the thick film is positive, look for onchocerciasis in regions where onchocerciasis is co-endemic (mainly in Central Africa).

Treatment
Antiparasitic treatment
– Diethylcarbamazine (DEC) is the only macrofilaricide available but is contraindicated in:
• Patients with microfilaraemia > 2000 mf/ml (risk of severe encephalopathy, with poor prognosis).
• Patients co-infected with O. volvulus (risk of severe eye lesions).
• Pregnant women, infants, and patients in poor general condition.
4 For differential diagnosis, see cutaneous larva migrans, page 155.

159

6

Filariasis

– Ivermectin (and possibly albendazole) is used to reduce microfilaraemia before administration of DEC; however, ivermectin administration may trigger encephalopathy in patients with very high Loa loa microfilaraemia (> 30 000 mf/ml).
– Doxycycline is not indicated since Loa loa does not harbour Wolbachia.
– Management:
1) L. loa microfilaraemia is < 1,000-2,000 mf/ml:
A 28-day treatment of DEC may be started using small doses of 3 to 6 mg/day, i.e.
1/32 or 1/16 of a 100 mg tablet, administered in 2 divided doses. Double the dose every day up to 400 mg/day in 2 divided doses in adults (3 mg/kg/day in children). If microfilaraemia or symptoms persist, a second treatment is given 4 weeks later.
If DEC is contra-indicated due to possible or confirmed co-infection with
O. volvulus, ivermectin (150 micrograms/kg as a single dose) treats onchocerciasis, and reduces pruritus and frequency of Calabar swellings. The treatment may be repeated every month or every 3 months.
2) L. loa microfilaraemia is between 2,000 and 8,000 mf/ml:
Reduce microfilaraemia with ivermectin (150 micrograms/kg as a single dose); repeat the treatment every month if necessary; administer DEC when the microfilaraemia is
< 2000 mf/ml.
3) L. loa microfilaraemia is between 8,000 and 30,000 mf/ml:
Treatment with ivermectin (150 micrograms/kg as a single dose) may cause marked functional impairment for several days. Close supervision and support from family member(s) are necessary5. Prescribe paracetamol as well for 7 days.
4) L. loa microfilaraemia is > 30,000 mf/ml:
• If the loiasis is well tolerated, it is preferable to refrain from treatment: the disease is benign and treatment with ivermectin may cause very severe adverse reactions (encephalopathy), albeit rarely.
• If loiasis has a significant clinical impact and/or the patient presents with symptomatic onchocerciasis requiring treatment, ivermectin (150 micrograms/kg as a single dose) is administered for 5 days under supervision in hospital6. An attempt to first reduce L. loa microfilaraemia using albendazole (400 mg/day in
2 divided doses for 3 weeks) is an option. When L. loa microfilaraemia is <
30 000 mf/ml, treat with ivermectin under close supervision and support, then
DEC when the microfilaraemia is < 2000 mf/ml.
Extraction of macrofilariae
Subcutaneous migration of a microfilaria usually results from treatment with DEC; the worm will die beneath the skin and extracting it serves no purpose.
Removal of an adult worm from the conjunctiva: see page 128.
5 Patients may present with various pain syndromes, be unable to move without help or unable to move at all.

Monitoring is necessary to determine whether the patient can manage activities of daily living, and provide assistance if necessary. If the patient remains bedridden for several days, ensure pressure sores do not develop
(mobilisation, repositioning).
6 A severe reaction may occur on D2-D3. It is usually preceded by haemorrhages of the palpebral conjunctiva on
D1-D2. Routinely check for this sign by turning back the eyelids. Symptoms of post-ivermectin encephalopathy are reversible and the prognosis favourable, if the patient is correctly managed; the treatment is symptomatic until symptoms resolve. Avoid the use of steroids due to adverse effects.
160

6. Parasitic diseases

Lymphatic filariasis (LF)
The distribution of LF is linked to that of its mosquito vectors (Anopheles, Culex, Aedes, etc.): W. bancrofti: sub-Saharan Africa, Madagascar, Egypt, India, South East Asia, Pacific region, South America, The Caribbean
B. malayi: South East Asia, China, India, Sri Lanka
B. timori: Timor
90% of LF is due to W. bancrofti and 10% to Brugia spp.

Clinical features
– Acute recurrent inflammatory manifestations
• Adenolymphangitis: lymph node(s) and red, warm, tender oedema along the length of a lymphatic channel, with or without systemic signs (e.g. fever, nausea, vomiting). The inflammation may involve the lower limbs, external genitalia and breast. • In men: acute inflammation of the spermatic cord (funiculitis), epididymis and testicle (epididymo-orchitis).
Attacks resolve spontaneously within a week and recur regularly in patients with chronic disease.
– Chronic manifestations
• Lymphoedema: oedema of the lower extremity or external genitalia or breast, secondary to obstruction of the lymphatics by macrofilariae. The oedema is reversible initially but then becomes chronic and increasingly severe: hypertrophy of the area affected, progressive thickening of the skin (fibrous thickening with formation of creases, initially superficial, but then deep, and verrucous lesions).
The final stage of lymphoedema is elephantiasis.
• In men: increase in volume of fluid due to accumulation within the tunica vaginalis
(hydrocoele, lymphocoele, chylocoele); chronic epididymo-orchitis.
• Chyluria: milky or rice-water urine (disruption of a lymphatic vessel in the urinary tract). In patients parasitized by Brugia spp, genital lesions and chyluria are rare: lymphoedema is usually confined to below the knee.

Laboratory
– Detection of microfilariae in the peripheral blood (thick film)7; blood specimens should be collected between 9 pm and 3 am.
– In regions where loiasis and/or onchocerciasis are co-endemic, check for co-infection if the LF diagnosis is positive.

Treatment
Antiparasitic treatment
– Treatment is not administered during an acute attack.
7 When test results are negative in a clinically suspect case, consider detection of antigens (ICT rapid test) and/or

ultrasound of the inguinal area in search of the « filarial dance sign ».

161

6

Filariasis

– Doxycycline PO, when administered as a prolonged treatment, eliminates the majority of macrofilariae and reduces lymphoedema: 200 mg/day for 4 weeks minimum. It is contra-indicated in children < 8 years and pregnant or breast-feeding women.

– Diethylcarbamazine PO as a single dose (400 mg in adults; 3 mg/kg in children) may be an alternative but eliminates a variable proportion of adult worms (up to 40%) and does not relieve symptoms; a prolonged treatment is no more effective than single dose therapy. In addition, DEC is contra-indicated in patients with onchocerciasis or
Loa loa microfilarial load > 2000 mf/ml and in pregnant and breast-feeding women.
– Ivermectin (weak or absent macrofilaricidal effect) and albendazole should not be used for the treatment of individual cases (no effect on symptoms).
– In the case of confirmed or probable co-infection with O. volvulus: treat onchocerciasis first (see page 157), then administer doxycycline.
Control/prevention of inflammatory manifestations and infectious complications
– Acute attacks: bed rest, elevation of the affected limb without bandaging, cooling of the affected limb (wet cloth, cold bath) and analgesics; antibacterial or antifungal cream if necessary; antipyretics if fever (paracetamol) and hydration.
– Prevention of episodes of lymphangitis and lymphoedema: hygiene of the affected extremity8, comfortable footwear, immediate attention to secondary bacterial/fungal infections and wounds.
– Established lymphoedema: bandaging of the affected limb by day, elevation of the affected extremity (after removal of the bandage) when at rest, simple exercises
(flexion-extension of the feet when recumbent or upright, rotation of the ankles); skin hygiene, as above.
Surgery
May be indicated in the treatment of chronic manifestations: advanced lymphoedema
(diversion-reconstruction), hydrocoele and its complications, chyluria.

8 Wash at least once daily (soap and water at room temperature), paying special attention to folds and interdigital

areas; rinse thoroughly and dry with a clean cloth; nail care.

162

CHAPTER 7

Bacterial diseases
Bacterial meningitis

165

Tetanus

170

Typhoid fever

174

Brucellosis

176

Plague

178

Leptospirosis

180

Relapsing fever (borreliosis)

182

Eruptive rickettsioses

185

7

7. Bacterial diseases

Bacterial meningitis
Meningitis is an acute bacterial infection of the meninges, which may affect the brain and lead to irreversible neurological damage and auditory impairment.
Bacterial meningitis is a medical emergency. The treatment is based on early parenteral administration of antibiotics that penetrates well into the cerebrospinal fluid. Empiric antibiotic therapy is administered if the pathogen cannot be identified or while waiting for laboratory results.
The main bacteria responsible vary depending on age and/or context:
– Meningitis in a non-epidemic context:
• Children 0 to 3 months:
Children ≤ 7 days: Gram-negative bacilli (Klebsiella spp, E. coli, S. marscesens,
Pseudomona spp, Salmonella spp) and group B streptococcus
Children > 7 days: S. pneumoniae accounts for 50% of all bacterial meningitis.
L. monocytogenes is occasionally responsible for meningitis during this period.
• Children 3 months-5 years: S. pneumoniae, H. influenza B and N. meningitidis
• Children > 5 years and adults: S. pneumoniae and N. meningitidis
Special conditions:
• Immunodepressed patients (HIV, malnourished): high percentage of Gramnegative bacilli (specially Salmonella spp) and also M. tuberculosis.
• Sickle cell anaemia: Salmonella spp and Staphylococcus aureus are frequent causes.
• Meningitis may be related to S. aureus when associated with skin infection or skull fracture. – Meningitis in an epidemic context:1
In the Sahelian region 1 during the dry season, epidemics of meningococcal meningitis (Neisseria meningitidis A or C or W135) affect children from 6 months of age, adolescents and adults. In these regions, whether during epidemics or not, all the above pathogens can be found, especially in young children.

Clinical features
The clinical presentation depends on the patient's age:
Children over 1 year and adults
– Fever, severe headache, photophobia, neck stiffness
– Brudzinski's sign (neck flexion in a supine patient results in involuntary flexion of the knees) and Kernig's sign (attempts to extend the knee from the flexed-thigh position are met with strong passive resistance).
– Petechial or ecchymotic purpura (usually in meningococcal infections)
– In severe forms: coma, seizures, focal signs, purpura fulminans
1 But not exclusively, e.g. Rwanda, Angola, Brazil

165

7

Bacterial meningitis

Children under 1 year
The classic signs of meningitis are usually absent.
– The child is irritable, appears sick with fever or hypothermia, poor feeding or vomiting. – Other features include: seizures, apnoea, altered consciousness, bulging fontanelle
(when not crying); occasionally, neck stiffness and purpuric rash.

Laboratory
– Lumbar puncture (LP):
• Macroscopic examination of the cerebrospinal fluid (CSF): antibiotic therapy should be initiated immediately if the LP yields a turbid CSF.
• Microscopic examination: Gram stain (but a negative examination does not exclude the diagnosis) and white blood cell count (WBC).
• In an epidemic context, once the meningococcal aetiology has been confirmed, there is no need for routine LP for new cases.
Pressure

Aspect
Clear

Normal CSF

WBC
(leucocytes/mm3)

20
In
immunocompromised the WBC may be
< 100

Gram stain +

– Rapid test for detection of bacterial antigens.
Note: in an endemic area, it is essential to test for severe malaria (rapid test or thin/thick films).

166

7. Bacterial diseases

Treatment in a non-epidemic context
Antibiotic therapy
For the choice of antibiotic therapy and dosages according to age, see following page 169.
Duration of antibiotic therapy:
1) According to the pathogen:
• Haemophilus influenzae: 7 days
• Streptococcus pneumoniae: 10-14 days
• Group B streptococcus and Listeria: 14-21 days
• Gram-negative bacilli: 21 days
• Neisseria meningitidis: see Antibiotic therapy in an epidemic context
2) If the pathogen is unknown:
Children < 3 months: 2 weeks beyond the first sterile CSF culture or 21 days
Children > 3 months and adults: 10 days. Consider extending treatment or alternative diagnoses if fever persists beyond 10 days. On the other hand, a 7-day course of ceftriaxone is sufficient in patients who are making an uncomplicated recovery.

Additional treatment
– Dexamethasone reduces the risk of hearing loss in patients with H. influenzae or
S. pneumoniae. Early administration in indicated in meningitis caused by these pathogens or when the pathogen is unknown, except in neonates (and in presumed meningococcal meningitis in an epidemic context). dexamethasone IV:
Children > 1 month and adults: 0.15 mg/kg (max. 10 mg) every 6 hours for 2 days.
The treatment should be started before or with the first dose of antibiotic, otherwise, the treatment offers no benefit.
– Ensure that the patient is well fed and well hydrated (infusions or nasogastric tube if necessary). – Seizures: see page 23.
– Coma: prevention of bed sores, care of the mouth and eyes, etc.

Treatment in an epidemic context 2
Antibiotic therapy
In this context, N. meningitidis is the most likely pathogen. First-line treatment (in outpatients) is either oily chloramphenicol or ceftriaxone administered as a single IM dose. 1 Refer to the MSF handbook Management of epidemic meningococcal meningitis.

167

7

Bacterial meningitis

Children over 2 years and adults (except for pregnant or breast-feeding women)

oily chloramphenicol IM: 100 mg/kg as a single dose without exceeding 3 g. Divide the dose into two injections if needed, half-dose in each buttock. Do not exceed indicated doses. Age

2-5 years

6-9 years

10-14 years

≥15 years

Dose

1.5 g

2g

2.5 g

3g

or

ceftriaxone

IM: 100 mg/kg as a single dose, maximum 4 g. Divide the dose into two injections if needed, half-dose in each buttock.
Age

2-5 years

6-9 years

10-14 years

≥15 years

Dose

1.5 g

2.5 g

3g

4g

If there is no clinical improvement (i.e. repeated convulsions, fever > 38.5°C, appearance or aggravation of a reduced level of consciousness or of neurological signs)
24 hours after the first injection: administer a second dose of the same antibiotic.
If there is no clinical improvement (same signs as above) 48 hours after beginning the treatment (i.e. after two consecutive doses of oily chloramphenicol or ceftriaxone administered at 24-hour interval), review the diagnosis. If no other diagnosis has been found (e.g. malaria), continue the treatment with ceftriaxone once daily for 5 days.
Children less than 2 years
The treatment depends on the most probable pathogen and the patient’s age, as for meningitis in non-epidemic context (see page 169).
Pregnant or breast-feeding women

ceftriaxone IM: 100 mg/kg as a single dose, maximum or ampicilline IV at the doses indicated page 169

4g

Oily chloramphenicol is contra-indicated.

Additional treatment
– Ensure that the patient is well fed and well hydrated (infusions or nasogastric tube if necessary). – Seizures: see page XX.
– Coma: prevention of bed sores, care of the mouth and eyes, etc.
– Dexamethasone in not indicated.

168

IV
200 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
+
gentamicin IV
7.5 mg/kg/day in 3 injections

IV
200-300 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
+
ceftriaxone IV
100 mg/kg once daily

IV
100 mg/kg once daily
2 g/day in adults

ceftriaxone

IV
100 mg/kg once daily

ceftriaxone

ampicillin

IV
200-300 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
12 g/day in adults

ampicillin

–

ampicillin IV
200-300 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
+
gentamicin IV
7.5 mg/kg once daily

ampicillin

IV
200 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
+
cefotaxime IV
150-200 mg/kg/day in 3 injections

1 month

3 months to 5 years

> 5 years and adults

ampicillin

IV
150 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
+
gentamicin IV
5 mg/kg/day in 2 injections

ampicillin

IV
150 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
+
cefotaxime IV
100-150 mg/kg/day in 2 injections

ampicillin

Alternative

0-7 days

8-28 days

1 to 3 months First choice

No associated skin infection

IV
200 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
+
gentamicin IV
7.5 mg/kg once daily

–

IV
200 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
+
ceftriaxone IV
100 mg/kg once daily
IV
200 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
+
ceftriaxone IV
100 mg/kg once daily
IV
200 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
6 g/day in adults
+
ceftriaxone IV
100 mg/kg once daily
2 g/day in adults

cloxacillin

cloxacillin

cloxacillin

cloxacillin

–

IV
200 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
+
gentamicin IV
7.5 mg/kg/day in 3 injections

cloxacillin

IV
200 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
+
cefotaxime IV
150-200 mg/kg/day in 3 injections

cloxacillin

IV
75 mg/kg/day in 2 injections
+
gentamicin IV
5 mg/kg/day in 2 injections

cloxacillin

Alternative

IV
75 mg/kg/day in 2 injections
+
cefotaxime IV
100-150 mg/kg/day in 2 injections

cloxacillin

First choice

Associated skin infection (including umbilical cord infection)

7. Bacterial diseases

7

169

Tetanus

Tetanus
Tetanus is a severe infection due to the bacillus Clostridium tetani, which is found in soil, and human and animal waste. The infection is not communicable. C. tetani is introduced into the body through a wound and produces a toxin whose action on the central nervous system is responsible for the symptoms of tetanus.
Tetanus is completely preventable through vaccination. In unvaccinated individuals, most breaks in the skin or mucous membranes carry a risk of tetanus, but the wounds with the greatest risk are: umbilical cord stump in newborns, operative sites in surgical or obstetrical procedures performed under non-sterile conditions, puncture wounds, wounds with tissue loss or contamination with foreign material or soil, avulsion and crush injuries, sites of non-sterile injections, chronic wounds (e.g. lower extremity ulcers), burns and bites.
Tetanus develops in persons who have not been correctly vaccinated before exposure, or have not received adequate prophylactic treatment immediately after exposure.

Clinical features
Generalised tetanus is the most frequent and severe form of the infection. It presents as muscular rigidity, which progresses rapidly to involve the entire body, and paroxysmal muscle spasms, which are very painful. Level of consciousness is not altered.
Children and adults
– Average period from exposure to onset of symptoms is 7 days (3 to 21 days)
– Muscular rigidity is first seen in the jaw muscles (difficulty, then inability, in opening the mouth [trismus], preventing the patient from speaking, eating) then, extends to those of the face (fixed smile [risus sardonicus]), the neck (difficulty in swallowing), trunk (restriction of respiratory muscles; hyperextension
[opisthotonos]), abdomen (guarding) and limbs (extension of the lower limbs and flexion of the upper limbs).
– Muscle spasms appear at the onset or when muscular rigidity becomes generalised.
They are triggered by stimuli or arise spontaneously. Spasms of the thoracic and laryngeal muscles may cause respiratory distress or aspiration.
Newborns
– In 90% of cases, initial symptoms appear within 3 to 14 days of birth.
– The first signs are significant irritability and sucking difficulties (rigidity of the lips, trismus), then rigidity becomes generalised, as in adults. An infant qualifies as a case of neonatal tetanus if it has sucked and cried normally for the first 2 days of life, then becomes irritable and stops sucking 3 to 28 days after birth, and demonstrates rigidity and muscle spasms.
– Although the umbilicus is almost always the portal of entry, clinical infection of the cord site (omphalitis) is evident in only one half of cases.
– Check for septicaemia, which is frequently associated.

170

7. Bacterial diseases

Treatment
Hospitalisation is necessary and requires 3 to 4 weeks on average. Correct management can reduce mortality by 50%, even in hospitals with limited resources.
General measures
– The patient should be the sole occupant of a dark, quiet room: all stimulation
(noise, light, touch) may trigger painful spasms that may cause critical respiratory distress. – Handle the patient very carefully, under sedation and as little as possible; reposition every 3 to 4 hours to prevent bedsores.
– Establish IV access: hydration, access for IV injections.
– Insert a nasogastric tube: hydration and feeding; administration of oral medications.
– Gentle aspiration of secretions (nose, oropharynx).
– Provide hydration and nutrition in feeds divided over 24 hours. In newborns, give expressed breast milk every hour (risk of hypoglycaemia).
Neutralisation of toxin

human tetanus immunoglobulin IM
Newborns, children and adults: 500 IU as a single dose, injected into 2 separate sites

Inhibition of toxin production

The treatment of choice is metronidazole IV for 7 days1 (administered over 60 min in newborns): Newborns: one dose of 15 mg/kg then, after 24 hours, 7.5 mg/kg every 12 hours
Children: 7.5 mg/kg every 8 hours
Adults: 500 mg every 8 hours
Control of rigidity and spasms, and sedation of the patient
Due to increased risk of respiratory depression/arrest when using high doses of diazepam, the patient must always be kept under constant close observation, with immediate availability of equipment required for intubation and manual ventilation. The dose and frequency of administration depend on the patient’s clinical response and tolerance (monitor respiratory rate or oxygen saturation).

diazepam

For IV as well as for intra-rectal administration2, dilute 2 ml of diazepam (10 mg) in
8 ml of 5% glucose or 0.9% sodium chloride.
Children: 0.1 to 0.3 mg/kg by slow IV injection (over 3 to 5 minutes) or 0.5 mg/kg by rectal route, without exceeding 10 mg per dose, to be repeated every 1 to 4 hours
Adults: 10 mg by slow IV or intra-rectal route
1 Benzylpenicillin IV for 10 to 14 days may be an alternative (second choice):

Newborns: 80,000 IU/kg/day (50 mg/kg/day) in 2 injections every 12 hours
Infants: 125,000 IU/kg/day (75 mg/kg/day) in 3 injections every 8 hours
Children: 200,000 to 400,000 IU/kg/day (120 to 240 mg/kg/day) in 4 injections every 6 hours
Adults: 10 MIU/day (6 g/day) in 4 injections every 6 hours
Change to the oral route when possible with phenoxymethylpenicillin (penicillin V) by nasogastric tube.
Children: 62.5 mg/kg/day in 4 doses; adults: 2 g/day in 4 doses.
2 For rectal administration, use a syringe without needle or cut a nasogastric tube, CH8, to a length of 2-3 cm and attach it to the tip of the syringe.
171

7

Tetanus

In the case of severe spasms not controlled by intermittent dosing, diazepam may be administered by continuous IV infusion (except in infants less than 1 month), under constant close observation.
Children over 1 month and adults: 3 to 10 mg/kg/day, the dose is to be adjusted according to clinical response.
Control of pain
In early stage, if necessary; the risk of respiratory depression is increased, thus closer monitoring is required: morphine slow IV (5 minutes)
Newborns: 0.05 mg/kg every 6 hours if needed
Children from 1 to 6 months: 0.1 mg/kg every 6 hours if needed
Children over 6 months and adults: 0.1 mg/kg every 4 hours if needed
Treatment of the entry site
A systematic search should be made for the entry wound. Provide local treatment under sedation: cleansing, and for deep wounds, irrigation, debridement.
Cord infection: do not excise or debride; treat bacterial omphalitis.
Tetanus vaccination
As tetanus does not confer immunity, vaccination against tetanus must be administered once the patient has recovered.
In case of neonatal tetanus, initiate the vaccination of the mother.

Prevention
Of critical importance, given the difficulty of treating tetanus once established.

1) Post-exposure prophylaxis
– In all cases:
• Cleansing and disinfection of the wound, and elimination of foreign material.
• Antibiotics are not prescribed routinely for prophylaxis. The decision to administer an antibiotic (metronidazole or penicillin) is made on a case-by-case basis, according to the patient’s clinical status.
– Depending on pre-exposure vaccination status:
• tetanus vaccine (TV)3 and immunoglobulin: see indications below.
Complete vaccination (3 or more doses)
Risk

Incomplete vaccination
(less than 3 doses)
Time since administration of latest dose:
< 5 years
5-10 years
> 10 years or no vaccination or unknown status

Minor clean wound None

None

All other wounds None

TV one booster dose TV one booster Initiate or complete TV dose TV
Initiate or complete TV one booster and dose Administer tetanus immunoglobulin

3 Tetanus-containing vaccine, such as TT or DT or dT or DTP or DTP + HepB or DTP + Hib + HepB according to

availability and patient’s age.

172

7. Bacterial diseases tetanus vaccine IM
Children and adults: 0.5 ml/injection
With no vaccination or unknown vaccination status: administer at least 2 doses at an interval of 4 weeks.
With incomplete vaccination: administer one dose.
Then, to ensure long-lasting protection, administer additional doses to complete the total 5 doses, as indicated in the table below. human anti-tetanus immunoglobulin IM

Children and adults: 250 IU as a single dose; 500 IU for wounds more than 24 hours old. Inject the vaccine and the immunoglobulin in 2 different sites, using a separate syringe for each.

2) Routine vaccination (pre-exposure prophylaxis)
– Children: 5 doses in total: a first series of 3 doses of DTP or DTP + HepB or DTP +
Hib + HepB before the age of 1 year, administered at an interval of 1 month (e.g. at the age of 6, 10 and 14 weeks), then a 4th dose of a vaccine containing tetanus toxoid between the ages of 4 to 7 years, then a 5th dose between 12 and 15 years.
– Women of childbearing age: 5 doses during the reproductive years: a series of 3 doses
(dT or TT) with an interval of at least one month between the 1st and 2nd dose and an interval of at least 6 months between the 2nd and 3rd dose, then two other doses, each at minimum interval of one year, e.g. during pregnancies (see table below).
– Pregnant women: if a woman has never been vaccinated or if her vaccination status is unknown: 2 doses of dT or TT during the pregnancy to reduce the risk of tetanus in mother and newborn: the first as soon as possible during the pregnancy and the second at least 4 weeks later and at least 2 weeks before delivery. This vaccination regime protects more than 80% of newborns from neonatal tetanus. A single dose offers no protection. Continue vaccination after delivery to complete 5 doses, as for women of childbearing age.
Dose

Vaccination schedule in adults

Degree and duration of protection

TV1

On first contact with the health care system or as soon as possible during pregnancy

TV2

At least 4 weeks after TV1

TV3

6 months to 1 year after TV2 or during the following pregnancy

95%
5 years

TV4

1 to 5 years after TV3 or during the following pregnancy

99%
10 years

TV5

1 to 10 years after TV4 or during the following pregnancy

99%
Throughout the reproductive years

No protection
80%
1 to 3 years

3) Other measures
Appropriate hygiene during delivery, including home birth.

173

7

Typhoid fever

Typhoid fever
– Systemic infection due to Salmonella typhi. The organism enters the body via the gastrointestinal tract and gains access to the bloodstream via the lymphatic system.
– Typhoid fever is acquired by ingestion of contaminated water and food or by direct contact (dirty hands).

Clinical features
– Sustained fever (lasting more than one week), headache, asthenia, insomnia, anorexia, epistaxis.
– Abdominal pain or tenderness, diarrhoea or constipation, gurgles.
– Toxic confusional state, prostration.
– Moderate splenomegaly, relative bradycardia (normal pulse despite fever).
– Differential diagnosis may be difficult as symptoms resemble those of lower respiratory tract infections, urinary infections, and malaria or dengue fever in endemic areas.
– Complications can occur during the active phase or during convalescence (even during treatment): intestinal perforation or haemorrhage, peritonitis, myocarditis, encephalitis, coma.

Laboratory
– Relative leukopenia (normal white blood cell count despite septicaemia).
– Isolation of S. typhi from blood cultures (take at least 10 ml of blood) and stool cultures during the first 2 weeks.
– Widal's agglutination reaction is not used (both sensitivity and specificity are poor).

Treatment (at

hospital level)

– Isolate the patient.
– Keep under close surveillance, hydrate, treat fever (see Fever, page 26).
– Antibiotic therapy: case-fatality rates of 10% can be reduced to less than 1% with early antibiotic treatment based on the findings of blood cultures. The oral route is more effective than the parenteral route. If the patient cannot take oral treatment, start by injectable route and change to oral route as soon as possible.
Antibiotic treatment (except during pregnancy or breast-feeding)

• The treatment of choice is: ciprofloxacin PO for 5 to 7 days
Children: 30 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses (usually not recommended in children under 15 years, however, the life-threatening risk of typhoid outweighs the risk of adverse effects)
Adults: 1 g/day in 2 divided doses
174

7. Bacterial diseases cefixime PO for 7 days may be an alternative to ciprofloxacine in children under
15 years:
Children over 3 months: 15 to 20 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses

Failing that, and in the absence of resistance: for 14 days
Children: 75 to 100 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses
Adults: 3 g/day in 3 divided doses or chloramphenicol PO for 10 to 14 days depending on severity
Children: 100 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses
Adults: 3 g/day in 3 divided doses amoxicillin PO

• S. typhi is rapidly developing resistance to quinolones. In this event, use: ceftriaxone IM or IV1 for 10 to 14 days depending on severity
Children: 75 mg/kg once daily
Adults: 2 to 4 g once daily
Antibiotic treatment in pregnant or breast-feeding women
In pregnant women, typhoid carries a major risk of maternal complications (intestinal perforation, peritonitis, septicaemia) and foetal complications (miscarriage, premature delivery, intrauterine death).
• In the absence of resistance: amoxicillin PO: 3 g/day in 3 divided doses for 14 days
• If resistance: ceftriaxone IM or IV1: 2 to 4 g once daily for 10 to 14 days depending on severity
Failing that, use ciprofloxacin PO (usually not recommended for pregnant or breastfeeding women. However, the life-threatening risk of typhoid outweighs the risk of adverse effects). For dosage, see above.
Note: fever persists for 4 to 5 days after the start of treatment, even if the antibiotic is effective. It is essential to treat the fever and to check for possible maternal or foetal complications. – In patients presenting severe typhoid, with toxic confusional state (hallucinations, altered consciousness) or intestinal haemorrhage: dexamethasone IV: loading dose 3 mg/kg and then 1 mg/kg every 6 hours for 2 days

Prevention
– Disinfection of faeces with 2% chlorine solution.
– Individual (hand washing) and collective hygiene (safe water supply, sanitation).
– The possibility of vaccination must be considered: it can be useful in some situations
(high-risk age group, hyperendemic zone), but its effectiveness remains controversial.

1 The solvent of ceftriaxone for IM injection contains lidocaine. Ceftriaxone reconstituted using this solvent must
NEVER

be administered by IV route. For IV administration, water for injection must always be used.

175

7

Brucellosis

Brucellosis
– A zoonosis that mainly affects domestic animals. It is occasionally transmitted to man by ingestion of infected raw milk, or by contact (with infected animals or with soiled objects through abrasion on the skin). Human-to-human transmission is rare.
– Brucellosis is caused by Gram-negative bacilli of the genus Brucella: B. melitensis
(sheep and goats), B. abortus (cattle), B. suis (pigs) and less commonly, B. canis and
B. ovis.
– The disease is found worldwide and mainly in rural areas. The true incidence of brucellosis in tropical countries is probably underestimated as it is often undiagnosed. Clinical features
The clinical signs and associated symptoms are fluctuating and non specific. Diagnosis is difficult because of the broad spectrum of clinical manifestations.
Acute form
– Common form: gradual onset over one to 2 weeks: undulant fever (up to 39-40°C) lasting 10 to 15 days, night sweats, chills, asthenia, joint and muscle pain. Possible sacroileitis, arthritis (knee) and orchitis.
In regions where malaria is endemic, the possibility of acute brucellosis should be considered when a high fever persists despite correct anti-malarial treatment.
– Other clinical forms:
• Typhoid-like form: sudden onset with signs of septicaemia; high fever, typhoid state, delirium, abdominal signs.
• Subacute form: mild, non-specific clinical signs that do not lead the patient to seek medical attention. Serum test positive.
Secondary brucellosis
Prolonged asthenia, focal signs:
– Bone and joint involvement: arthritis of the hip, sacroileitis, spondylitis with sciatalgia (pseudo-Pott's disease).
– Neurobrucellosis: pseudo-tuberculosis meningitis, meningoencephalitis; a complication at vertebral site involving peripheral nerves may cause motor and/or sensory disorders.
Chronic brucellosis
– General signs; physical and mental asthenia, sweating and polyalgia.
– Focal signs: slow developing bone, neuromeningeal or visceral foci.

Laboratory
– During the acute phase diagnosis can be confirmed by the detection of the pathogen in a blood culture.
– The Rose Bengal test (or card test) can identify specific antibodies. It is a quick, cheap and both specific and sensitive test for the diagnosis of acute and localized forms of brucellosis. 176

7. Bacterial diseases

– Other serological tests (Wright's test, ELISA, indirect immunfluorescence and
Coombs’test) cannot usually be done.

Treatment
Treatment is based on a combination of 2 antibiotics. Since streptomycin and rifampicin are also used in the treatment of tuberculosis, it is essential to rule out the possibility of active TB before starting treatment (patient history, clinical examination and chest X-ray if possible). Rifampicin must only be used when indicated below.
Acute form
– Children over 8 years and adults (except in pregnant or breast-feeding women): doxycycline PO
Children: 100 to 200 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses for 6 weeks
Adults: 200 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses for 6 weeks
+ streptomycin IM
Children: 15 mg/kg once daily for 2 weeks
Adults: 1 g once daily for 2 weeks
– Children under 8 years cotrimoxazole PO: 40 mg SMX + 8 mg TMP/kg/day in 2 divided doses for 6 weeks
+ gentamicin IM: 7.5 mg/kg once daily or in 2 divided doses for 2 weeks or rifampicin PO: 15 mg/kg once daily for 6 weeks
– Pregnant or breast-feeding women cotrimoxazole PO: 1600 mg SMX + 320 mg TMP/day in 2 divided doses for 6 weeks
+ rifampicin PO: 600 mg once daily for 6 weeks
Note:
In pregnant women, the combination of cotrimoxazole + rifampicin can be administered regardless of the stage of pregnancy if treatment is indispensable.
Administration of vitamin K is recommended to prevent neonatal and maternal haemorrhage. phytomenadione (vial containing 10 mg/ml, 1 ml):
To the mother: 10 mg/day PO for the 15 days preceding the expected date of delivery
To the newborn: 2 mg PO as a single dose at birth and again after 4 to 7 days
Focal brucellosis
– Same treatment regimen as for the acute form, but for a period of 6 weeks to
3 months depending on severity. Surgical draining of an abscess of the liver or spleen may be indicated.
– Neurobrucellosis or endocarditis: combination of rifampicin + doxycycline + gentamicin.
Antibiotic treatment is not effective in the context of chronic, non-focal brucellosis.

Prevention
– Washing of hands and clothing if in contact with animals.
– Boil milk and avoid eating raw cheese and undercooked meat.

177

7

Plague

Plague
– A zoonosis caused by the Gram-negative bacillus Yersinia pestis that mainly affects wild and domestic rodents.
– Plague is transmitted to man by the bite of an infected flea vector or through a break in the skin by contact with a rodent. Human-to-human transmission occurs through the bites of human fleas, or, in the case of pneumonic plague, by inhaling infected droplets expelled by coughing.
– Vast foci of infection remain in Central and Southeast Asia, Africa, Madagascar, and in North and South America.

Clinical features and progress
There are 3 main clinical forms:
– Bubonic plague is the most common form: high fever, chills, headache, associated with one (or more) very painful lymph node, usually inguinal (bubo). Frequent gastrointestinal signs: abdominal pain, vomiting, diarrhoea, etc. The mortality rate in untreated patients is approximately 50% as a result of septicaemia.
– Septicaemic plague is a complication of untreated bubonic plague and is a fulminant illness. – Pneumonic plague is a very contagious form: high fever, chills, headache, myalgia associated with paroxysmal coughing, haemoptysis and respiratory distress. This form progresses rapidly, and is fatal unless treated. It occurs either as a complication of bubonic plague or as the result of a primary infection.
Occasionally, the disease can take the form of meningitic plague.

Laboratory
– Isolation of Y. pestis (direct examination and culture) from lymph node aspirate, blood, sputum, cerebrospinal fluid, depending on the form involved.
– Serodiagnosis: ELISA reads positive soon after the onset of the illness.
– Transportation of the samples requires a cold chain (failing that, the temperature must be kept below 30°C).

Management and treatment
– When plague is suspected: take samples for cultures and antibiotic sensitivity testing and then treat immediately without waiting for the diagnosis to be confirmed. Inform the health authorities as soon as the diagnosis has been confirmed.
– Isolation:
• Patients suffering from bubonic plague do not have to be isolated. Treat the patient and his/her bedding and clothing with an insecticide (e.g. permethrin 0.5% powder; see Pediculoses, page 101). Observe elementary rules of hygiene (wash hands, wear gowns, gloves etc.).
• Patients with primary or secondary pneumonic plague must be strictly isolated.
Their bedding, clothing, sputum and excreta must be disinfected with a chlorinated solution. Observe elementary rules of hygiene (wash hands, wear hospital lab coats, gloves etc.) and both the patient and carers should wear facemasks.
178

7. Bacterial diseases

– Treatment of suspected or confirmed cases
If treatment is begun early, recovery is rapid and complete. Penicillins, cephalosporins and macrolides should not be used.
Aminoglycosides, tetracyclines, chloramphenicol and sulphonamides are effective.
Follow national recommendations. For information: streptomycin IM for 10 days
Children: 30 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses given at 12 hour-intervals
Adults: 2 g/day in 2 divided doses given at 12 hour-intervals gentamicin IM for 10 days
Neonates and children under one year: 7.5 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses
Children over one year: 6 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses
Adults: 3 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses doxycycline PO for 10 days
Children over 8 years and adults: 200 mg/day, once daily or in 2 divided doses chloramphenicol PO or IV for 10 days
Children over one year and adults: 50 mg/kg/day in 4 divided doses given at
6 hour-intervals
Choice of antibiotics
Indications

First choice

Alternative

Bubonic plague

doxycycline

chloramphenicol or streptomycin

Pneumonic plague

streptomycin

–

Septicaemic plague

streptomycin

chloramphenicol

Meningitic plague

chloramphenicol

–

gentamicin

–

Pregnant or breast-feeding women 7

Note: in order to prevent the emergence of resistance to streptomycin which is used in the treatment of tuberculosis, it is preferable to use doxycycline or chloramphenicol for the treatment of bubonic plague.
– Chemoprophylaxis of contacts
In the event of contact, and within one week after the end of exposure: throughout the period of contact (minimum 5 days of treatment)
Children over 8 years and adults: 100 to 200 mg/day, once daily or in 2 divided doses or co-trimoxazole PO throughout the period of contact (minimum 5 days of treatment)
Children: 40 mg SMX + 8 mg TMP/kg/day in 2 divided doses
Adults: 1600 mg SMX + 320 mg TMP/day in 2 divided doses doxycycline PO

Prevention
– Flea vector control is essential to controlling an epidemic.
– Long-term prevention: environmental sanitation and control of rodent reservoir.
– Vaccination against plague is only indicated for people with a high risk of exposure
(laboratory technicians handling rodents) and can in no circumstances be used as a method for controlling an epidemic.

179

Leptospirosis

Leptospirosis
– A zoonosis caused by spirochetes of the genus Leptospira, affecting many domestic and wild animals (particularly rodents and principally rats).
– Leptospirosis is acquired by indirect contact (contact of the skin or mucous membranes with animal urine-contaminated water, e.g. when swimming) and less commonly, by direct contact with infected animals.

Clinical features
Diagnosis is difficult because of the broad spectrum of clinical manifestations. A distinction is usually made between the mild form (the most common, usually with a favourable outcome) and the severe form (multiple organ dysfunction syndrome).
– Mild form
• After an incubation period of one to 3 weeks: influenza-like illness (high fever, chills, headache, myalgias), often combined with gastrointestinal disorders
(anorexia, abdominal pain, nausea, vomiting) and possible pulmonary signs
(cough, chest pain). Other signs: conjunctival haemorrhage, hepatosplenomegaly, and multiple adenopathies. Mild jaundice may be present, but this form is usually anicteric. • The signs regress after 5 to 6 days, and then reappear, sometimes with meningeal invasion, which may be complicated by encephalitis or myelitis.
– Severe form or Weil's syndrome
The onset of the disease is the same as in mild form. After a few days, acute hepatorenal manifestations with fever, jaundice, oligo-anuric renal failure; diffuse haemorrhagic syndrome (purpura, ecchymoses, epistaxis etc.), pulmonary signs
(cough, chest pain, haemoptysis) and cardiac signs (myocarditis, pericarditis).
Temperature chart and progress of leptospirosis
Temperature
40°
Azotemia
Jaundice
37°
5
1
Presence of leptospires
In the blood
In the CSF
In the urine

Presence of antibodies

180

10

15

20

days

7. Bacterial diseases

Laboratory
– Isolation through culture of leptospires from blood, cerebrospinal fluid (during the first phase) or urine (during the second phase).
– Serodiagnosis: immunofluorescence or ELISA (antibodies are detected from Day 8).
– Blood cell count: polymorphonuclear leukocytosis.
– If meningeal syndrome: lumbar puncture yields a clear fluid, usually with raised leucocyte count and elevated protein level (about 1 g/litre).
– Urine: proteinuria, leukocyturia, possible haematuria and presence of casts.

Treatment

– Rest and treatment of fever: paracetamol PO (see Fever, page 26).
Acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin) is contraindicated (risk of haemorrhage).
– Antibiotic treatment should be started as soon as possible:
• Moderate form amoxicillin PO
Children: 50 mg/kg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 7 days
Adults: 2 g/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 7 days or doxycycline PO (except in pregnant or breast-feeding women and children under
8 years)
Children over 8 years: 100 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 7 days
Adults: 200 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 7 days or erythromycin PO
Children: 50 mg/kg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 7 days
Adults: 2 to 3 g/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 7 days
• Severe form ampicillin IV
Children: 100 mg/kg/day in 3 injections
Adults: 4 to 6 g/day in 3 injections
Switch to the oral route as soon as possible, with amoxicillin to complete 7 days of treatment. or erythromycin IV
Children: 50 mg/kg/day in 3 or 4 injections
Adults: 2 g/day in 4 injections
Switch to the oral route as soon as possible to complete 7 days of treatment.

Prevention
– Avoid bathing in endemic areas.
– Rodent control, environmental sanitation (particularly water).
– Vaccination is restricted to personnel exposed in the course of their work.

181

7

Relapsing fever (borreliosis)

Relapsing fever (borreliosis)
Relapsing fever (FR) is caused by spirochetes of the genus Borrelia, transmitted to humans by arthropod vectors.

Louse-borne relapsing fever (LBRF)
LBRF is caused by Borrelia recurrentis. It occurs in epidemic waves when conditions favourable to the transmission of body lice are met: cold climate/season, overcrowding and very poor sanitation (e.g. refugee camps, prisons). Endemic foci of LBRF are mainly the Sudan and the Horn of Africa (especially Ethiopia). LBRF can be associated with louse-borne typhus (see page 185). The mortality rate for untreated LBRF ranges from
15 to 40%.

Clinical features
– Relapsing fever is characterized by febrile episodes separated by afebrile periods of approximately 7 days (4 to 14 days).
– The initial febrile episode lasts up to 6 days:
• Sudden onset of high fever (> 39°C), severe headache and asthenia, diffuse pain
(muscle, joint, back pain), often associated with gastrointestinal disturbances
(anorexia, abdominal pain, vomiting, diarrhoea).
• Splenomegaly is common; bleeding signs (e.g. petechiae, subconjunctival haemorrhage, epistaxis, bleeding gums), jaundice or neurological symptoms may be observed.
• The febrile episode terminates in a crisis with an elevation in temperature, pulse and blood pressure, followed by a fall in temperature and blood pressure, which may last for several hours.
– Following the initial febrile episode, the cycle usually reccurs; each episode is less severe than the previous one and the patient develops temporary immunity.
– Complications:
• collapse during defervescence, myocarditis, cerebral haemorrhage;
• during pregnancy: abortion, preterm delivery, in utero foetal death, neonatal death.
In practice, in an applicable epidemiological setting (see above), a suspect case of LBRF is, according to the WHO, a patient with high fever and two of the following symptoms: severe joint pain, chills, jaundice or signs of bleeding (nose or other bleeding) or a patient with high fever who is responding poorly to antimalarial drugs. Clothing should be checked for the presence of body lice and nits.

182

7. Bacterial diseases

Laboratory
The diagnosis is confirmed by detection of Borrelia in thick or thin blood films (Giemsa stain). Blood samples must be collected during febrile periods. Spirochetes are not found in the peripheral blood during afebrile periods. In addition, the number of circulating spirochetes tends to decrease with each febrile episode.

Treatment
– Antibiotic therapy (suspect or confirmed cases and close contacts): doxycycline PO1
Children: 100 mg as a single dose
Adults: 100 or 200 mg as a single dose or erythromycin PO
Children ≤ 5 years: 250 mg as a single dose
Children > 5 years and adults: 500 mg as a single dose
– Treatment of pain and fever (paracetamol PO) and prevention or treatment of dehydration in the event of associated diarrhoea.
– Elimination of body lice is essential in control of epidemics (see page 101).

Tick-borne relapsing fever (TBRF)
TBRFs are caused by different Borrelia species. They are endemic in temperate and warm regions of the word, especially in Africa (Tanzania, DRC, Senegal, Mauritania,
Mali, the Horn of Africa) and mainly in rural areas. TBRF is a major cause of morbidity and mortality in children and pregnant women. The mortality rate for untreated TBRF ranges from 2 to 15%.

Clinical features
The clinical manifestations and complications of TBRF are similar to those of LBRF but neurological symptoms (particularly, cranial nerve palsies and lymphocytic meningitis) are more frequent than in LBRF and the number of relapses is higher.
The clinical diagnosis is difficult, especially during the first episode: cases occur sporadically rather than in outbreaks; the tick bite is painless and usually unnoticed by the patient; symptoms are very similar to those of malaria, typhoid fever, leptospirosis, certain arbovirosis (yellow fever, dengue) or rickettsiosis, and meningitis. 1 Doxycycline is usually contra-indicated in children under 8 years and pregnant women. However, if

erythromycin is not available, it may be used for the treatment of LBRF, the administration of a single dose should not cause any adverse effects

183

7

Relapsing fever (borreliosis)

Laboratory
– As for LBRF, the diagnosis is confirmed by detection of Borrelia in the patient’s blood.
– Repeat the examination if the first smear is negative despite strong clinical suspicion.

Treatment
– Antibiotic therapy: doxycycline PO
Children over 8 years: 100 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 5 days
Adults (except pregnant women): 200 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 5 days or erythromycin PO
Children under 8 years: 50 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses for 5 days
Pregnant women: 2 g/day in 2 divided doses for 5 days
– Treatment of pain and fever (paracetamol PO) and prevention or treatment of dehydration in the event of associated diarrhoea.
Antibiotic therapy can trigger a Jarisch-Herxheimer reaction with high fever, chills, fall in blood pressure and sometimes shock. It is recommended to monitor the patient for 2 hours after the first dose of antibiotic, for occurrence and management of severe Jarisch-Herxheimer reaction (symptomatic treatment of shock). Jarisch-Herxheimer reaction appears to occur more frequently in LBRF than in TBRF.

184

7. Bacterial diseases

Eruptive rickettsioses
Eruptive fevers caused by bacteria of the genus Rickettsia and transmitted to man by an arthropod vector. Three main groups are distinguished: typhus group, spotted fever group and scrub typhus group.

Clinical features: see next page
Laboratory
Detection of specific IgM of each group by indirect immunofluorescence. The diagnosis is confirmed by 2 serological tests at an interval of 10 days. In practice, clinical signs and the epidemiological context are sufficient to suggest the diagnosis and start treatment.

Treatment
– Symptomatic treatment:
• Hydration (PO or IV if the patient is unable to drink)
• Fever: paracetamol PO (see Fever, page 26). Acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin) is contraindicated due to the risk of haemorrhage.
– Antibiotherapy1 for 7 days or until 2 days after the fever has disappeared: doxycycline PO (except in children under 8 years and pregnant or breast-feeding women): Children over 8 years: 100 to 200 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses
Adults: 200 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses or chloramphenicol PO (except in pregnant or breast-feeding women)
Children: 50 to 75 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses
Adults: 2 g/day in 3 divided doses
– In pregnant or breast-feeding women: josamycin PO2: 3 g/day in 3 divided doses for 8 days

– In a context of epidemic typhus, doxycycline PO 200 mg as a single dose is the choice treatment, but there is a risk of recurrence.
Note: doxycycline is usually contraindicated in children under 8 years and in pregnant or breast-feeding women. However, the administration of a single dose should not, in theory, provoke adverse effects. Check national recommendations.

Prevention
–
–
–
–

Epidemic typhus: control of body lice (page 101).
Murine typhus: control of fleas and then rats.
Spotted fevers: avoid tick bites by wearing clothing and using repellents.
Scrub typhus: use of repellents, chemoprophylaxis with doxycycline PO (200 mg once weekly in adults).

1 Unlike borrelioses, antibiotic treatment of rickettsioses does not provoke a Jarisch-Herxheimer reaction.

However, the geographical distribution of borrelioses and rickettsioses may overlap, and thus a reaction may occur due to a possible co-infection (see Borrelioses, page 182).
2 Only some macrolides can be used. Erythromycin is not effective.
185

7

186 maculopapular 0
+++
gastrointestinal signs maculopapular

0

+++

cough, myalgia meningeal signs

Rash

Eschar

2

meningeal signs

+/-

black necrotic area

maculopapular

around the mediterranean, Sub-Saharan Africa

1

variable

gastrointestinal and neurological signs, hypotension 5

+ /-

black necrotic area

maculopapular

Southern Africa,
Australia, Siberia

endemic

rodents, dogs, etc.

ticks

R. sibirica, R. australis

Other Old-World tick-borne fevers

+/-

rare

purpural

North America,
Central America,
Columbia, Brazil

endemic

rodents

ticks

R. rickettsii

Rocky Mountain spotted fever

Spotted fever

0-30

meningeal signs

+++

black necrotic area

macular

Far-east, India,
South Pacific

sporadic

rodents

mites

O. tsutsugamushi

Scrub typhus

Scrub typhus

– Complications can be severe, and sometimes fatal: encephalitis, myocarditis, hepatitis, acute renal failure, haemorrhage etc.

Case fatality (%) 30 (without treatment)

Extra-cutaneous signs Typhoid state

5

worldwide

Geographical distribution worldwide, conflicts; main sites
Burundi/Rwanda,
Ethiopia

endemic

endemic

epidemic

Occurence

dogs

rats

man

ticks

rat fleas

body lice

R. conorii

R. typhi

R. prowasekii

Mediterranean spotted fever

Murine typhus

Epidemic typhus

Typhus

Reservoir

Vector

Pathogen

Form

Group

– Common to all forms:
• Sudden onset of fever (temperature of over 39°C) with severe headache and myalgias.
• 3 to 5 days later; onset of generalised cutaneous eruption (see below).
• Hypotension; non-dissociated rapid pulse (variable).
• Typhoid state: prostration, omnubilation, confusion and extreme asthenia, particularly marked in typhus forms.
• Inoculation eschar: painless, black crusted lesion surrounded by a erythematous halo at the site of the bite. Always check for this significant sign.
• Non-cutaneous signs vary from one form to another, and are atypical and variable (see below).

Clinical features

Eruptive rickettsioses

CHAPTER 8

Viral diseases
Measles

189

Poliomyelitis

192

Rabies

194

Viral hepatitis

198

Dengue fever

201

Viral haemorrhagic fevers

204

HIV infection and AIDS

207

8

8. Viral diseases

Measles
Measles is a highly contagious acute viral infection, transmitted by the airborne route
(inhalation of respiratory droplets spread by infected individuals). In developing countries, the disease mainly affects children between 1 and 3 years of age. Measles can be prevented by immunization.
For more information, refer to the MSF handbook Management of a measles epidemic.

Clinical features
– The incubation period ranges from 10 to 12 days.
– Prodomal or catarrhal phase (2 to 4 days)
• High fever (39-40°C), dry cough, coryza (nasal discharge) and/or conjunctivitis
(red and watery eyes)
• Koplik’s spots: small, red, spots with a blue-white centre on the inner surface of the cheeks. This sign is pathognomonic of measles but can be difficult to identify or may be absent at the time of examination.
– Eruptive phase (5 to 6 days)
• On average 3 days after the onset of symptoms, eruption of erythematous, nonpruritic maculopapules, which blanch with pressure. The rash begins on the forehead then spreads downward to the face, neck, trunk (2nd day), abdomen and lower limbs (3rd and 4th day).
• As the rash progresses, catarrhal symptoms subside. In the absence of complications, the fever disappears once the rash reaches the feet.
• The rash fades around the 5th day in the same order that it appeared (descending from the head to the feet).
– The eruptive phase is followed by skin desquamation during 1 to 2 weeks, very pronounced on pigmented skin: the skin develops a striped appearance.
In practice, a patient presenting with fever and erythematous maculopapular rash and at least one of the following signs: cough or coryza or conjunctivitis, is a clinical case of measles. Complications
Complications are common and should be systematically sought:
– Respiratory and ENT: pneumonia, otitis media, laryngotracheobronchitis
– Ophthalmic: purulent conjunctivitis, keratitis, xerophthalmia (risk of blindness)
– Gastrointestinal: diarrhoea, stomatitis
– Acute malnutrition, provoked or aggravated by measles
– Neurological: febrile seizures; rarely: encephalitis (1 case/1000)
Among these complications, pneumonia and dehydration due to diarrhoea are the most common immediate causes of death.

189

8

Measles

Case management and treatment
– Criteria for hospitalisation:
• Inability to eat/drink/suck, or vomiting
• Seizures or altered consciousness
• Severe acute laryngotracheobronchitis (croup)
• Severe respiratory infection
• Diarrhoea with dehydration
• Acute malnutrition
• Corneal damage (pain, photophobia, opacity)
Treatment takes place on an outpatient basis for patients with none of these criteria.
– Isolation
Patients are contagious from one day before the prodromal period to 4-5 days after the onset of rash:
• Triage of suspect measles cases in the waiting room
• Measles cases treated as out-patients should be kept at home during this period
• Isolation of hospitalised patients
– Treatment
• Treatment of fever in all cases (paracetamol PO, page XX).
• Routine prevention of complications or treatment of complications if present:

Complications

Prevention

Treatment

Respiratory and Nasal irrigation with 0.9% sodium – Acute pneumonia, page 66
ENT
chloride
– Acute otitis media, page 57
+ amoxicillin PO:
– Acute laryngitis, page 51
80 to 100 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses for 5 days
Ophthalmic

Gastrointestinal

Clean the eyes with clean water
– Purulent conjunctivitis or keratitis, twice daily page 123
+ retinol (vitamin A) PO1:
– Xerophthalmia, page 121
Children < 6 months:
50,000 IU once daily on D1 and D2
Children 6 to 12 months:
100,000 IU once daily on D1 and D2
Children > 1 year:
200,000 IU once daily on D1 and D2
– Oral candidiasis, page 92
– Mouth ulcers: apply 0.5% gentian violet.
If deep or malodorous ulcers, add: amoxicillin PO:
80 to 100 mg/kg/day in 2 doses
+ metronidazole PO:
20 to 30 mg/kg/day in 3 doses for
5 days

1 Retinol reduces the overall risk of severe complications and death.

190

8. Viral diseases

Complications

Prevention

Treatment

Dehydration

Ensure the child drinks.
WHO Plan A in the event of diarrhoea without dehydration
(page 306).

WHO Plan B or C depending on the severity of dehydration (pages 308 to
311).

Malnutrition

Increase the quantity or frequency – Inability to eat/drink/suck: nasogastric of feedings; small frequent meals tube for the shortest period possible.
(every 2-3 hours); emphasis on
– Acute malnutrition: therapeutic manahighly nutritious foods during gement of malnutrition. illness and convalescence.

Febrile seizures

Treatment of fever (paracetamol); tepid sponging if necessary.

– Seizures, page 23

Prevention
– No chemoprophylaxis for contacts.
– Vaccination:
High vaccine coverage (> 90%) significantly reduces the incidence of measles and the risk of epidemics.
• Routine vaccination (EPI): one dose of 0.5 ml by deep SC or IM injection at
9 months of age.
• In situations where there is high risk of infection (overcrowding, epidemics, malnutrition, infants born to a mother with HIV infection, etc.): administer one dose at 6 months of age (between 6 and 8 months) and one dose at 9 months of age
(with an interval of at least 4 weeks between injections).

191

8

Poliomyelitis

Poliomyelitis
– Poliomyelitis is an acute viral infection due to a poliovirus (serotypes 1, 2 and 3).
Human-to-human transmission is direct (faecal-oral) or indirect (ingestion of food and water contaminated by stool). Humans are the only reservoir of the virus. In principle the disease can be eradicated by mass vaccination with oral polio vaccine
(OPV).
– In endemic areas, epidemics usually affect children under 5 years of age. In nonendemic areas, where vaccination coverage is low, young adults are most commonly affected. Clinical features
– In more than 90% of cases, infection is asymptomatic.
– Non-paralytic form: a non-specific febrile illness with muscle pain, headache, vomiting, backache; no neurological involvement.
As spontaneous recovery usually occurs within 10 days, diagnosis is rarely made outside epidemic contexts.
– Paralytic form: in less than 1% of cases, after the non-specific signs, the patient develops rapid onset (from the morning to the evening) asymmetrical acute flaccid paralysis, predominantly of the lower limbs, with ascending progression. The muscles become soft with diminished reflexes. Sensation is maintained. The disease is life threatening if paralysis involves the respiratory muscles or muscles of swallowing. Initial urinary retention is common. Gastrointestinal disturbances
(nausea, vomiting, diarrhoea), muscle pain and meningeal symptoms may also occur.

Laboratory
Look for the polio virus in stool samples. The virus is excreted for one month after infection, but only intermittently; therefore, 2 samples must be collected with an interval of 48 hours.

Treatment
– Hospitalise patients with the paralytic form: rest, prevent bed sores in bedridden patients, give analgesics (do not give IM injections to patients in the febrile phase), ventilate patients with respiratory paralysis.
– Physiotherapy once the lesions are stable to prevent muscle atrophy and contractures. – Care for sequelae: physiotherapy, surgery and prosthetics.

192

8. Viral diseases

Patients with acute flaccid paralysis (AFP)
– Consider all patients with AFP as suspected cases of poliomyelitis.
– Confirm the diagnosis by isolating the virus: send the 2 stool samples to a reference laboratory, with a clinical description of the patient. The stool samples must be stored and transported between 0°C and 8°C.
– While waiting for laboratory confirmation, vaccinate all children under 5 years of age living in the area (from the same village or neighbouring villages), irrespective of their vaccination status.
– Once the case is confirmed, organize a mass vaccination campaign: the area and the age group are determined as a function of epidemiological data.
– Surveillance: for each case of AFP there are between 100 and 200 subclinical cases.
Therefore, active surveillance to detect new cases is essential for epidemic control.

Prevention
– 2 types of vaccines exist:
• an injectable inactivated poliovirus vaccine (IPV)
• a trivalent oral attenuated poliovirus vaccine (OPV)
In developing countries and during poliomyelitis eradication campaigns, the OPV is recommended for economic reasons, ease of administration and particularly for epidemiological reasons: it induces a rapid intestinal immunity (epidemic) and group protection due to its secondary diffusion into the natural environment
– Vaccination schedule with OPV
The WHO recommends 4 doses before 1 year of age:
Primary vaccination

Birth

OPV-1

10 weeks

OPV-2

14 weeks

8

OPV-0*

6 weeks

Booster doses

OPV-3

One year after the last dose and at the age of 6 years

* If the first dose (OPV-0) is not administered at birth, give the 4th dose a minimum of
1 month after the 3rd dose, for example at the same time as measles vaccination.

193

Rabies

Rabies
Rabies is a viral infection of wild and domestic mammals, transmitted to humans by the saliva of infected animals through bites, scratches or licks on broken skin or mucous membranes. Any mammal can transmit rabies, but the great majority of human cases are due to dog bites.
Once symptoms develop, rabies presents as a fatal encephalitis. There is no curative treatment; care is palliative.
Before symptomatic disease has developed, rabies can effectively be prevented by postexposure prophylaxis.

Clinical features
– The incubation period averages 20 to 90 days from exposure (75% of patients), but can be shorter (in severe exposure, i.e. bites to face, head and hands, multiple bites), or longer (20% of patients develop symptoms between 90 days and 1 year, and 5% more than 1 year after exposure).
– Prodromal phase: itching or paraesthesiae around the site of exposure, and nonspecific symptoms (malaise, fever, etc.).
– Neurologic phase:
• Furious form: psychomotor agitation or hydrophobia (throat spasms and panic, triggered by attempting to drink or sight/sound/touch of water) and aerophobia
(similar response to a draft of air); sometimes seizures. The patient is calm and lucid between episodes.
• Paralytic form (less common, 20% of cases): progressive ascending paralysis resembling Guillain-Barré syndrome.
Diagnosis is often difficult: there may be no history of scratch or bite (exposure through licking) or wounds may have healed; a reliable history may be difficult to obtain. Post-exposure prophylaxis
Risk of rabies virus infection: definition of exposure categories
(WHO)
Category I

Contact with animal, or licks on intact skin

No exposure

Category II

Nibbles on exposed skin
Minor bite(s) or scratch(es) without bleeding

Minor exposure

Category III

Transdermal bite(s) or scratch(es)
Licks on broken skin
Contamination of mucous membranes by animal’s saliva (licks)
Exposure to bat1

Severe exposure

Post-exposure prophylaxis is carried out for Category II and III exposures.
1 In the case of direct contact with bats, check national recommendations.

194

8. Viral diseases

Treatment of the wound
– In all cases
Prolonged cleansing of the wound or contact site to eliminate the virus, as soon as possible after exposure, is of critical importance. For skin: use soap, rinse copiously with running water, remove all foreign material; application of polyvidone iodine
10% or ethanol 70% is an additional precaution which does not take the place of wound washing. For mucous membranes (eye, mouth, etc.): rinse thoroughly with water or 0.9% sodium chloride. Local cleansing is indicated even if the patient presents late.
– According to condition/type of wound
In order to avoid inoculating virus deeper into the tissues, wounds are either not sutured at all (e.g. superficial, non-mutilating or puncture wounds), or are left open and re-evaluated in 48-72 hours, with a view to possible closure. Highly contaminated wounds, or wounds that may compromise function, require surgical management (exploration, removal of foreign material, excision of necrotic tissue, copious irrigation with 0.9% sodium chloride or Ringer lactate, with local or general anaesthesia). When suturing is unavoidable, rabies immune globulin should be administered several hours or days before wound closure (see below). Infected wounds are not sutured and reassessed daily.

Passive and active immunisation
Given the variable duration of incubation, administration of vaccine/immune globulin is an urgent priority, even for patients exposed several months previously.
– Administration of rabies immune globulin
Rabies immune globulin (RIG) is indicated for Category III exposures2, and Category
II and III exposures in immune-compromised patients.
RIG is intended to neutralize virus in the exposure site. It is given as a single dose on D0, with the first dose of rabies vaccine. Children and adults: human rabies immune globulin, 20 IU/kg, or highly purified equine immune globulin derivative F(ab’)2,
40 IU/kg.
Infiltrate as much of the dose as possible in and around the wounds(s)3. Inject any residual product, using the IM route, in a site remote from that used for vaccination. In the event of multiple wounds, dilute the dose 2- to 3-fold with sterile 0.9% sodium chloride to obtain a sufficient quantity to infiltrate all the sites exposed. If RIG is not available on D0, the first dose of rabies vaccine is administered alone. RIG can still be given as soon as possible within the next few days.
However, RIG is no longer recommended when 7 or more days have elapsed since the first dose of vaccine was given, as vaccine-induced immunity will have developed by this time.
2 Unless it can be established that the patient has been correctly vaccinated against rabies before exposure

(complete pre-exposure vaccination with 3 doses of a CCV).

3 Infiltrate RIG, even if the wound has healed. For finger wounds, infiltrate very cautiously to avoid causing a

compartment syndrome. When it is not possible to infiltrate the wound (mucous membranes), the entire dose is administered IM.
195

8

Rabies

– Post-exposure rabies vaccination
A complete rabies vaccination series is indicated for Category II and III exposures. It should be started on D0 and continued to completion if the risk of rabies has not been excluded4. Several different types of rabies vaccine are available. Vaccines prepared from cell culture (CCV), e.g. human diploid cells (HDCV), Vero cells (PVRV) or chick embryo cells (PCECV) must replace nerve tissue vaccines (NTV). There are several possible vaccination protocols: check and follow national recommendations. The shortest regimens among those endorsed by the WHO are shown as examples:
Post-exposure vaccination regimens
No pre-exposure vaccination or
Unknown vaccination status or
Incomplete pre-exposure vaccination or
Complete pre-exposure vaccination with a NTV
Intramuscular (IM)
2-0-1-1

Intradermal (ID)*
2-2-2-0-2

Complete pre-exposure vaccination with a CCV
IM or ID*
1-1

Administer in the deltoid
Use only PVRV or PCECV muscle (anterolateral thigh in vaccine children < 2 years), never in the gluteal muscle
One IM dose = 0.5 or 1 ml
(depending on the manufacturer) D0

One ID dose = 0.1 ml

2 doses
(one dose in each arm or thigh)

2 doses
(1 dose in each arm)

1 dose

2 doses
(1 dose in each arm)

1 dose

D3
D7

1 dose
(in the arm or thigh)

D21

One IM dose = 0.5 or
1 ml (depending on the manufacturer)
One ID dose = 0.1 ml

1 dose
(in the arm or thigh)

D28

2 doses
(1 dose in each arm)

2 doses
(1 dose in each arm)
+ RIG on Day 0, if indicated

No RIG

* Incorrect ID technique results in failure of PEP: if correct ID technique cannot be assured, use the IM regimen. 4 Either through observation of the captured animal (if domestic) or through laboratory diagnosis of the animal

(killed). The WHO recommends a 10-day observation period of the animal, if captured. If no signs of rabies develop during the observation period, the risk of rabies is excluded, and rabies vaccination is discontinued.
Laboratory diagnosis of the dead animal involves sending the head to a specialised laboratory, which confirms or excludes rabies in the animal. If laboratory diagnosis is negative, risk of rabies is excluded, and rabies vaccination is discontinued.

196

8. Viral diseases

Other measures
– Antibiotic therapy or prophylaxis
• A 7-day course of antibiotics is indicated for infected wounds (redness, oedema, purulent or serosanguinous drainage, localised cellulitis, lymphangitis, lymphadenopathy, fever). A longer treatment and/or the parenteral route may be indicated in severe infection.
• Antibiotic prophylaxis (5 to 7 days) is recommended for deep puncture wounds, wounds on the face or hands, wounds involving joints, tendons, ligaments or fractures; very contaminated wounds or those requiring debridement; in immunecompromised patients.
• Antibiotic prophylaxis is not recommended for superficial wounds or wounds more than 24-48 hours old in patients showing no local or general signs of infection. The same dosage is used for both treatment and prophylaxis: amoxicillin + clavulanic acid (co-amoxiclav) PO5 (dosage expressed in amoxicillin):
Children: 50 mg/kg in 3 divided doses; adults: 1.5 g/day in 3 divided doses
– Tetanus vaccination and immune globulin
Verify vaccination status. If unknown or not up-to-date, see page 170.

8

5 Co-amoxiclav is the antibiotic of choice. Doxycycline (200 mg/day in 2 divided doses) may be used in penicillin-

allergic patients, except in pregnant women and children < 8 years.

197

Viral hepatitis

Viral hepatitis
– Several viral infections of the liver are grouped under the heading of viral hepatitis: hepatitis A, B, C, ∆ (delta) and E.
– The different hepatitis viruses are present throughout the world, but their prevalence varies by country. Hepatitis A and B are common in developing countries where nearly the entire population is infected during childhood or adolescence.
– The clinical characteristics of all five diseases are similar enough to make differential diagnosis difficult; however, there are epidemiological, immunological and pathological differences. Patients with hepatitis B, C and ∆ may later develop chronic liver disease or even hepatocellular carcinoma.
– The main characteristics of each type of viral hepatitis are summarized in a table on the next page.

Clinical features
– Asymptomatic forms
Mild or anicteric forms are the most common, irrespective of the causal virus. The risk of developing later complications from hepatitis B, C and ∆ are the same as for symptomatic patients.
– Classic forms
Insidious or sudden onset with symptoms of varying intensity: fever, fatigue, nausea, gastrointestinal disturbance, followed by jaundice, dark coloured urine and more or less clay-coloured stool.
– Fulminant forms
Hepatocellular failure with severe, often fatal, cytolysis. This form is most frequent in hepatitis B patients with secondary infection with the ∆ virus, and in pregnant women infected with hepatitis E during their third trimester (20% mortality).
– Chronic hepatitis
Hepatitis B, C and ∆ may lead to cirrhosis or hepatoma.
Main profiles observed in different clinical scenarios during HBV infection
Ag HBs

anti-HBs anti-HBc anti-HBc anti-HBe Ag HBe antibodies antibodies
IgM
antibodies

HBV
DNA

Interpretation

+

(–)

(–)

+

(+)

(–)

(+)

Acute hepatitis

+/–

–

+

–

–

+/–

–

Acute hepatitis, recovery phase

–

+/–

+

–

–

–

–

Post-infectious immunity (cured)

+

–

+

+/–

+

–

+

Chronic hepatitis
(wild virus)

–

+

–

–

–

–

–

Post-vaccination immunity The tests in parentheses are not useful for diagnosis.
198

0.2 to 0.4%

No chronic forms

Polyvalent immunoglobulin Anti-hepatitis A

Fulminant forms

Prognosis

Individual prevention Vaccination

Collective prevention Hygiene, sanitation

Precedes signs.
Precedes signs and lasts
Brief: < 10 days after the entire active period. Can appearance of jaundice persist in chronic carriers.
Most infectious at the end of incubation period.

Period of communicability As for hepatitis B (the ∆ virus can only develop with B)
Anti-hepatitis B

Specific anti-HBs immunoglobulin may be effective Does not exist

Limit transfusion, screen blood prior to transfusion
Single use of disposable material

Anti-hepatitis B

Hygiene, sanitation

Does not exist

Does not exist

Chronicity: 2 to 5% for
No chronic forms patients with B/∆ coinfection; > 90% if secondary infection of hepatitis B
(rapid cirrhosis)

Chronicity: up to 50%, of which 10 to 25% progress to cirrhosis.
Hepatoma possible

Chronicity: 0.2 to 10% of which 5 to 15% progress to cirrhosis.
Hepatoma possible
Specific anti-HBs immunoglobulin Safe sex (condoms)

Much more common in
20% mortality in pregnant patients with secondary women infection of hepatitis B than in patients with B/∆ co-infection More rare than in hepatitis B

1 to 3%

Precedes signs.
Duration is not well known
(10 to 15 days after the appearance of jaundice)

Precedes signs.
Duration is not well known, probably the same as for hepatitis B.

Precedes signs.
Duration is not well known, probably the same as for hepatitis B. Could persist beyond normalisation of transaminases. 2 to 8 weeks

Co-infection B/∆: as for hepatitis B
Secondary infection of hepatitis B: approximately
5 weeks

2 to 25 weeks

2 to 6 weeks

Incubation period
4 to 30 weeks
(average 10 weeks)

Blood and blood products Faecal-oral
Sexual
Contaminated food and
Material contaminated with water blood Possibly vertical

Blood and blood products
Sexual: low
Material contaminated with blood (low)
Probably vertical

Blood and blood products
Sexual
Material contaminated with blood Vertical (mother-to-child)

Faecal-oral
Contaminated food and water Transfusion (rare)

Young adults

Hepatitis E

Transmission

Young adults

Hepatitis ∆

Young adults

Hepatitis C

Young adults

Hepatitis B

Age group most at risk Children

Hepatitis A

8. Viral diseases

199

8

Viral hepatitis

Treatment
– Rest, hydration, no special diet.
– Drug therapy for symptomatic treatment (analgesics, antipyretics, antidiarrhoeals, antiemetics etc.) during the acute phase is contra-indicated as it may aggravate symptoms and the evolution of hepatitis. Corticosteroids are not indicated.

Vaccination
Only against hepatitis A and B. Vaccination against hepatitis B is included in the EPI of some countries.
IM vaccination against hepatitis B:
– Standard schedule
• Newborns, infants
In countries where perinatal infection is common: one injection after birth, then at 6 and 14 weeks
Where perinatal infection is less common: one injection at 6, 10 and 14 weeks
• Children, adolescents, adults
Schedule 0-1-6: 2 injections 4 weeks apart, then a 3rd injection 5 months after the
2nd injection
– Accelerated schedule, when rapid protection is required (imminent departure in highly endemic areas, post-exposure prophylaxis)
Schedule D0-D7-D21: 3 injections administered during the same month, then a
4th injection one year after the 1st injection

200

8. Viral diseases

Dengue fever
– Dengue fever is an arthropod-borne viral disease transmitted to man through the bite of the Aedes mosquito. It develops sporadically and/or as epidemics (southeast Asia, the Pacific, Africa, the Caribbean and South and Central America). Four different serotypes of dengue virus exist.
– Primary infection with the dengue virus may be asymptomatic or may present as classical dengue fever. A second infection with a different serotype may provoke dengue haemorrhagic fever, characterised by an increased vascular permeability with loss of plasma from the vascular compartment and haemoconcentration.
– Dengue haemorrhagic fever may progress to dengue shock syndrome if, at the end of the febrile period, a significant plasma loss is not well compensated.

Clinical features
– Dengue fever
• fever with headache, retro-orbital pain, muscle and joint pain
• maculopapular rash on the lower limbs
• common and benign haemorrhagic signs: skin (petechiae or positive tourniquet test1) and more rarely, mucosal (epistaxis, gingival bleeding)
– Dengue haemorrhagic fever
• high fever (39°C-41°C) of sudden onset lasting 2 to 7 days (sometimes with
2 peaks)
• haemorrhagic signs: skin (petechiae, purpura, ecchymoses, positive tourniquet test1); mucous membranes (epistaxis, gingival bleeding); gastrointestinal tract
(haematemesis, melaena); bleeding from venepuncture sites
• hepatomegaly
– Dengue shock syndrome
The critical stage is at the end of the febrile period (from Day 3 to Day 7). The signs preceding shock are: persistent vomiting, intense abdominal pain, agitation or lethargy, sudden hypothermia. Ascites or pleural effusion are possible.
Signs of shock:
• rapid and weak, then undetectable pulse
• cold extremities, profuse sweating
• narrow pulse pressure, hypotension
Grading severity of dengue haemorrhagic fever (from WHO)
Grade

Clinical features

I

Fever + non-specific general symptoms + haemorrhagic signs (positive tourniquet test1 and/or easy bruising)

II

Grade I manifestations + spontaneous bleeding (skin or other haemorrhages)

III

Circulatory failure

IV

Profound shock with undetectable pulse and blood pressure

1 Tourniquet test: inflate a blood pressure cuff on the upper arm to a point midway between the systolic and diastolic

pressure for 5 minutes. The test is considered positive when 20 or more petechiae per 2.5 cm square are observed.

201

8

Dengue fever

Laboratory
– Complete blood count (CBC) and differentials with platelet count: leukopenia and thrombocytopenia are common with ≤ 100 000 platelets/mm3.
– Haematocrit is the only test that shows haemoconcentration and therefore differentiates dengue fever from dengue haemorrhagic fever (haematocrit elevated
20% above average for the age and sex: e.g. if the average haematocrit for the relevant population is 35%, a haematocrit of 42% corresponds to an increase of 20%).
– Confirmation of the diagnosis:
Confirm the aetiology at the beginning of an epidemic with serology (ELISA or rapid tests): elevated IgG and IgM anti-dengue antibodies confirm a recent infection.
The IgM/IgG ratio differentiates primary infection (high ratio) from a secondary infection (low ratio), and therefore risk of shock.
An increase in antibodies between two samples (from the beginning and end of an episode) confirms an acute infection. The serotype is identified by serology or PCR.

Treatment
– Dengue fever
• Give paracetamol PO (see Fever, page 26); wrap the patient in a wet cloth.
Acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin) is strictly contra-indicated.
• Prevent or treat moderate dehydration (plenty of fluids, oral rehydration salts, follow Treatment plans A or B to treat dehydration, WHO, pages 306 to 310).
– Dengue haemorrhagic fever (Grades I and II)
• Hospitalise and observe children under 15 years, patients presenting with significant or repeated haemorrhages, patients with less than 20 000 platelets/mm3 and all patients having difficulty eating or drinking.
• Monitor vital signs (pulse, blood pressure, respiratory rate and urine output) every
3 hours and haematocrit every 6 hours. Look for the signs that precede shock.
• Administer Ringer Lactate: 7 ml/kg/hour for 6 hours then adapt according to the clinical evolution and haematocrit.
If there is an improvement: progressively reduce the rate to 5 ml/kg/hour then
3 ml/kg/hour and stop the infusion after 24 to 48 hours.
If there is no improvement: increase to 10 ml/kg/hour, then 15 ml/kg/hour.
Place the patient under a mosquito net.
IM injections are contra-indicated.
– Dengue shock syndrome: emergency +++ (Grades III and IV)
• Administer Ringer Lactate: 10 to 20 ml/kg in less than 20 minutes, to be repeated if necessary, until a cumulative volume of 30 ml/kg is reached.
If vital signs and haematocrit improve: change to 10 ml/kg/hour and then adapt accordingly. If there are no signs of improvement: administer oxygen and immediately check haematocrit: – if the haematocrit is still elevated or has risen: plasma substitute 10 to 20 ml/kg infused in less than 10 minutes. Repeat if necessary, until a cumulative volume of
30 ml/kg is reached, then give 10 to 20 ml/kg/hour until improvement in the vital signs is seen.

202

8. Viral diseases

– a sudden drop in haematocrit without clinical improvement is a sign of haemorrhage (often gastrointestinal or internal): transfuse fresh blood, 10 to
20 ml/kg (ensure screening for HIV, hepatitis B and C etc.).
• Continue to monitor vital signs every 15 to 30 minutes and check haematocrit every 2 hours for the first 6 hours then every 4 hours. Monitor closely for the following 48 hours as shock may recur.
• Stop the infusions once the vital signs are normal and stable, the patient has regained appetite and the haematocrit is normalised, usually 48 hours after shock.
Warning: monitor for fluid overload. Puffy eyelids are the first sign of fluid overload.
Stop the infusion until the puffiness disappears. In the event of pulmonary oedema
(laryngeal crackles, dyspnoea, increased respiratory rate, cough with or without frothy expectorant, anxiety, crepitations in both lung fields or tachycardia), give: furosemide IV, to be repeated after 1 to 2 hours if necessary:
Children: 1 mg/kg/injection
Adults: 40 mg/injection
• In an infant with a febrile seizure: see Seizures, page 23.

Prevention
– In endemic areas an epidemic risk exists: report probable or confirmed cases.
– Individual protection: mosquito nets and repellents.
– Vector control is essential, particularly during epidemics: destruction of larval habitats, insecticide spraying.

8

203

Viral haemorrhagic fevers

Viral haemorrhagic fevers
– A dozen diseases with different aetiologies and different modes of transmission are grouped under this name as they present with similar clinical signs.
– Dengue haemorrhagic fever is a viral haemorrhagic fever that is described on page 201.

Clinical features
– Common syndrome (CS):
• fever higher than 38.5°C
• short remission on Day 3 or Day 4
• haemorrhagic symptoms (purpura, epistaxis, haematemesis, melaena etc.)
– The clinical signs are often non-specific, the severity varies depending on the aetiology (see table, page 206).

Laboratory
– Send a sample of whole blood to a reference laboratory (eg. the Pasteur Institute) for serological diagnosis. Attach a clinical description of the patient.
– Wear protective clothing while taking or handling the sample (gloves, protective glasses etc.).
– Use a triple packaging system for shipment. The tube containing the blood specimen is placed in a primary watertight, rigid container enclosing absorbent material between it and the tube containing the blood specimen (1). There must be enough absorbent material to soak up the entire blood sample in the event of a leak. This primary container is then placed in a second rigid container appropriately sealed for transport of infectious materials (2). This second container is placed in a secure carton box that has a visible infectious substance (biohazard) label (3).
– The sample may also be sent on filter paper. It is easier to transport, but the small volume of blood only allows a limited number of aetiologies to be tested.

Management
Suspicion of haemorrhagic fever (isolated case of fever with haemorrhagic symptoms in an endemic area):
– Isolation: isolation ward (or failing that screens/partitions); restrict visitors (provide protective clothing: gowns, gloves, masks).
– Standard precautions:
The general rules of hygiene must always be respected. The majority of intra-hospital infections have occurred due to a lack of respect for these simple rules.
• wear gloves for taking samples
• wear gowns during consultations and care
• wear thick rubber gloves to handle soiled laundry
• frequent hand washing
• respect safe injection practices
– In addition to these non-specific measures wear masks and gloves while examining the patient and protective glasses when there is a risk of splashing.
Confirmed cases of Ebola, Marburg, Lassa, Crimean-Congo haemorrhagic fevers or epidemics of unknown origin:
– More specific measures:
• strict isolation in a reserved area separate from other patient areas, with a changing room at the entrance/exit
• disinfection (2% active chlorine), and safe disposal of excreta
204

8. Viral diseases

• disinfection of contaminated laundry in chlorine solution (0.1% active chlorine)
• protective clothing for staff: double gloves, mask, cap, protective glasses, double gown, apron, rubber boots
• entry/exit: clean laundry for staff at entry; disinfection station at the exit. Gowns, boots and rubber gloves are soaked in a chlorine solution (0.1% active chlorine) for
2 hours before cleaning. Containers for the safe disposal of disposable material.
Hand washing with soap.
– The caregiver (maximum one per patient), helped and supervised by the medical staff, follows the same protective measures.
– In the event of a death, do not wash the body. If it is imperative for cultural reasons: wear protective clothing, wash the body with chlorinated water (2% active chlorine), and restrict the number of people involved. Bury the body as quickly as possible, using a body bag when feasible.
– Wear protective clothing when handling contaminated material. No contaminated material should leave the isolation area which includes an incinerator, a sharps pit and a biological waste pit.
Confirmed cases of Yellow fever or Rift Valley fever:
– Standard precautions
– Keep the patient under a mosquito net to prevent transmission
For all patients: report to the Ministry of Health of the country

Treatment
– Aetiological treatment: only for Lassa fever and Crimean-Congo fever (ribavirine).
– Symptomatic treatment:
• fever: paracetamol (see Fever, page 26). Acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin) is contraindicated.
• pain: mild (paracetamol), moderate (tramadol), severe (sublingual morphine): see
Pain, page 29.
• dehydration: follow Treatment plans A, B or C to treat dehydration, WHO, pages 306 to 311.
• haemorrhagic shock: see page 19
• seizures: see page 23
• vomiting: promethazine PO
Children from 2 to 10 years: 10 to 25 mg to be repeated every 6 hours if necessary
Children over 10 years and adults: 25 mg to be repeated every 6 hours if necessary
– For Ebola and Marburg haemorrhagic fevers: invasive procedures must be strictly limited. Health care staff are at risk of contamination when inserting and maintaining intravenous lines. An intravenous line must be well secured so that the patient, often confused, cannot pull it out.

Prevention
– Vaccination
• Yellow fever:
Mass vaccination campaign during an epidemic
Children from 6 months and adults: a single dose of 0.5 ml IM (preferred) or deep SC, in the deltoid muscle. In pregnant women, only administer during an epidemic.
Routine vaccination (EPI)
• Rift Valley fever (only during an epidemic)
– Vector control programmes for known vectors.
– Hospital hygiene measures are essential in all cases.

205

8

206

(5-20%)
(< 1%)
(2-10%)

None
Strict isolation
None
None

Ticks
Europe, Asia

Livestock/Ticks
Africa, Asia

Rodents
Asia and Europe

Small mammals/Ticks
India

Omsk

Crimean Congo*

FHSR (hantavirus)*

None
Mosquito nets

Primates/Mosquitoes
Africa, South America

* VHF with epidemic potential
CS: common syndrome

Yellow fever*

Rift Valley*

Kyasanur

None
Mosquito nets

(2-5%)

Isolation

Rodents
South America

Junin and Machupo*

Livestock/Mosquitoes
Africa

(15-30%)

Strict isolation

(30-50%)

CS + jaundice, proteinuria on reagent strip, oliguria, headache
(10-30%)

Clinical signs:
- isolated fever
- CS
- encephalitis
- retinitis and blindness

CS + headache, muscle pain, prostration

- proteinuria on reagent strip

- oedema of the soft palate, generalised petechial rash

- pharyngitis, reddened conjunctivae

- periorbital oedema, cervical adenopathy, pharyngitis

CS + vomiting, erythema of the face and, depending on the aetiology:

CS + facial oedema, purulent pharyngitis, proteinuria on reagent strip
(10-25%)

(60-80%)

Rodents
Central and West Africa

Lassa*

CS + sudden onset general malaise, vomiting and diarrhoea

Strict isolation

(estimated case fatality rate)

Unknown
Africa

Ebola*
Marburg

Clinical feataures

Isolation of patients Reservoir/ Vector
Geographical distribution

Viral haemorrhagic fevers

8. Viral diseases

HIV infection and AIDS
– AIDS (acquired immune deficiency syndrome) is the most severe form of HIV infection (human immunodeficiency virus).
– Two subtypes of HIV have been identified. HIV-1 is more widespread than HIV-2, which is mainly found in West Africa. HIV-2 is less virulent and less transmissible than HIV-1.
– HIV affects the immune system by causing a deficit in CD4 T lymphocytes.

Evolution of the disease
– Primary infection or acute retroviral syndrome: 50 to 70% of newly infected individuals develop a viral syndrome (fever, malaise, lymphadenopathy) during seroconversion
(from 15 days to 3 months post exposure).
– Asymptomatic HIV infection (after seroconversion): a period of clinical latency, but not viral latency. The time period for progression from HIV infection to the development of severe immune deficiency in western countries is 10 years. This period appears to be shorter in developing countries.
– Symptomatic HIV infection: with progressive destruction of the immune system, common and more severe diseases occur more frequently, and with higher mortality, in seropositive individuals.
– AIDS: this stage corresponds to the development of severe opportunistic infections and neoplasms. From a biological point of view, AIDS is defined as a CD4 count below 200 cells/mm3. Without treatment the disease progresses rapidly towards death.

WHO clinical staging of HIV/AIDS for adults and adolescents with confirmed
HIV infection.
The WHO has proposed a clinical classification of HIV infection with 4 stages of severity: Clinical stage 1
Asymptomatic
Persistent generalized lymphadenopathy
Clinical stage 2
Unexplained moderate weight loss (< 10% of presumed or measured body weight)
Recurrent respiratory tract infections (sinusitis, tonsillitis, otitis media, pharyngitis)
Herpes zoster
Angular cheilitis
Recurrent oral ulceration
Papular pruritic eruptions
Seborrhoeic dermatitis
Fungal nail infections
207

8

HIV infection and AIDS

Clinical stage 3
Unexplained severe weight loss (> 10% of presumed or measured body weight)
Unexplained chronic diarrhoea for longer than one month
Unexplained persistent fever (> 37.5°C intermittent or constant for > 1 month)
Persistent oral candidiasis
Oral hairy leukoplakia
Pulmonary tuberculosis
Severe bacterial infections (e.g. pneumonia, empyema, pyomyositis, bone or joint infection, meningitis, bacteraemia)
Acute necrotizing ulcerative stomatitis, gingivitis or periodontitis
Unexplained anaemia (< 8 g/dl), neutropenia (< 0.5 x 10 9 /L) and/or chronic thrombocytopenia (< 50 x 109/L3)
Clinical stage 4
HIV wasting syndrome
Pneumocystis pneumonia
Recurrent severe bacterial pneumonia
Chronic herpes simplex infection (orolabial, genital or anorectal of more than one month’s duration or visceral at any site)
Oesophageal candidiasis (or candidiasis of trachea, bronchi or lungs)
Extrapulmonary tuberculosis
Kaposi’s sarcoma
Cytomegalovirus infection (retinitis or infection of other organs)
Central nervous system toxoplasmosis
HIV encephalopathy
Extrapulmonary cryptococcosis including meningitis
Disseminated nontuberculous mycobacteria infection
Progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy
Chronic cryptosporidiosis
Chronic isosporiasis
Disseminated mycosis (extrapulmonary histoplasmosis, coccidiomycosis)
Recurrent septicaemia (including nontyphoidal Salmonella)
Lymphoma (cerebral or B-cell non-Hodgkin)
Invasive cervical carcinoma
Atypical disseminated leishmaniasis
Symptomatic HIV-associated nephropathy or cardiomyopathy
Note: this classification is only for adults and adolescents. Another four-stage clinical staging has been developed for children.

Laboratory
Diagnosis of HIV infection
– The diagnosis of HIV infection is made with serological testing.
– Testing is done voluntarily with informed consent. Testing is never mandatory. Every individual has the right to know or not to know his HIV status. Test results are confidential to avoid discrimination. The individual should have access to minimum services offering pre-test and post-test counselling, treatment and support.

208

8. Viral diseases

– A positive diagnosis is made when at least 2 different tests (2 different brands) are both clearly positive.
– A first negative test should be repeated 3 months later to exclude seroconversion
(window period).
CD4 lymphocyte counts
– CD4 cell depletion is a marker of the progression of immune depression. It is a predictor of the development of opportunistic infections or neoplasms and can be used to orient their diagnosis (e.g. cerebral toxoplasmosis or cryptococcal meningitis appear when the CD4 count is below 100 cells/mm3. If clinical signs indicating these infections are present, but the CD4 count is greater than or equal to 200 cells/mm3, it is unlikely that these infections are present).
– The CD4 cell count is also used as an indicator for primary prophylaxis (see primary prophylaxis, page 211) and initiation of ARV treatment.

Treatment of HIV infection
Antiretroviral treatment (ARV)
A multi-drug (at least 3) antiretroviral regimen (ART) is the reference treatment. It does not eradicate the virus, but slows the progression of the disease and improves the patient’s clinical state by reducing viral replication and consequently increasing the
CD4 cell count to levels beyond the threshold of opportunistic infections.
Therapeutic classes
Three major classes of ARV exist:
– NRTI (nucleoside/nucleotide reverse transcriptase inhibitors): zidovudine (AZT), lamivudine (3TC), didanosine (ddI), stavudine (d4T), abacavir (ABC), tenofovir
(TDF), emtricitabine (FTC).
– NNRTI (non-nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitors): efavirenz (EFV), nevirapine
(NVP). HIV-2 is naturally resistant to NNRTI.
– PI (protease inhibitors): indinavir (IDV), lopinavir (LPV), ritonavir (RTV), saquinavir
(SQV).
Principles of ARV treatment
– Daily triple therapy must be taken for life to prevent the rapid development of resistance. It is important that the patient understands this and that adherence to treatment is optimal.
– The most widely-used and easiest regimens to administer are 2 NRTI + 1 NNRTI: e.g. d4T + 3TC associated with NVP or EFV (EFV is contra-indicated in pregnant women). – In the event of treatment failure, use as a second-line: 2 other NRTI + 1 PI.
Other possible combinations exist which are less commonly used or more difficult to manage. Criteria for ARV treatment
As there are large numbers of patients who would benefit from treatment, it seems legitimate to prioritise the treatment of patients already in clinical stage 3 and 4 and patients most at risk of developing severe opportunistic infections (patients with a CD4 count below 200 cells/mm3).

209

8

HIV infection and AIDS

Monitoring of ARV treatment
CD4 counts are useful in the initiation and follow-up of treatment. CBC, haemoglobin and ALAT are not essential, but can be useful in detecting treatment adverse effects.
Viral load (rarely available) is useful for detection of treatment failures.
Treatment of opportunistic and other infections
With progressive immunosuppression, HIV infected patients who are not receiving triple therapy (or patients with poor adherence) become increasingly susceptible to infections. For conditions of clinical stages 2 and 3, standard treatments are usually effective and the diagnosis of HIV infection does not much alter the clinical management. Patients in these stages may benefit from primary prophylaxis (see primary prophylaxis, page 211).
Severe opportunistic infections often require sophisticated diagnostic and therapeutic means rarely available. However, with improving health services, most of these diseases can be treated.
For treatment of opportunistic infections, see tables, pages 213 to 219.
Treatment of pain
Treat all patients for associated pain (see Pain, page 29).

Prevention of HIV infection
– Sexual transmission
The only reliable method of prevention is the use of male or female condoms.
In addition, early diagnosis and treatment of sexually transmitted infections is essential as they increase the transmission of HIV (see Chapter 9).
Post-exposure prophylaxis (PEP): e.g. in the event of rape, ARV treatment begun within
48 hours after possible exposure and given for a duration of 1 month may reduce the risk of infection.
– Transmission through blood and blood products
• transfusion: strict respect of indications for transfusion and systematic serological screening of the donor ’s blood are the two indispensable precautions in the prevention of HIV transmission through transfusions.
• IV drug use: needle and syringe exchange programmes with disposable needles and syringes for users.
– Occupational transmission (accidental needle stick injuries or injuries with contaminated objects, contact between a patient’s blood and unprotected broken skin or mucous membranes).
Prevention is based on use of universal precautions to avoid contamination with soiled material or potentially infected body fluids.
Post exposure prophylaxis (PEP): e.g. in the event of an accident, ARV treatment begun within 48 hours after the accident and given for a duration of 1 month reduces the risk of infection.

210

8. Viral diseases

– Nosocomial transmission
Prevention of nosocomial HIV infection is based on the rational use of injections and strict respect for hygiene and sterilisation and disinfection procedures for medical material. – Mother-to-child transmission (MTCT)
The global rate of vertical transmission varies from 20% to 40%. The risk of transmission through breastfeeding is evaluated at approximately 12% and persists for the duration of breastfeeding.
In pregnant women: HIV transmission from mother-to-child may be reduced by the administration of ARVs. Many different protocols exist of varying complexity, duration and effectiveness. The most commonly used ARV are AZT, 3TC and NVP.
ARV are administered to the mother during pregnancy, labour, post-partum period and to the newborn. Check national recommendations.
Programmes targeting pregnant women also include other preventive measures: no systematic episiotomy; avoid artificial rupture of the membranes. In certain situations, where the context allows, an elective caesarean section (prior to commencement of labour or rupture of membranes), under antiretroviral cover, may reduce mother-to-child transmission. It is absolutely imperative to consider the risk of a caesarean section against the benefit of this intervention.
In breastfeeding women: artificial milk if the supply of milk and safe water is guaranteed. If not, exclusive maternal breastfeeding until the age of six months followed by rapid weaning. Mixed feeding (maternal + artificial milk) is contraindicated.

Prevention of opportunistic infections
In the absence of ARV treatment, all HIV infections become symptomatic and evolve towards AIDS. However, some opportunistic infections can be prevented.
Primary prophylaxis
For HIV infected patients who have not previously contracted an opportunistic infection, in order to prevent the development of some opportunistic infections.
Criteria for primary prophylaxis:
– In the absence of CD4 count: WHO clinical stages 2, 3 and 4.
– If CD4 count is feasible: WHO clinical stages 3 and 4 irrespective of the CD4 count and WHO clinical stages 1 and 2 with CD4 count < 350 cells/mm 3 (or even
500 cells/mm3, depending on national recommendations).
Infections
Pneumocystosis
Cerebral toxoplasmosis
Isosporiasis
Various bacterial infections
Malaria

Primary prophylaxis cotrimoxazole PO:
Children: 50 mg SMX + 10 mg TMP/kg once daily
Adults: 800 mg SMX + 160 mg TMP once daily

211

8

HIV infection and AIDS

Secondary prophylaxis
For patients who develop a specific opportunistic infection, in order to prevent
Infections

Secondary prophylaxis

Pneumocystosis

Toxoplasmosis

cotrimoxazole PO:

Children: 50 mg SMX + 10 mg
TMP/kg once daily
Adults: 800 mg SMX + 160 mg
TMP once daily

Comments

Alternative: dapsone PO
Children: 2 mg/kg once daily without exceeding 100 mg/day
Adults: 100 mg once daily
Alternatives:
Adults: sulfadiazine PO: 2 g daily
+ pyrimethamine PO: 25 mg daily
+ folinic acid PO: 25 to 30 mg weekly or dapsone PO: 200 mg weekly or
50 mg daily
+ pyrimethamine PO: 75 mg weekly
+ folinic acid PO: 25 to 30 mg weekly Isosporiasis
Penicilliosis

itraconazole PO:

Adults: 200 mg once daily

Histoplasmosis

itraconazole PO :

Adults: 200 to 400 mg once daily

Cryptococcal meningitis

Oral or oesophageal candidiasis Herpes simplex

fluconazole PO:
Children: 3 to 4 mg/kg once daily
Adults: 200 mg once daily fluconazole PO:

Children: 3 to 6 mg/kg once daily
Adults: 100 to 200 mg once daily aciclovir PO:

Children under 2 years:
400 mg/day in 2 divided doses
Children over 2 years and adults:
800 mg/day in 2 divided doses

recurrence once treatment for the infection is completed.

212

Only for frequent and severe recurrences Only for frequent and severe recurrences (also see chapter 3)

Diarrhoea with or without blood Symptoms

Other causes
• Kaposi’s sarcoma
• Lymphoma
• Idiopathic (HIV infection)
• Antiretrovirals (especially lopinavir and ritonavir)

Viral infections
Cytomegalovirus (CMV)

Helminthiasis
Strongyloides stercoralis

Mycobacterial infections
• Mycobacterium tuberculosis
(gastrointestinal TB)
• Mycobacterium avium complex

Bacterial infections
• Shigella
• Salmonella enteritis
• Campylobacter enteritis

- Persistent (> 2 weeks) or chronic (> 4 weeks) diarrhoea is often associated with weight loss and dehydration.
- Prevention or treatment of dehydration is critical (pages 306 to 311).
- Depending on the results of the stool examinations: give appropriate treatment.
- If there is no laboratory support:

Treatment

- If no improvement (and no contra-indications such as bloody diarrhoea), symptomatic treatment with loperamide PO:
Children < 2 years: contra-indicated
Children 2 to 5 years: 3 mg/day
Children 6 to 8 years: 4 mg/day
Children > 8 years: 6 to 8 mg/day
Adults: initial dose of 4 mg then 2 mg after each liquid stool (max. 16 mg/day)

Acute bloody diarrhoea
- First-line treatment:
Note:
Children: azithromycin PO: 20 mg/kg once daily for 5 days
I. belli, Cryptosporidium, or ciprofloxacin PO: 30 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses for 7 days
Microsporidium, MAC and Adults: ciprofloxacin PO: 1 g/day in 2 divided doses for 7 days
CMV are unlikely if
- If amoebiasis suspected : tinidazole or metronidazole PO, see page 88
CD4 count > 200 cells.
Non-bloody persistent or chronic diarrhea
Persistent or chronic diarrhoea in HIV-infected patient suggests advanced immunocompromised state. For patients who qualify for ARVs by CD4 count
(or unknown CD4 count), ARV initiation is urgent and will usually resolve symptoms in 14 to 28 days.
- Isospora belli: cotrimoxazole PO
Children: 80 mg SMX + 16 mg TMP/kg/day in 2 divided doses for 10 days followed by 50 mg SMX + 10 mg TMP/kg/day in 2 divided doses for 3 weeks
Adults: 1600 mg SMX + 320 mg TMP/day in 2 divided doses for 7 to 10 days followed by 800 mg SMX + 160 mg TMP/day in 2 divided doses for 3 weeks
- Cryptosporidium: no specific treatment in HIV-infected patients
- Microsporidium: albendazole PO (limited efficacy)
Children: 20 mg/kg/day (max. 800 mg) in 2 divided doses for 7 days
Adults: 800 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 2 to 4 weeks
- Helminthiasis: albendazole PO
Children > 6 months but ≤ 10 kg: 200 mg once daily for 3 days
Children > 6 months and adults: 400 mg once daily for 3 days
- Giardiasis: tinidazole or metronidazole, see page 147

2. Microscopic examination of stool for ova and parasites (2 to 3 samples)

Aetiologies:

Parasitic infections
• Isospora belli
• Cryptosporidium
• Microsporidium
• Giardia lamblia
• Entamoeba histolytica

1. History and clinical examination Diagnosis

Diarrhoea is defined as at least
3 liquid stools per day.

Definitions and aetiologies

8. Viral diseases

8

213

214

Oral and oesophageal lesions

(continued)

Diarrhoea with or without blood Symptoms

Aphthous ulcers

Viral infections
• Oral hairy leukoplakia (keratosis on the lateral sides of the tongue due to the Epstein-Barr virus)
• Oral and oesophageal herpes

Fungal infections
• Oral candidiasis: whitish plaques on the oral mucosa, difficult to detatch. If detatched: granulous and bloody base. • Oesophageal candidiasis: pain on swallowing, dysphagia.
May result in weight loss.

Definitions and aetiologies

- Oral candidiasis: miconazole gum patch: apply one patch/day to the gums for 7 days or clotrimazole PO: 30 mg/day in 3 divided doses for 7 days; tablets to be sucked or nystatin PO 100 000 IU lozenges: 1 lozenge 4 times/day for 10 days; to be sucked
Note: oral candidiasis is an indication for PCP prophylaxis

Nutrition ++++
Children: continue to breastfeed; increase daily calorie intake: children 6-11 months: add 150 kcal/d children 12-23 months: add 200 kcal/d children 2-5 years: add 250 kcal/d children 6-9 years: add 350 kcal/d children 10-14 years: add 400 kcal/d
Eliminate fresh milk, give porridge prepared with rice water or soup or yoghurts. Give 2.5 ml of oil/meal.
Any child 0-5 years should receive zinc sulfate (see page 84).
Adults: increase the calorie and protein intake (at least 2 g protein/kg/day).
No food is excluded but avoid raw food, fresh milk and foods high in fibre.
Encourage small, frequent meals.

Treatment

- Oral herpes:
Local treatment and analgesics, see Stomatitis, Chapter 3
For recurrent or extensive forms affecting the oesophagus, add: aciclovir PO within the 48 hours following the onset of lesions:
Children under 2 years: 200 mg 5 times/day for 7 days
Children over 2 years and adults: 400 mg 5 times/day for 7 days
Secondary prophylaxis only for patients with frequent recurrences

- Oesophageal candidiasis: nystatin PO for 20 days (see Stomatitis, Chapter 3)
Consider all severe oral or preferably, fluconazole PO: candidiasis (if the pharynx Children: 3 to 6 mg/kg once daily for 14 days is involved) as oesophageal Adults: 200 mg the first day then 100 mg once daily for 14 days (or if necessary, candidiasis even in the
200 mg once daily for 14 days according to the clinical response) absence of dysphagia.
- Oral hairy leukoplakia: no treatment

If in doubt: microscopic examination of an oral sample. Clinical examination is usually enough to make a diagnosis. Diagnosis

HIV infection and AIDS

Definitions and aetiologies

Diagnosis

Respiratory problems Cough and/or thoracic pain and/or 1. History and clinical dyspnoea in a symptomatic HIV examination: infected patient.
Blood in the sputum?
(also see chapter 2)
If fever < 7 days, dyspnoea:
Aetiologies:
unlikely TB.
If cough > 21 days, weight
Bacterial infections loss, thoracic pain
Pyogenic bacteria (Streptococcus
> 15 days, no dyspnoea: pneumoniae, Haemophilus influenzae, likely TB.
Staphylococcus aureus)
Pulmonary auscultation: bilateral lobar pneumonia?
Mycobacterial infections
M. tuberculosis, MAC
2. If possible:
a) Look for AFB in sputum
Protozoal infections
(3 samples)
Pneumocystis jiroveci
b) Chest x-ray
• Pneumocystis: bilateral
Fungal infections interstitial infiltrates
Cryptococcus neoformans,
• Tuberculosis: lobar
Histoplasma capsulatum, consolidation, cavitation,
Coccidioides immitis, Aspergillus spp, pleural effusion, intraPenicillium marneffei thoracic lymphadenopathy
Warning: the classic
Viral infections radiological signs of
CMV
tuberculosis are not always found in HIV + tuberculosis
Neoplasms
patients.
• Kaposi’s sarcoma
• Non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma
Notes:
• MAC, pneumocystis,
Others
CMV and fungal infections
• Lymphoid interstitial pneumonia are unlikely in patients
• Pleural effusion (often TB) with a CD4 count
• Pericardial effusion (often TB)
> 200 cells/mm3
• Pneumothorax (may be due to
• Staphylococcal
PCP)
pneumonia is often associated with a pyomyositis or an abscess

Symptoms

• Fungal infections (cryptococcosis, penicilliosis, histoplasmosis):
Adults: amphotericin B IV: 0.5 to 1 mg/kg/day administered over 4 to 6 hours for 2 weeks (cryptococcosis, penicilliosis) or 3 to 10 days (histoplasmosis), followed by: fluconazole PO: 400 mg once daily for 8 weeks for cryptococcosis itraconazole PO: 400 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 10 weeks for penicilliosis itraconazole PO: 600 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 3 days then 400 mg/day for 12 weeks for histoplasmosis
Secondary prophylaxis for life is recommended.

• If the sputum examination is negative and the chest x-ray is consistent with
Pneumocystis jiroveci pneumonia: cotrimoxazole PO for 21 days
Children: 100 mg SMX + 20 mg TMP/kg/day in 2 divided doses
Adults: 1600 mg SMX + 320 mg TMP, 3 or 4 times daily
Note: the symptoms may become worse during the first phase of treatment, effectiveness can only be evaluated after one week of treatment.
In cotrimoxazole-allergic patients:
Adults: clindamycin PO or IV: 2.4 g/day in 4 doses or injections
+ primaquine PO: 15 mg once daily for 21 days
For either treatment, add prednisolone PO for patients with severe pneumocystosis with hypoxia:
Children: start with 2 mg/kg/day then decrease the dose following the adult example Adults: 80 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 5 days, then 40 mg/day for 5 days then 20 mg/day for 10 days
Secondary prophylaxis for life is recommended.

• Suspect AFB– tuberculosis if the patient does not respond to amoxicillin
+ clavulanic acid

• If the sputum examination is negative and the chest x-ray is consistent with a pyogenic infection in a patient who has not responded to standard treatment: amoxicillin + clavulanic acid PO (dosages expressed in amoxicillin)
Adults: 1.5 g/day in 3 divided doses for 10 to 14 days

• If the sputum examination is AFB+, treat for tuberculosis (no thioacetazone: risk of severe reactions in HIV infected patients)

• If the chest x-ray is consistent with staphylococcal pneumonia:
Children: see Staphylococcal pneumonia, Chapter 2
Adults: cloxacillin PO, 2 g/day in 2 divided doses for 10 days

• For the diagnosis and treatment of upper respiratory tract infections, particularly pneumonia: see Chapter 2

Treatment

8. Viral diseases

8

215

216

Definitions and aetiologies

4. If all examinations are negative: biopsy is useful to exclude lymphoma, Kaposi’s sarcoma and fungal or mycobacterial infections (see notes for patients in Stage 1).

Infections
• Tuberculosis
• Syphilis
• Histoplasmosis
• Toxoplasmosis
• CMV

Neoplasms
• Kaposi’s sarcoma
• Lymphoma

3. Suspected syphilis: serology, direct microscopy

Aetiologies:
HIV infection

- Tuberculosis: treat according to the national protocol.

- Treat according to the aetiology or empirical treatment with, for example cloxacillin or doxycycline PO.

Treatment

2. Suspected TB:
- Early syphilis: benzathine benzylpenicillin IM lymph node aspiration, look
Adults: 2.4 MIU as a single dose (1.2 MIU in each buttock) for AFB, chest x-ray
Note: in HIV infected patients, tuberculosis is often extraNote: in patients in Stage 1, no further investigation (other than 1, 2 and 3 in pulmonary. this table) or treatment are required.

1. Clinical examination: look for a local cause (skin or dental infection etc.); TB or syphilis.

Diagnosis

Persistent generalised lymphadenopathy (PGL):
• 2 or more extra-inguinal sites
• lymph nodes > 1.5 cm
• enlarged for 3 or more months
PGL is usually due to HIV infection. Lymphadenopathy Enlarged lymph nodes in a symptomatic HIV infected patient Symptoms

HIV infection and AIDS

Headache and neurological disorders in adults Symptoms

Undesirable effects of medication
Some antiretrovirals

Common causes of headache unrelated to HIV infection: sinusitis, problems with accommodation etc. (sometimes more frequent in HIV infected patients) Neoplasms
Primary CNS lymphoma

Infections
• Tuberculous meningitis
• Cryptococcal meningitis
• Cerebral toxoplasmosis
• Neurosyphilis
• CMV encephalitis
• HIV encephalopathy
• Progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy
• Cerebral malaria

50 mg SMX + 10 mg TMP/kg/day in 2 divided doses for 4 weeks
A secondary prophylaxis for life is recommended.

pyrimethamine PO: 200 mg in 2 divided doses on the 1st day, then 75 to 100 mg/day
+ sulfadiazine PO: 4 to 6 g/day + folinic acid PO: 15 mg/day or, failing that, cotrimoxazole PO at high doses:

For patients with focal signs, treat for toxoplasmosis for 6 weeks:

Positive thick and thin films: see Malaria, Chapter 6.

Treatment

Headache of no known origin: symptomatic treatment starting with a step 1 analgesic (see Pain, chapter 1).

Positive lumbar puncture:
• Bacterial meningitis: see Chapter 7
In endemic areas: check for • Tuberculous meningitis: treat according to the national protocol malaria (if febrile): thick
• Cryptococcal meningitis: amphotericin B IV 0.5 to 1 mg/kg/day for 2 weeks and thin films. followed by fluconazole PO 400 mg once daily for 8 weeks
A secondary prophylaxis for life is recommended.
Lumbar puncture (LP) if
Note: intracranial pressure (ICP) is often raised in cryptococcal meningitis. To not contra-indicated. lower ICP, repeated punctures to drain CSF may be necessary at the beginning of treatment.
Elements favouring neurosyphilis: Neurosyphilis:
• VDRL positive in blood benzylpenicilin IV: 12 to 24 MIU/day in 6 injections at 4 hour intervals for and/or CSF
14 days
• cells in the CSF or • high protein in the CSF benzylpenicillin procaine IM: 1.2 g once daily + probenecid PO: 2 g/day in
4 divided doses for 10 to 14 days

History and clinical examination: • Change in mental state
• Focal deficits
• Seizures
• Signs of meningeal irritation • Raised intercranial pressure • Motor problems, ataxia

Persistent headache that does not respond to usual analgesics in a symptomatic HIV infected patient.

Aetiologies:

Diagnosis

Definitions and aetiologies

8. Viral diseases

8

217

218

Fever caused by medication

HIV infection

Neoplasms
Non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma

Aetiologies :
Infections
• Common childhood diseases
• Severe bacterial infections (TB, pneumonia, typhoid fever, septicaemia, meningitis, endocarditis etc.)
• Occult bacterial infections (sinusitis, otitis, urinary tract infections)
• Opportunistic infections (TB, mycosis, toxoplasmosis)
• Malaria

1. History and clinical examination: look for a ENT or urinary infection, TB, skin infection, enlarged lymph nodes etc.

Temperature higher than 38°C, chronic (lasting more than 5 days) or recurrent (multiple episodes in a period of more than 5 days)

Persistent or recurrent fever

Positive thick and thin films: see Malaria, Chapter 6.

Treatment

If the patient is under treatment, think of a fever caused by secondary effects of medication.

4. Chest x-ray, CBC, blood cultures, urinalysis, stool culture, serology, lumbar puncture (LP).

3. Suspected TB: look for
AFB.

2. In endemic areas, check for malaria: thick and thin films. Identified or suspected focus of infection:
ENT: see Chapter 2; urinary: see Chapter 9 etc.
Tuberculosis: treat according to the national protocol.

Suspected meningitis: treat according to the results of the LP.
If LP is not available, treat for bacterial meningitis, see Chapter 7.

Positive thick and thin films: see Malaria, Chapter 6.
If testing is not available: in endemic zones, give systematic malaria treatment.

If LP is not possible:
• Treat for bacterial meningitis if patient febrile and/or meningeal syndrome (see
Chapter 7).
• Treat for toxoplasmosis if focal signs present: pyrimethamine PO: 2 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses for 2 days
In endemic areas, check for then 1 mg/kg/day + sulfadiazine PO: 80 mg/kg/d in 2 divided doses malaria (if febrile): thick
+ folinic acid PO: 10 mg once daily for 8 weeks and thin films. or, failing that, cotrimoxazole PO at high doses:
100 mg SMX + 20 mg TMP/kg/day in 2 divided doses for 4 weeks
Lumbar puncture (LP) if
A secondary prophylaxis for life is recommended. not contra-indicated.
If the LP is positive:
• Bacterial meningitis: see Chapter 7
• Tuberculous meningitis: treat according to the national protocol
• Cryptococcal meningitis: amphotericin B by very slow IV infusion over 6 hours: 0.7 mg/kg/day for 2 weeks followed by fluconazole PO: 6 to 8 mg/kg once daily for 8 weeks
A secondary prophylaxis for life is recommended.

Good history taking as only patients with acute episodes benefit from specific aetiological treatment
(seizures, meningeal syndrome, focal signs).

Diagnosis

Aetiologies:
• Bacterial meningitis
• Tuberculous meningitis
• Cryptococcal meningitis
• Cerebral toxoplasmosis
• CMV meningo-encephalitis
• Cerebral malaria

Definitions and aetiologies

Neurological disorders in children Symptoms

HIV infection and AIDS

Definitions and aetiologies

Viral infections:
• Herpes zoster: local treatment and analgesics, see Herpes simplex and herpes zoster, Chapter 4
For necrotic, extensive forms, eruption on the face, ophthalmic zoster, add aciclovir within 48 hours of the onset of lesions:
Children (IV route): 15 to 30 mg/kg/day in 3 infusions (every 8 hours) for 7 days
Adults (oral route): 800 mg 5 times daily for 7 days
• Herpes simplex: local treatment, see Herpes simplex and herpes zoster, Chapter 4.
• Genital warts: see Chapter 9.

Bacterial infections:
• Furunculosis, impetigo, chronic folliculitis: local treatment, +/- cloxacillin PO: see Bacterial skin infections,
Chapter 4.
• Suppurative axillary hidradenitis: local treatment + doxycycline PO: 200 mg/day in 1 or 2 divided doses for 6 weeks (in adults)
• Pyomyositis: antibiotics/surgical drainage, see Pyomyositis, Chapter 10.
• Bacillary angiomatosis:
Adults: erythromycin PO 2 g/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 2 months or doxycycline PO 200 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 2 months
• Primary and secondary syphilis: see Chapter 9.

Treatment

Bed sores

Rash caused by medication

Other skin infections
• Chronic prurigo or urticaria
• Severe seborrhoeic dermatitis
• Psoriasis
• Scabies
• Diffuse cutaneous xerosis

Neoplasms
Kaposi’s sarcoma
Other skin infections:
• Prurigo, urticaria: see Other skin disorders, Chapter 4.
• Seborrhoeic dermatitis: gentian violet or Whitfield’s ointment or ketoconazole or 2% miconazole applied twice daily. For severe inflammation, use a topical corticosteroid in combination with either miconazole or ketoconazole.
• Xerosis: zinc oxide ointment or calamine lotion
• Psoriasis: corticosteroides and zinc oxide ointment
• Scabies: local treatment. For crusted or profuse scabies, add ivermectin PO (see Scabies, Chapter 4).

Fungal infections
Fungal infections:
Candidiasis, dermatophytoses and • Candidiasis: gentian violet or nystatin ointment, twice daily deep mycoses (penicilliosis,
• Dermatophytoses: see Superficial fungal infections, Chapter 4. cryptococcosis, histoplasmosis etc.)

Viral infections
• Herpes zoster
• Herpes simplex
• Genital warts
• Molluscum contagiosum

Bacterial infections
• Furunculosis
(see also Chapter 4) • Impetigo and pyoderma
• Axillary hidradenitis
• Pyomyositis
• Bacillary angiomatosis
• Syphilis

Skin lesions

Symptoms

8. Viral diseases

8

219

CHAPTER 9

Genito-urinary diseases Uro-nephrologic diseases
Urolithiasis

223

Acute cystitis

224

Acute pyelonephritis

226

Acute prostatitis

228

Genital infections (GI)

229

Urethral discharge

231

Abnormal vaginal discharge

233

Genital ulcers

236

Lower abdominal pain in women

239

Upper genital tract infections (UGTI)

240

Veneral warts

243

Major genital infections (summary)

244

Metrorrhagia

246

9

9. Genito-urinary diseases

Urolithiasis
Partial or complete obstruction of the urinary tract by one or more calculi.

Clinical features
– Acute, sometimes intense, flank or pelvic pain (renal colic).
– Haematuria, may be accompanied by the passage of a calculus.
– Urinalysis: haematuria, leucocyturia may be present.
– Secondary infections may develop: cystitis (see page 224) or pyelonephritis (see page
226).

Treatment
– Increase fluid intake: 3 to 4 litres/day
– Analgesics:
• For moderate pain: diclofenac PO: 150 mg/day in 3 divided doses for 3 days
+ hyoscine butylbromide PO: 30 to 60 mg/day in 3 divided doses for 3 days
• For renal colic: diclofenac IM: 75 mg/injection, 1 or 2 times/day for a maximum of 2 days then change to oral treatment
+ hyoscine butylbromide IM: 10 to 20 mg/injection to be repeated every 8 hours according to the clinical evolution
– In patients with infection: antibiotic treatment as for pyelonephritis (see page 226).
The effectiveness will depend on the passage of the calculus.

223

9

Acute cystitis

Acute cystitis
Cystitis is an infection of the bladder and urethra that affects mainly women and girls from 2 years of age. Escherichia coli is the causative pathogen in 70 to 95% of cases.
Other pathogens include Proteus mirabilis, enterococcus, Klebsiella spp and in young women, S. saprophyticus.

Clinical features
– Burning pain on urination and pollakiuria (passing of small quantities of urine more frequently than normal); in children: crying when passing urine; involuntary loss of urine. AND
– No fever (or mild fever), no flank pain; no systemic signs and symptoms in children
It is essential to rule out pyelonephritis (see page 226).
The symptom 'burning pain on urination' alone is insufficient to make the diagnosis. In the event of abnormal vaginal discharge, see page 233.

Laboratory
– Urine dipstick test:
Perform dipstick analysis for nitrites (which indicate the presence of enterobacteria) and leukocytes (which indicate an inflammation) in the urine.
• If dipstick analysis is negative for both nitrites and leukocytes, a urinary infection is excluded.
• If dipstick analysis is positive for nitrites and/or leukocytes, a urinary infection is likely. – Microscopy/culture: when a dipstick analysis is positive, it is recommended to carry out urine microscopy/culture in order to confirm the infection and identify the causative pathogen, particularly in children and pregnant women.
When urine microscopy is not feasible, an empirical antibiotic treatment should be administered to patients with typical signs of cystitis and positive dipstick urinalysis
(leucocytes and/or nitrites).
Note: aside of these results, in areas where urinary schistosomiasis is endemic, consider schistosomiasis in patients with macroscopic haematuria or microscopic haematuria detected by dipstick test, especially in children from 5 to 15 years, even if the patient may suffer from concomitant bacterial cystitis.

Treatment
Cystitis in girls ≥ 2 years

cefixime PO : 8 mg/kg once daily for 3 days or amoxicillin/clavulanic acid PO: 45 to 50 mg/kg/day

224

in 2 divided doses for 3 days

9. Genito-urinary diseases

Cystitis in non pregnant women
– If dipstick analysis is positive for both nitrites and leukocytes: fosfomycin-trometamine PO: 3 g as a single dose or ciprofloxacin PO: 500 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 3 days or nitrofurantoin PO (except in patients with G6PD deficiency): 300 mg/day in
3 divided doses for 5 days
– If dipstick analysis is negative for nitrites but positive for leukocytes, the infection may be due to S. saprophyticus. Fosfomycin is not active against this pathogen. Use ciprofloxacin or nitrofurantoin, as above.
– Whatever the antibiotic used, symptoms may persist for 2 to 3 days despite adequate treatment. – In the event of treatment failure (or recurrent cystitis i.e. > 3-4 episodes/year), ciprofloxacin PO: 1 g/day in 2 divided doses for 5 days
– For patients with recurrent cystitis, consider bladder stones, urinary schistosomiasis, urinary tuberculosis or gonorrhoea (examine the partner).
Cystitis in pregnant or lactating women

fosfomycine-tromethamine PO as above or cefixime PO: 400 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 5 days or nitrofurantoin PO (except in the last month of pregnancy, the first month of breastfeeding and in patients with G6PD deficiency): 300 mg/day in 3 divided doses for 5 to
7 days

9

225

Acute pyelonephritis

Acute pyelonephritis
Pyelonephritis is an acute infection of the renal parenchyma, potentially severe, especially in pregnant women, neonates and infants. The pathogens causing pyelonephritis are the same as those causing cystitis (see page 224).

Clinical features
Neonates and infants
– Symptoms are not specific: fever, irritability, vomiting, poor oral intake. Palpation of the lower abdomen may show abdominal tenderness. The absence of fever does not rule out the diagnosis. On the other hand, fever –with no obvious cause– may be the only manifestation.
– Neonates may present with fever or hypothermia, altered general condition, altered conscious state, pale/grey colour, shock.
In practice, a urinary tract infection should be suspected in children with unexplained fever or septic syndrome with no obvious focus of infection.
Older children and adults
– Signs of cystitis (burning on urination and pollakiuria, etc.)
AND
– Fever > 38.5°C and flank pain (often unilateral) or abdominal tenderness

Laboratory
See Cystitis page 224

Treatment
– Antibiotic therapy in children
• Children under one month cefotaxime IV: 150 mg/kg/day in 3 injections for 10 days or ampicillin IV: 200 mg/kg/day in 3 injections for 10 days + gentamicin IM or IV:
5 mg/kg once daily for 5 days
• Children over one month ceftriaxone IM or IV: 50 mg/kg once daily until the child's condition improves (at least 3 days), then change to oral treatment with amoxicillin/clavulanic acid PO: 45 to
50 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses or cefixime PO: 8 mg/kg once daily (for children over 3 months) to complete 10 days of treatment

226

9. Genito-urinary diseases

– Antibiotic therapy in adults
• Pyelonephritis with no signs of serious illness ciprofloxacin PO: 1 to 1.5 g/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for 7 days or cefixime PO: 400 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 10 days
• Presence of signs of serious illness (vomiting, patient seen late in disease, sepsis) or patient is in poor general condition (e.g. malnutrition, presence of other diseases) ceftriaxone IM: 1 g/once daily for at least 3 days, then change to oral treatment with cefixime PO: 400 mg/day in 2 divided doses to complete 10 to 14 days of treatment
(up to 21 days depending on clinical response)
+ gentamicin IM: 3 to 6 mg/kg once daily for 3 days (if sepsis) or, if not available: ampicillin IV: 8 g/day in 3 injections for at least 3 days + gentamicin IM: 3 to 6 mg/kg once daily for 3 days, then change to oral treatment with amoxicillin PO: 4 g/day in
2 divided doses to complete 10 to 14 days of treatment
– Treatment of fever and pain (use paracetamol rather than NSAID, see page 26).
– Maintain proper hydration (1.5 litre/day in adults), especially in children (risk of dehydration); treat dehydration if present (see page 305 to 311).
– Management of septic shock if needed.

9

227

Acute prostatitis

Acute prostatitis
Acute infection of the prostate, most commonly due to Gram negative bacteria.

Clinical features
– Signs of cystitis (burning on urination and urinary frequency) with fever in men, perineal pain is common.
– Very painful rectal examination.
– Urinalysis: leucocyturia and pyuria; haematuria may be present.

Treatment
Difficult, the infection may become chronic.
– Increase fluid intake: 3 to 4 litres/day
– Fever (see page 26) and pain (see page 29)
– Prolonged antibiotic treatment: ciprofloxacin PO: 1 g/day in 2 divided doses for 28 days

228

9. Genito-urinary diseases

Genital infections (GI)
The diagnosis and treatment of genital infections present several difficulties: clinical features are not specific; many infections are asymptomatic; laboratory tests available in the field are not always reliable; mixed infections are common; partners need to be treated simultaneously in case of sexually transmitted infections1 and the risk of recurrence or treatment failure is increased in HIV-infected patients.
Thus, the WHO has introduced the syndromic management of GI and developed standardised case management flowcharts: based on the identification of consistent groups of signs and symptoms (syndromes), patients are treated for the pathogens/ infections2 that may cause each syndrome.
Look for a genital infection if a patient complains of:

See

Urethral discharge
Painful or difficult urination (dysuria)

Urethral discharge, page 231

Abnormal vaginal discharge
Vulvar itching/burning
Pain with intercourse (dyspareunia)
Painful or difficult urination (dysuria)

Abnormal vaginal discharge, page 233

Genital blisters or sores
Burning sensation in the vulva or perineum

Genital ulcers, page 236

Skin growths in the genital (or anal) area

Venereal warts, page 243

Lower abdominal pain (in women)

Lower abdominal pain, page 239
Upper genital tract infections, page 240

Basic principles of GI management:
– The patient can be effectively treated without laboratory testing. Some tests may help in diagnosing vaginal and urethral discharge, but they should never delay treatment
(results should be available within one hour).
– The patient should be treated at his/her first encounter with the health care provider
(no patient should be sent home without treatment, e.g. while waiting for laboratory results). – Single dose regimens are preferred when indicated.
– In the case of urethral discharge, abnormal vaginal discharge (except candidiasis), genital ulcers (except herpes) and sexually transmitted upper genital tract infection, the sexual partner should receive a treatment. In the case of candidiasis, genital herpes and venereal warts, the partner is treated only if symptomatic.
– Patients with sexually transmitted infections should receive information on their disease(s) and treatment and be counselled on risk reduction and HIV testing.
Condoms should be provided for the duration of treatment.
1 Genital infections may be sexually transmitted (e.g. gonorrhoea, chlamydia) or not (e.g. most cases of

candidiasis).

2 Keep in mind that in Schistosoma haematobium endemic areas, genital symptoms may also be due to, or

associated with, genitourinary schistosomiasis (see page 151).

229

9

Genital infections (GI)

Special situation: sexual violence
Taking into consideration the physical, psychological, legal and social consequences of sexual violence, medical care is not limited to the diagnosis and treatment of genital lesions or infections.
Care includes listening to the victim’s story, a complete physical examination, laboratory tests if available, and completion of a medical certificate (see Practical advice for writing medical certificates in the event of sexual violence, page 312).
During the consultation, prophylactic or curative treatments must be proposed to the patient. – Prophylactic treatment:
• priority is given to the risk of HIV transmission (earliest possible antiviral therapy for patients seen within 48-72 hours after exposure, see HIV infection and AIDS, page 207) and to the risk of pregnancy resulting from rape (administer emergency contraception as soon as possible, ideally within 72 hours of exposure: levonorgestrel PO: one 1500 µg tablet or two 750 µg tablets as a single dose)3;
• prevention of sexually transmitted infections includes a single dose treatment with azithromycin 1 g + cefixime 400 mg. If necessary, treatment of trichomoniasis may follow; • tetanus prophylaxis and/or vaccination (see Tetanus, page 170) if there are any wounds; • vaccination against hepatitis B (see Viral hepatitis, accelerated vaccination schedule, page 200).
– Curative treatment:
• of wounds,
• of any related pathologies/infections if the assault is not recent.
Mental health care is necessary irrespective of any delay between the event and the patient arriving for a consultation. Care is based on immediate attention (one-on-one reception and listening) and if necessary, follow-up care with a view to detecting and treating any psychological and/or psychiatric sequelae (anxiety, depression, posttraumatic stress disorder, etc.).

3 Genital infections may be sexually transmitted (e.g. gonorrhoea, chlamydia) or not (e.g. most cases of

candidiasis).

230

9. Genito-urinary diseases

Urethral discharge
Urethral discharge is seen almost exclusively in men. The principal causative organisms are Neisseria gonorrhoeae (gonorrhoea) and Chlamydia trachomatis (chlamydia).
The presence of abnormal discharge should be confirmed by performing a clinical examination1. In males, the urethra should be milked gently if no discharge is visible.
Furthermore, specifically check for urethral discharge in patients complaining of painful or difficult urination (dysuria).

Case management
The patient complains of urethral discharge or dysuria

Take history and examine

Urethral discharge is present? YES

Treat for gonorrhoea
AND
chlamydia

NO

Another genital condition is present?

NO

Reassess the patient if symptoms persist

YES

9

Administer appropriate treatment

Laboratory
– C. trachomatis cannot easily be identified in a field laboratory. In the absence of validated rapid diagnostic tests, the treatment is empiric.
– In men, a methylene blue or Gram stained smear from a urethral swab may be used to detect gonococci (Gram negative intracellular diplococci).

1 In areas where lymphatic filariasis is endemic, be careful not to confuse purulent urethral discharge with milky or

rice-water urine (chyluria) suggestive of lymphatic filariasis.

231

Urethral discharge

Treatment of the patient
– In men:
• If microscopy of a urethral smear has been performed: in the absence of gonococci, treat for chlamydia alone; in the presence of gonococci, treat for chlamydia AND gonorrhoea. • When no laboratory is available, treat for chlamydia AND gonorrhoea.
– In women:
Treat for chlamydia AND gonorrhoea.
Men and non-pregnant women
Treatment for chlamydia azithromycin PO:

Treatment for gonorrhoea

1 g as a single dose

PLUS

or

cefixime PO:

400 mg as a single dose

or

doxycycline PO:

ceftriaxone IM:

200 mg/day in
2 divided doses for 7 days

250 mg as a single dose

or

spectinomycin IM:

2 g as a single dose

Pregnant women azithromycin PO:

1 g as a single dose

or

erythromycin PO:

2 g/day in
2 or 4 divided doses for 7 days

PLUS

cefixime PO:

400 mg as a single dose

or

ceftriaxone IM:

250 mg as a single dose

If urethral discharge persists or reappears after 7 days:
– Verify that the patient has received an effective treatment (i.e. one of the combinations above).
– Gonococcal resistance is a possibility if another treatment (e.g. cotrimoxazole or kanamycin) has been administered: re-treat for gonorrhoea as above (chlamydia is rarely resistant).
– If an effective antibiotic therapy has been given, consider trichomoniasis (tinidazole or metronidazole PO, 2 g as a single dose); also consider re-infection.

Treatment of the partner
The sexual partner receives the same treatment as the patient, whether or not symptoms are present.

232

9. Genito-urinary diseases

Abnormal vaginal discharge

Abnormal vaginal discharge is defined as discharge that differs from usual with respect to colour/odour/consistency (e.g. discoloured or purulent or malodorous).
Abnormal discharge is often associated with vulvar pruritus or pain with intercourse
(dyspareunia), or painful or difficult urination (dysuria) or lower abdominal pain.
Routinely check for abnormal vaginal discharge in women presenting with these symptoms. Abnormal vaginal discharge may be a sign of infection of the vagina (vaginitis) and/or the cervix (cervicitis) or upper genital tract infection.
The presence of abnormal discharge must be confirmed by performing a clinical examination: inspection of the vulva, speculum exam (checking for cervical/vaginal inflammation or discharge).
Abdominal and bimanual pelvic examinations should be performed routinely in all women presenting with vaginal discharge to rule out upper genital tract infection
(lower abdominal pain and cervical motion tenderness).
The principal causative organisms are:
– In vaginitis: Gardnerella vaginalis and other bacteria (bacterial vaginosis), Trichomonas vaginalis (trichomoniasis) and Candida albicans (candidiasis).
– In cervicitis: Neisseria gonorrhoeae (gonorrhoea) and Chlamydia trachomatis
(chlamydia).
– In upper genital tract infections: see page 240.

9

Case management
See algorithm, following page.

Laboratory
– Tests usually available in the field can only identify causes of vaginitis, and thus are of limited usefulness.
Microscopic examination of a fresh wet smear may show mobile T. vaginalis, yeast cells and hyphae in candidiasis, and “clue cells” in bacterial vaginosis.
– Identification of N. gonorrhoeae by Gram stained smear is not sensitive in women and is not recommended.

233

Abnormal vaginal discharge

Case management
Patient complains of vaginal discharge or vulvar itching/burning, etc. Take history, examine and assess risk factors

Abnormal discharge is present?

NO

Look for another genital disorder.
If present, treat appropriately. If not, reassure the patient.

YES

Lower abdominal pain or cervical motion tenderness?

YES

See Lower abdominal pain, page 239

NO

Risk assessment positive
(see below)
OR
purulent cervical discharge detected?

YES

Treat for cervicitis
AND bacterial vaginosis
AND trichomoniasis

NO

Treat for bacterial vaginosis AND trichomoniasis

Vulvar oedema, thick discharge, erythema, excoriations present?

YES

In addition, treat for candidiasis Cervicitis may be difficult to diagnose. When in doubt, administer treatment for cervicitis to women with abnormal vaginal discharge and any of the following risk factors: – Urethral discharge in the partner
– Context of sexual violence or prostitution
– New partner or more than one partner in the preceding 3 months

234

9. Genito-urinary diseases

Treatment of the patient
– Cervicitis
Treat for both chlamydia AND gonorrhoea.
Non-pregnant women
Treatment for chlamydia azithromycin PO:

Treatment for gonorrhoea

1 g as a single dose

PLUS

or

cefixime PO:

400 mg as a single dose

or

doxycycline PO:

ceftriaxone IM:

200 mg/day in
2 divided doses for 7 days

250 mg as a single dose

or

spectinomycin IM:

2 g as a single dose

Pregnant women azithromycin PO:

1 g as a single dose

PLUS

or

cefixime PO:

400 mg as a single dose

or

erythromycin PO:

ceftriaxone IM:

2 g/day in
2 or 4 divided doses for 7 days

250 mg as a single dose

– Bacterial vaginosis and trichomoniasis tinidazole PO: 2 g as a single dose or metronidazole PO: 2 g as a single

dose

In the case of treatment failure: tinidazole PO: 1 g/day in 2 divided doses for 5 days or metronidazole PO: 800 to 1000 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 7 days
– Vulvovaginal candidiasis

clotrimazole (500 mg vaginal tablet): 1 tablet as a single dose, inserted deep into the vagina at bedtime or, if not available, clotrimazole (200 mg vaginal tablet): one tablet inserted deep into the vagina at bedtime for 3 days or nystatin (100,000 IU vaginal tablet): one tablet inserted deep into the vagina at bedtime for 14 days

If the patient has extensive vulvar involvement, miconazole 2% cream (2 applications to the vulva daily for 7 days) may be used in combination with the intravaginal treatment above. Miconazole cream may complement, but does not replace, treatment with clotrimazole.

Treatment of the partner
When the patient is treated for vaginitis or cervicitis, the sexual partner receives the same treatment as the patient, whether or not symptoms are present.
In the case of vulvovaginal candidiasis, the partner is treated only if symptomatic
(itching and redness of the glans/prepuce): miconazole 2%, 2 applications daily for
7 days.

235

9

Genital ulcers

Genital ulcers
Genital ulcers, defined as single or multiple vesicular, ulcerative or erosive lesions of the genital tract, with or without inguinal lymphadenopathy, should lead to consideration of sexually transmitted infection.
The principal causative organisms are Treponema pallidum (syphilis), Haemophilus ducreyi
(chancroid) and Herpes simplex (genital herpes). Chlamydia trachomatis (lymphogranuloma venereum) and Calymmatobacterium granulomatis (donovanosis)1 are less frequent.

Case management
Patient complains of genital sore or ulcer

Take history and examine

Sore/ulcer/vesicle is present?

NO

YES

Small painful vesicles, sometimes in clusters, or small ulcers with history of recurrent vesicles?

YES

Look for another genital disorder. If present, treat appropriately. If not, reassure the patient.

Treat for genital herpes

NO

– Treat for syphilis AND chancroid
– In endemic areas, also treat for lymphogranuloma venereum AND/OR donovanosis
– Refer if necessary

Laboratory
Laboratory testing available in the field is of little value: e.g., in syphilis, a negative RPR or VDRL result does not exclude primary syphilis in early stage, and a positive test may reflect previous infection in a successfully treated patient.

1 Lymphogranuloma venereum is endemic in East and West Africa, India, Southeast Asia, South America and the

Caribbean. Donovanosis is endemic in South Africa, Papua New Guinea, India, Brazil and the Caribbean.

236

9. Genito-urinary diseases

Treatment of the patient
– Genital herpes

• Local treatment: clean the area with soap and water, 0.5% gentian violet can be applied for 5 days.

• Antiviral treatment: aciclovir PO
In patients with a first episode, treatment may reduce the duration of symptom when given within 5 days after the onset of symptoms: 1200 mg/day in 3 divided doses for 7 days
In patients with recurrence, give the same dose for 5 days, but treatment is only effective if initiated during the prodromal phase or within 24 hours after the onset of symptoms.
In patients with frequent recurrences (more than 6 episodes/year), see HIV infection and AIDS, page 212.
• Treatment of pain: paracetamol PO
– Syphilis

benzathine benzylpenicillin IM: 2.4 MIU as a single dose (half the dose in each buttock) or, for penicillin-allergic patients: doxycycline PO: 200 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 14 days2 or erythromycin PO: 2 g/day in 2 or 4 divided doses for 14 days

– Chancroid

azithromycin PO:

1 g as a single dose

or

ceftriaxone IM:

250 mg as a single dose

or

ciprofloxacin PO:

1 g/day in 2 divided doses for 3 days3

or

erythromycin PO:

2 g/day in 2 or 4 divided doses for 7 days

Fluctuant lymph nodes may be aspirated through healthy skin as required. Do not incise and drain lymph nodes.
Note: treat simultaneously for syphilis AND chancroid as both are frequent, and cannot be correctly distinguished on clinical grounds.
– Lymphogranuloma venereum doxycyclin PO:

200 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 14 days2

or

erythromycin PO:

2 g/day in 2 or 4 divided doses for 14 days

Fluctuant lymph nodes may be aspirated through healthy skin as required. Do not incise and drain lymph nodes.

2 Doxycycline is contra-indicated in pregnant women and breast-feeding women.
3 Ciprofloxacin should be avoided in pregnant women.

237

9

Genital ulcers

– Donovanosis
Treatment is given for a minimum of 14 days, longer if necessary, until the complete disappearance of the lesions (otherwise risk of recurrence): azithromycin PO: 1 g the first day then, 500 mg once daily or doxycyline PO: 200 mg/day in 2 divided doses4 or erythromycin PO: 2 g/day in 2 or 4 divided doses
In HIV infected patients, add gentamicin IM: 3 to 6 mg/kg/day in 1 or 2 injections.

Treatment of the partner
The sexual partner receives the same treatment as the patient, whether or not symptoms are present, except in the case of genital herpes (the partner is treated only if symptomatic). 4 Doxycycline is contra-indicated in pregnant women and breast-feeding women.

238

9. Genito-urinary diseases

Lower abdominal pain in women
Upper genital tract infection (see page 240) should be suspected in women with lower abdominal pain.
Gynaecological examination should be routinely performed:
– Inspection of the vulva, speculum examination: check for purulent discharge or inflammation, and
– Abdominal exam and bimanual pelvic exam: check for pain on mobilising the cervix.

Case management
Patient complains of lower abdominal pain

Following delivery or abortion? YES

See Post-partum/abortum UGTI, page 240

NO

Take history and examine Any of the following present? – Amenorrhoea
– Abnormal vaginal bleeding – Abdominal guarding or rebound tenderness

YES

Request gynaecological/surgical consultation**

NO

Is there cervical motion tenderness or abnormal vaginal discharge?

NO

YES

YES

Manage appropriately See Sexually transmitted
UGTI, page 240.
Review in 3 days.

Patient has improved?

Any other illness found*?

NO

Refer patient

YES

Continue treatment until completed
* Look for another cause (in particular, gastrointestinal or urinary pathology).
** Look for a pregnancy related pathology (threatened abortion, extra-uterine pregnancy) or a complication (peritonitis, pelvic abscess).
239

9

Upper genital tract infections (UGTI)

Upper genital tract infections
(UGTI)
Upper genital tract infections are bacterial infections of the uterus (endometritis) and/or the fallopian tubes (salpingitis), which may be complicated by peritonitis, pelvic abscess or septicaemia.
UGTI may be sexually transmitted or arise after childbirth or abortion. Antibiotic choices are directed by the most common pathogens in each scenario.
If peritonitis or pelvic abscess is suspected, request a surgical opinion while initiating antibiotic therapy.

Clinical features
Sexually transmitted infections
Diagnosis may be difficult, as clinical presentation is variable.
– Suggestive symptoms are: abdominal pain, abnormal vaginal discharge, fever, dyspareunia, menometrorrhagia, dysuria.
– Infection is probable when one or more of the above symptoms are associated with one or more of the following signs: cervical motion tenderness, adnexal tenderness, tender abdominal mass.
Infections after childbirth or abortion
– Most cases present with a typical clinical picture, developing within 2 to 10 days after delivery (caesarean section or vaginal delivery) or abortion (spontaneous or induced):
• Fever, generally high
• Abdominal or pelvic pain
• Malodorous or purulent lochia
• Enlarged, soft and/or tender uterus
– Check for retained placenta.
– In the early stages, fever may be absent or moderate and abdominal pain may be mild. Treatment
– Criteria for hospitalisation include:
• Clinical suspicion of severe or complicated infection (e.g. peritonitis, abscess, septicaemia) • Diagnostic uncertainty (e.g. suspicion of extra-uterine pregnancy, appendicitis)
• Significant obstacles to ambulatory oral treatment
• No improvement after 48 hours, or deterioration within 48 hours, of outpatient treatment – All other patients may be treated on an ambulatory basis. They should be reassessed routinely on the third day of treatment to evaluate clinical improvement (decrease in
240

9. Genito-urinary diseases

pain, absence of fever). If it is difficult to organise routine follow-up, advise patients to return to clinic if there is no improvement after 48 hours of treatment, or sooner if their condition is worsening.
Sexually transmitted infections
– Antibiotic therapy combines 3 antibiotics to cover the most frequent causative organisms: gonococci, chlamydiae, and anaerobes.
• Ambulatory treatment: cefixime PO: 400 mg as a single dose or ceftriaxone IM: 250 mg as a single dose
+ doxycycline PO: 200 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 14 days1
+ metronidazole PO: 1 g/day in 2 divided doses for 14 days
• Treatment in hospital: ceftriaxone IM: 250 mg/day once daily
+ doxycycline PO: 200 mg/day in 2 divided doses for 14 days1
+ metronidazole PO or IV: 1 g/day in 2 divided doses or infusions for 14 days
Continue triple therapy for 24 to 48 hours after signs and symptoms have improved (resolution of fever, decrease in pain), then continue doxycycline (or erythromycin) + metronidazole to complete 14 days of treatment.
– If an IUD is in place, it should be removed (offer another method of contraception).
– Analgesic treatment according to pain intensity.
– Treatment of the partner: single dose treatment for both gonorrhoea AND chlamydia
(as for Urethral discharge, page 231), whether or not symptoms are present.
Infections after childbirth or abortion
– Antibiotic therapy: treatment must cover the most frequent causative organisms: anaerobes, Gram negatives and streptococci.
• Ambulatory treatment (early stages only): amoxicillin/clavulanic acid (co-amoxiclav) PO (dose expressed in amoxicillin):
3 g/day in 3 divided doses for 7 days or amoxicillin PO: 3 g/day in 3 divided doses + metronidazole PO: 1.5 g/day in
3 divided doses for 7 days
• Treatment in hospital: amoxicillin/clavulanic acid (co-amoxiclav) IV (dose expressed in amoxicillin):
3 g/day in 3 injections + gentamicin IM: 5 mg/kg once daily or ampicillin IV: 6 g/day in 3 injections
+ metronidazole IV: 1.5 g/day in 3 infusions
+ gentamicin IM: 5 mg/kg once daily
Once the patient’s condition has improved and oral treatment can be tolerated, coamoxiclav or amoxicillin + metronidazole may be given PO (as for ambulatory treatment). Stop antibiotic therapy 48 hours after resolution of fever and improvement in pain.

1 In pregnant/breastfeeding women: erythromycin PO: 2 g/day in 2 to 4 divided doses for 14 days

Single dose azithromycin is not effective against chlamydia in the treatment of sexually transmitted UGTI.
241

9

Upper genital tract infections (UGTI)

In penicillin-allergic patients, use clindamycin (2700 mg/day in 3 divided doses or injections) + gentamicin (5 mg/kg once daily).
– In case of placental retention: perform digital curettage or manual vacuum extraction
(refer to the MSF handbook Obstetrics) 24 hours after initiation of antibiotic therapy.
– Analgesic treatment according to pain intensity.
– If the patient’s condition deteriorates or if fever persists after 48-72 hours of treatment, consider the possibility of complication requiring additional treatment
(e.g. pelvic abscess drainage), otherwise change the antibiotic to ceftriaxone
+ doxycycline + metronidazole as in hospital-based treatment of sexually transmitted
UGTI.

242

9. Genito-urinary diseases

Veneral warts
Venereal warts are benign tumours of the skin or mucous membranes due to certain papilloma viruses (HPV).

Clinical features
– Venereal warts are soft, raised, painless growths, sometimes clustered (cauliflowerlike appearance) or macules (flat warts), which are more difficult to discern. Warts can be external (vulva, penis, scrotum, perineum, anus) and/or internal (vagina, cervix, urethra, rectum; oral cavity in HIV infected patients).
– In women, the presence of external warts is an indication for a speculum examination to exclude vaginal or cervical warts. Speculum exam may reveal a friable, fungating tumour on the cervix, suggestive of cancer associated with papilloma virus1.

Treatment
Choice of treatment depends on the size and location of the warts. Treatment may be less effective, and relapses more frequent, in HIV infected patients.
External warts < 3 cm and vaginal warts podophyllotoxin 0.5%2 solution may be self-applied by the patient, but in the event of vaginal warts, the treatment must be applied by medical staff.
Explain the procedure to the patient: apply the solution to the warts using an applicator or cotton bud, sparing the surrounding healthy skin, allow to air dry.
On vaginal warts, the solution should be allowed to dry before the speculum is withdrawn. Apply the solution twice daily, 3 consecutive days per week, for up to 4 weeks.
Podophyllum preparations are contra-indicated in pregnant3 or breastfeeding women.
They should not be applied on cervical, intra-urethral, rectal, oral or extensive warts.
Improper use may result in painful ulceration.
External warts > 3 cm; cervical, intra-urethral, rectal and oral warts; warts in pregnant or breastfeeding women
Surgical excision or cryotherapy or electrocoagulation.

1 Certain types of HPV may cause cancer. Presence of genital warts in women is an indication to screen for

pre-cancerous lesions of the cervix, if feasible in the context (visual inspection with acetic acid, or cervical smear, or other available techniques), and to treat any lesions identified (cryotherapy, conisation, etc., according to diagnosis).
2 Podophyllum 10%, 15% or 25% resin is another preparation which is much more caustic, and should be applied only by medical staff. Protect the surrounding skin (vaseline or zinc oxide ointment) before applying the resin.
Wash off with soap and water after 1 to 4 hours. Apply once weekly for 4 weeks.
3 Treatment of warts is not an emergency and may be deferred if alternatives to podophyllum preparations are not available. Genital warts are not an indication for caesarean section: it is uncommon for warts to interfere with delivery, and the risk of mother-to-child transmission is very low.
243

9

244

– In women: yellow-green vaginal discharge, sometimes – Wet mount of fresh vaginal fluid foul smelling, vulvar irritation (10 to 50% of infections shows motile trichomonas (low are asymptomatic). sensitivity). – In men: most infections are asymptomatic. Can
– pH of urethral/vaginal fluid > 4.5 produce balanitis, urethritis with mild discharge and sometimes dysuria.

Diagnosis is made in the presence of 3 of the following 4 signs:
– Homogenous grey-white adherent vaginal discharge
– pH of vaginal fluid > 4.5
– Vaginal fluid has an amine (fishy) odour, especially when mixed with 10% KOH
– Presence of clue cells in wet mount or Gram stain of vaginal fluid

– Mainly seen in women: pruritus and vulvovaginitis, – Saline of KOH wet mount of fresh frequently creamy-white vaginal discharge, somevaginal fluid shows budding yeast times dysuria. cells and pseudohyphae.
– In men: balanitis/balanoposthitis (inflammation of – pH of vaginal fluid: normal the glans/prepuce, erythema, pruritus, white pustules) and rarely urethritis

Trichomonas vaginalis (trichomoniasis)

Bacterial vaginosis (Gardnerella vaginalis and other associated bacteria)

Candida albicans (candidiasis)

The best method is PCR (not feasible under field conditions).

– In women:
• vaginal discharge, cervicitis, and rarely dysuria
(> 50% of infections are asymptomatic);
• UGTI (salpingitis, endometritis).
– In men: mild urethral discharge and/or dysuria but up to 90% of infections are asymptomatic.

Chlamydia trachomatis (chlamydia)

– In women: not valid (not sensitive).
– In men: Gram or methylene blue stain: intracellular diplococci and polymorphonuclear leucocytes
(more than 4 per field).

Laboratory

– In women:
• vaginal discharge, cervicitis (mucopurulent cervical discharge), dysuria (50% of infections are asymptomatic); • UGTI (salpingitis, endometritis).
– In men: purulent urethral discharge and sometimes dysuria (5 to 50% of infections are asymptomatic).

Clinical features

Neisseria gonorrhoeae (gonorrhoea)

Pathogens/
Infections

Major genital infections (summary)

a single dose or clotrimazole 200 mg: one vaginal tablet/day for 3 days or nystatin 100,000 IU: one vaginal tablet/day for 14 days
– In men: miconazole 2% cream: 2 applications daily for 7 days

– In women:

clotrimazole 500 mg: one vaginal tablet as

dose

tinidazole or metronidazole PO: 2 g as a single

dose

tinidazole or metronidazole PO: 2 g as a single

In case of UGTI, see page 240.

azithromycin PO: 1 g as a single dose or doxycycline PO1: 200 mg/day for 7 days
Treat also for gonococcal infection (except when a Gram stain in males shows no
N. gonorrhoeae).

In case of UGTI, see page 240.

cefixime PO: 400 mg as a single dose or ceftriaxone IM: 250 mg as a single dose
Treat also for chlamydia.

Treatment

Major genital infections (summary)

H. ducreyi bacillus is difficult to identify on microscopy or by culture.

The diagnosis is based on clinical
– External warts < 3 cm and vaginal warts: features. podophyllotoxin 0.5%
It feasible in the context, the presence of – External warts > 3 cm ; cervical, intragenital warts in women in an indication urethral, rectal and oral warts; warts in to screen for pre-cancerous lesions of the pregnant or breastfeeding women: surgical cervix (visual inspection with acetic excision or cryotherapy or electrocoagulation. acid, or cervical smear, or other available techniques).

Painful single (or multiple) genital ulcer (soft chancre, bleeds easily when touched).
Painful and voluminous inguinal lymphadenitis in 50%.
Fistulae develop in 25% of cases.

Soft, raised, painless growths, sometimes clustered
(acuminate condyloma) or macules (flat warts). Warts can be external (vulva, penis, scrotum, perineum, anus) and/or internal (vagina, cervix, urethra, rectum; oral cavity in HIV infected patients).

Haemophylus ducreyi (chancroid)

Human papillomavirus (venereal warts) 2 Ciprofloxacin should be avoided in pregnant women.

erythromycin).

1 Doxycycline is contra-indicated in pregnant women. It should not be administered to breast-feeding women if the treatment exceeds 7 days (use

azithromycin PO: 1 g as a single dose or ceftriaxone IM: 250 mg as a single dose or ciprofloxacin PO2: 1 g/day for 3 days or erythromycin PO: 2 g/day for 7 days
Treat also for syphillis.

benzathine benzylpenicillin IM:
2.4 MIU as a single dose
For penicillin-allergic patients: doxycycline PO1:
200 mg/day for 14 days or erythromycin PO:
2 g/day for 14 days
Treat also for chancroid.

RPR/VDRL lack sensitivity and specificity, but may be useful for following treatment effectiveness
(decrease in titer) or confirming reinfection (rise in titer).
Treponemic tests (TPHA, FTA, rapid tests such as SD Bioline®) are more sensitive and specific.

Single firm painless genital ulcer, often unnoticed.

Analgesics, local disinfection.
If available, aciclovir PO:
– Primary episode: 1200 mg/day for 7 days, given within 5 days after onset of lesions.
– Recurrent infections: same dose for 5 days, given within 24 hours after onset of lesions.

Treatment

Treponema pallidum (syphilis)

Laboratory

Many asymptomatic carriers. Multiple vesicles on
Diagnosis by culture, serology and genitals leading to painful ulcerations.
PCR done exclusively at a reference
In women, affects vulva, vagina and cervix; in males, laboratory. penis and sometimes urethra.
In primary episodes, fever (30%) and lymphadenopathy
(50%). Recurrences in 1/3 of infections with shorter and milder symptoms.

Clinical features

Herpes simplex virus type 2
(genital
herpes)

Pathogens/
Infections

9. Genito-urinary diseases

9

245

Metrorrhagia

Metrorrhagia
Genital bleeding unrelated to the menstrual period. In women of childbearing age, always assess if the bleeding is related to a pregnancy.

In all events
– Rapidly assess the severity of bleeding.
– In the event of heavy haemorrhage or shock or if a surgical intervention (laparotomy, caesarean delivery) is required:
• Start an IV infusion of Ringer lactate; monitor vital signs (pulse, BP);
• Prepare for a possible blood transfusion (determine patient's group, identify potential donors);
• If a transfusion is performed, only use blood that has been screened at least for
HIV, hepatitis B, and hepatitis C.
– In the event of referral to a surgical facility, difficult transport conditions might aggravate the haemorrhage: the patient should be infused and accompanied by family members who are potential blood donors.
– Ultrasound is not imperative but it facilitates certain diagnoses (e.g. ectopic pregnancy, placenta praevia).
– Prevent or treat anaemia.

Bleeding unrelated to pregnancy
– Bimanual pelvic examination and speculum examination:
• determine the origin of the bleeding [vagina, cervix, uterine cavity]; appearance of the cervix;
• look for uterine motion tenderness, increased volume or abnormalities of the uterus. – Friable, hard, ulcerated, hypertrophic mass on the cervix: possible cervical cancer
(surgical treatment).
– Inflammation of the cervix, light bleeding, purulent cervical discharge, moderate or no pelvic pain, no fever: cervicitis (see Abnormal vaginal discharge, page 233).
– Inflammation of the cervix, uterine motion tenderness, purulent cervical discharge, bleeding light to moderate, pelvic pain, with or without fever: salpingitis (see Upper genital tract infections, page 240).
– Enlarged, misshapen uterus: uterine fibroids (only consider surgery if large fibroids cause significant bleeding).
– Normal uterus and cervix: consider poorly tolerated contraceptives; endometrial cancer (particularly in postmenopausal women); urinary schistosomiasis in subSaharan Africa (page 151).

246

9. Genito-urinary diseases

Bleeding during the first half of pregnancy
The two diagnoses to firstly consider are ectopic pregnancy and abortion.

Ectopic pregnancy
Pregnancy that develops outside the uterus, very often in a fallopian tube. Ectopic pregnancy should be suspected in any woman of reproductive age with pelvic pain and/or metrorrhagia. There are many possible clinical presentations and these can mislead diagnosis towards appendicitis, intestinal obstruction, salpingitis or abortion.
The major risk of ectopic pregnancy is rupture, leading to intra abdominal haemorrhage. Clinical signs and diagnosis
– Amenorrhoea (may be absent) or menstrual irregularity.
– Dark slight bleeding or light to heavy bright red bleeding; or haemorrhagic shock with light bleeding not corresponding to the severity of shock (intra-abdominal haemorrhage). – Pelvic pain; sometimes distended abdomen, rebound tenderness.
– On pelvic examination: tender adnexal mass; exquisite pain in the Pouch of Douglas
(haemoperitoneum); closed cervix.
– The diagnosis of pregnancy is confirmed by a positive rapid pregnancy test (urinary test) but a negative test does not rule out an ectopic pregnancy.
– If ultrasound is available, the presence of an intra-uterine pregnancy eliminates the diagnosis of an ectopic pregnancy. If ultrasound shows an empty uterus together with intra peritoneal effusion, an ectopic pregnancy is likely, especially if the pregnancy test is positive.
Management
If in doubt (negative pregnancy test, no sign of rupture and stable haemodynamic conditions), hospitalise the patient for surveillance, if possible in a surgical facility.
Otherwise, refer immediately for emergency laparotomy.

9

Threatened abortion
Clinical signs
In a context of amenorrhoea: slight, bright red bleeding; pelvic pain; closed cervix.
Management
– Look for foreign bodies or vaginal wound consistent with induced abortion; remove foreign bodies, clean the wound; update tetanus immunization (page 170).
– Treat pain: paracetamol or antispasmodics PO.
– Place the patient on rest.

Abortion
Clinical signs
Slight or significant bright red bleeding; expulsion of the embryo, membranes or products; uterine contractions; open cervix.

247

Metrorrhagia

Management
– Look for foreign bodies or vaginal wound consistent with induced abortion; remove foreign bodies, clean the wound; update tetanus immunization (page 170).
– Treat pain: paracetamol or antispasmodics.
– Depending on the stage of pregnancy:
Before 10 weeks of pregnancy: abortion is likely to be complete. Monitor, only intervene in the event of heavy bleeding (aspiration).
Between 10 and 12 weeks of pregnancy: uterine evacuation is often necessary.
• Manual vacuum aspiration is the method of choice (easier to perform, less traumatic and less painful than curettage).
• Administration of misoprostol (600 µg PO as a single dose) can be used to avoid instrumental evacuation but carries a risk of failure. It is essential to check if the uterus is empty a few days after administration. If the treatment has failed, instrumental evacuation is unavoidable.
After 12 weeks of pregnancy: labour should be allowed to progress, do not rupture the membranes. The placenta is usually evacuated with the foetus. If evacuation is incomplete or in the event of haemorrhage, perform manual removal immediately after the expulsion, before the uterus retracts or the cervix closes. If manual removal is delayed, curettage must be performed which carries a high risk of uterine perforation. – In the event of post-abortion infection (pelvic pain, uterine tenderness, foul-smelling vaginal discharge): antibiotic treatment, see Upper genital tract infections, page 241.

Bleeding during the second half of pregnancy
Three conditions –placenta praevia, abruptio placentae, and uterine rupture–can quickly become life-threatening to both mother and child. These conditions must be referred to surgical facilities.
When no cause for the bleeding is found, consider the possibility of premature labour.

Placenta praevia
Placenta that covers either entirely or partially the internal os of the cervix. Placenta praevia may give rise to bleeding during the third trimester and carries a high risk of haemorrhage during delivery.
Clinical signs and diagnosis
– Sudden, painless, slight or significant bright red bleeding.
– The vaginal exam must be done with extreme care to avoid triggering massive bleeding: uterus is soft; the exam may reveal displacement of the cervix and deformation of the lower uterine segment by the placenta praevia; if the cervix is dilated, the placenta can be felt in the cervix. Do not repeat the examination.
– If ultrasound is available, vaginal examination can be avoided.
Management
– If labour has not yet started and bleeding is light: bed rest and monitoring.
– If labour has started and/or bleeding is heavy: refer to surgical facility.

248

9. Genito-urinary diseases

Abruptio placenta
Haematoma that forms between the placenta and the uterine wall as a result of separation of the placenta, prior to foetal expulsion.
Clinical signs
– Dark slight bleeding, sometimes absent, or shock not always consistent with the external blood loss as bleeding is internal.
– Sudden, severe, continuous abdominal pain.
– Tightly contracted uterus; often, foetal heart sounds absent (foetal death).
– Often occurs in a context of pre-eclampsia.
Management
Refer to surgical facility.

Uterine rupture
Tear in the uterine wall, in most cases during labour, often related to inappropriate use of oxytocin.
Clinical signs
– Impending rupture: prolonged labour, agitation, alteration of the general state, poor uterine relaxation, continuous abdominal pain, more severe than the contractions.
– Rupture: disappearance of uterine contractions, shock; sometimes, palpation of the dead foetus expelled into the maternal abdomen.
Management
Refer to surgical facility for emergency laparotomy.

Premature labour
Clinical signs
Cervical changes (effacement and dilatation) and regular uterine contractions before
37 weeks LMP. Metrorrhagia are not always present in premature labour. If present, blood loss is usually minimal.
Management
– Strict bed rest.
– Allow labour to progress in the following cases: gestation is more than 37 weeks; the cervix is more than 3-4 cm dilated; there is significant bleeding; the foetus is distressed or dead; there is amnionitis or pre-eclampsia.
– Otherwise, tocolysis:
As first-line treatment, nifedipine PO (short-acting capsule): 10 mg by oral route, to be repeated every 15 minutes if uterine contractions persist (maximum 4 doses or
40 mg), then 20 mg every 6 hours for 48 hours.

249

9

Metrorrhagia

or, if not available, salbutamol IV infusion for 48 hours maximum: dilute 5 mg (10 ampoules of 0.5 mg) in
500 ml of 5% glucose or 0.9% sodium chloride to obtain a solution of
10 micrograms/ml.
Start infusion at the rate of 15 to 20 micrograms/minute (30 to 40 drops/minute).
If contractions persist, increase the rate by 10 to 20 drops/minute every 30 minutes until uterine contractions cease. Do not exceed 45 micrograms/minute
(90 drops/minute).
Continue for one hour after contractions have ceased, then reduce the rate by half every 6 hours.
Monitor maternal pulse regularly, decrease the infusion rate in the event of maternal tachycardia (> 120/minute).
Do not combine nifedipine and salbutamol.
Either tocolysis is effective and contractions cease or diminish: in both cases, do not prolong treatment over 48 hours. Bed rest until the end of pregnancy.
Or tocolysis is not effective, contractions persist and labour begins: take necessary steps for a premature birth.

Post-partum haemorrhage
Clinical signs
Haemorrhage, exceeding the usual 500 ml of a normal placental delivery that occurs in the first 24 hours (usually immediately) following the delivery of the child. Postpartum haemorrhage is mainly due to placental retention and uterine atonia, but may also result from uterine rupture or cervical or vaginal lacerations.
Management
– If systolic BP is < 90 mmHg, elevate the legs (keep or replace the patient's feet in the delivery table stirrups).
– Under general anaesthesia and antibiotic prophylaxis (ampicillin or cefazolin IV, 2 g as a single dose): manual removal of the placenta (if not yet delivered) and systematic manual exploration of the uterus to remove any clots/placental debris and to make sure the uterus has not ruptured.
– Then oxytocin: 10 IU diluted in 500 ml of Ringer lactate, at a rate of 80 drops/minute.
At the same time, administer 5 to 10 IU by IV push, to be repeated if necessary until retraction of uterus, without exceeding a total dose of 60 IU.
– Massage of the uterus to expel any clots and aid uterine retraction.
– Continue monitoring (pulse, BP, blood loss). Bleeding should diminish and the uterus should remain firm.
– Measure haemoglobin.
– Insert a urinary catheter to facilitate uterine retraction.
For more information on the management of pregnancy-related bleeding, refer to the
MSF handbook, Obstetrics in remote settings.

250

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:45

Page 251

CHAPTER 10

Medical and minor surgical procedures
Dressings

253

Treatment of a simple wound

256

Burns

266

Abscesses

274

Pyomyositis

279

Leg ulcers

281

Venomous bites and stings

283

Dental infections

287

10

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:45

Page 252

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:45

Page 253

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

Dressings
– The objective of dressing wounds is to promote healing. The procedure includes cleaning, disinfection and protection of the wound while respecting the rules of hygiene. – Not all wounds need to be covered by a dressing (e.g. a clean wound that has been sutured for several days; a small dry wound not requiring sutures).

Material
– Sterile instruments
• one Kocher or Pean forceps
• one dissecting forceps
• one pair of surgical scissors or one scalpel to excise necrotic tissue and to cut gauze or sutures
Instruments for one dressing for one patient must be wrapped together in paper or fabric (or can be placed in a metallic box) and sterilised together to limit handling and breaks in asepsis. 5 to 10 compresses may be included in this set.
If there are no sterile instruments, a dressing can be done using sterile gloves.
– Renewable supplies
• sterile compresses
• non-sterile disposable gloves
• adhesive tape and/or crepe or gauze bandage
• sterile 0.9% sodium chloride or sterile water
• depending on the wound: antiseptic (polyvidone iodine scrub solution, polyvidone iodine dermal solution), paraffin compresses, analgesics

Organisation of care
Proper organization of care helps maintain the rules of asepsis and decreases the risk of contamination of the wound or transmission of organisms from one patient to another:
– Assign one room for dressings. It must be cleaned and the waste removed every day.
The dressing table must be disinfected after each patient.
– Dressings may be applied at the bedside if the patient’s condition requires. Use a clean, disinfected dressing trolley with: on the upper tray, sterile and/or clean material (dressing set, extra compresses, etc.) and on the lower tray, septic material
(container for contaminated instruments, sharps disposal container and a container or garbage bag for waste).
– Prepare all the necessary material in a well lit area. If necessary, arrange for an assistant to be present.
– Wear protective glasses if there is a risk of projection from an oozing wound.

253

10

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:45

Page 254

Dressings

– Always proceed from clean to dirty: start with patients with uninfected wounds. If there are multiple dressings for one patient, start with the cleanest wound.

Technique
– If the procedure may be painful, give an analgesic and wait the necessary time for the drug to take effect before starting the procedure.
– Settle the patient comfortably in an area where his privacy is respected throughout the procedure.
– Explain the procedure to the patient and obtain his co-operation.
– Instruments (or sterile gloves) must be changed between patients.
– To prevent drug interactions, use the same antiseptic for all care of one patient.

Removal of an old dressing
– Wash hands (ordinary soap) or disinfect them with an alcohol-based hand rub.
– Put on non-sterile gloves and remove the adhesive tape, bandage and superficial compresses. – Proceed gently with the last compresses. If they stick to the wound, loosen them with
0.9% sodium chloride or sterile water before removal.
– Observe the soiled compresses. If there is significant discharge, a greenish colour or a foul odour, a wound infection is likely.
– Discard the dressing and the non-sterile gloves in the waste container.

Observe the wound
– In the case of an open wound, loss of cutaneous tissue or ulcer, the colour is an indicator of the stage in the healing process:
• black area = necrosis, wet or dry infected eschar
• yellow or greenish area = infected tissue and presence of pus
• red area = granulation, usually a sign of healing (unless there is hypertrophy), however, red edges indicate inflammation or infection
• pink area = process of epithelisation, the final stage of healing that begins at the edges of the wound
– In the case of a sutured wound, the existence of local signs of suppuration and pain requires the removal of one or more sutures to avoid the infection spreading. Local signs include:
• red, indurated and painful edges
• drainage of pus between the sutures, either spontaneously or when pressure is applied on either side of the wound
• lymphangitis
• sub-cutaneous crepitations around the wound
In any case, if local signs of infection are observed, look for general signs of infection
(fever, chills, changes in the overall condition).

254

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:45

Page 255

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

Technique for cleaning and dressing of the wound
– Wash hands again or disinfect them with an alcohol-based hand rub.
– Open the dressing set or box after checking the date of sterilisation and that the wrapping is intact.
– Pick up one of the sterile forceps being careful not to touch anything else.
– Pick up the second forceps with the help of the first one.
– Make a swab by folding a compress in 4 using the forceps.
– Clean sutured wound or clean open wound with red granulation:
• clean with 0.9% sodium chloride or sterile water to remove any organic residue; work from the cleanest to the dirtiest area (use a clean swab for each stroke);
• dab dry with a sterile compress;
• re-cover a sutured wound with sterile compresses or an open wound with paraffin compresses; the dressing should extend a few cm beyond the edges of the wound;
• keep the dressing in place with adhesive tape or a bandage.
– Necrotic or infected open wounds:
• clean with polyvidone iodine (7.5% scrub solution, 1 part of solution + 4 parts of sterile 0.9% sodium chloride or sterile water). Rinse thoroughly then dab dry with a sterile compress; or if not available, sterile 0.9% sodium chloride or sterile water and apply an antiseptic (10% polyvidone iodine dermal solution).
• apply sterile vaseline and remove all necrotic tissue at each dressing change until the wound is clean.
– Discard any sharp materials used in an appropriate sharps container and the rest of the waste in a waste container.
– As quickly as possible, soak the instruments in disinfectant.
– Wash hands again or disinfect them with an alcohol-based hand rub.
The principles remain the same if the dressing is done using instruments or sterile gloves. Subsequent dressings
– Clean, sutured wound: remove the initial dressing after 5 days if the wound remains painless and odourless, and if the dressing remains clean. The decision to re-cover or to leave the wound uncovered (if it is dry) often depends on the context and local practices. – Infected, sutured wound: remove one or more sutures and evacuate the pus. Change the dressing at least once daily.
– Open, dirty wound: daily cleaning and dressing change.
– Open granulating wound: change the dressing every 2 to 3 days, except if the granulation is hypertrophic (in this case, apply local corticosteroids).

255

10

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:45

Page 256

Treatment of a simple wound

Treatment of a simple wound

– A simple wound is a break in the continuity of the skin limited in depth at the subcutaneous fatty tissue, that does not affect the underlying structures (muscle, bone, joints, major arteries, nerves, tendons) and without significant loss of tissue.
– The goal of treatment is to assure rapid healing of the wound without complications or sequelae. Several basic rules apply:
• rapidly treat wounds, while maintaining the rules of asepsis and the order of the initial procedures: cleaning-exploration-excision;
• identify wounds that need to be sutured and those for which suturing would be harmful or dangerous;
• immediately suture recent, clean, simple wounds (less than 6 hours old) and delay suturing contaminated wounds and/or those more than 6 hours old;
• prevent local (abscess) or general (gas gangrene; tetanus) infections.

Material
Instruments (Figures 1a to 1d)
– One dissecting forceps, one needle-holder, one pair of surgical scissors and one Pean or Kocher forceps are usually enough.
– One or two other artery forceps, a pair of Farabeuf retractors and a scalpel may be useful for a contused or deep wound.
Instruments to suture one wound for one patient must be packaged and sterilised together (suture box or set) to limit handling and breaks in asepsis.
Renewable supplies

– For local anaesthesia: sterile syringe and needle; 1% lidocaine (without epinephrine)
– Sterile gloves, fenestrated sterile towel
– Sterile absorbable and non-absorbable sutures
– Antiseptic and supplies for dressings
– For drainage: corrugated rubber drain or equivalent, nylon suture

256

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:45

Page 257

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

Technique
– Settle the patient comfortably in an area with good lighting and ensure all the necessary material is prepared.
– Explain the procedure to the patient and ensure his co-operation.
– If the patient is a young child, arrange to have an assistant hold the child if necessary.
Initial cleaning
– Wear suitable clothing: sterile gloves for all wounds and a gown and protective glasses if there is a risk of projection from a bleeding wound.
– Start by washing the wound, prolong the cleaning if the wound is particularly soiled.
Use ordinary soap or polyvidone iodine scrub solution and water and rinse.
– If necessary use a sterile brush. Cleaning with running water is preferable to cleaning by immersion.
– If the wound is infected and the patient has general signs of infection (fever, chills, changes in the overall condition) systemic antibiotic therapy may be required.
Administer antibiotics at least one hour prior to starting care.
Exploration
– Wash hands and put on sterile gloves.

– Disinfect the wound and surrounding area with 10% polyvidone iodine.
– Cover the wound with a fenestrated sterile towel.

– Local anaesthetic: infiltrate 1% lidocaine into the edges of the wound and wait at least
2 minutes for the anaesthetic to take effect.
– Proceed carefully from the superficial to the deepest parts of the wound to explore the extent of the wound, if necessary, aided by an assistant.
– Consider the anatomical location of the wound and look for injury to any underlying structures (the clinical examination of a limb must include evaluation of sensitivity and motor functioning, as well as that of tendons in order to orient surgical exploration): • a wound that communicates with a fracture is an open fracture,
• a wound close to a joint may be a joint wound,
• a wound on the hands or feet may affect the nerves and/or tendons.
– Look for and remove any foreign bodies.
– In the event of significant pain or bleeding, the exploration must be completed in an operating room.

257

10

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:45

Page 258

Treatment of a simple wound

Wound excision
– The goal of the excision is to remove non-viable tissue, which favours the proliferation of bacteria and infection.
– The wound may require little or no excision if it is clean. The excision is more extensive if the wound is bruised, irregular or extensive.
– Limit excision of the skin around the wound, particularly in facial wounds.
– Sub-cutaneous fat and tissue of doubtful viability should be generously excised in order to leave only well vascularised tissue.
Immediate suturing of a simple wound
– Immediate suturing may have serious consequences for the patient if precautions to prevent infection and promote healing are not taken.
– The decision to suture immediately can only be taken after the cleaning, exploration and satisfactory excision, and if the following conditions are met: simple wound, no more than 6 hours old with no devitalised or contused tissue (the wound may be as long as
24 hours old if on the face, scalp, upper limbs or hands).
– Bites (for local treatment see Rabies, page 194) and bullet, shell or mine shrapnel wounds should not be immediately sutured.
Delayed suturing of a simple wound
– Wounds that do not fill the above conditions should not be immediately sutured.
– After cleaning, exploration and excision a simple dressing is applied to the open wound. – Further cleaning and removal of any remaining necrotic tissue is completed with daily dressing changes.
– If after 72 hours there are no signs of local infection, the wound may be sutured.
Healing by second intention of infected wounds
If the wound does not meet the conditions of cleanliness described above, the wound cannot be sutured. It will heal either spontaneously (healing by secondary intention), or will require a skin graft (once the wound is clean) if there is significant loss of tissue.

258

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:45

Page 259

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

Figure 1a
Kocher forceps, straight, toothed

Figure 1b
Kelly forceps, curved, non-toothed

10

Figure 1c
Small artery forceps, curved, non-toothed

Figure 1d
Farabeuf retractors

Figures 1: Basic instruments
259

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:45

Page 260

Treatment of a simple wound

Figure 2a
Always mount a surgical blade using a needle holder.
Change the blade for each new procedure.

Figure 2b
Dissecting forceps should not be held in the palm of the hand, but rather between the thumb and index finger. Toothed dissecting forceps should only be used on skin.

Figure 2c
Insert the thumb and the ring finger into the handle of a needle holder (or scissors), and stabilize the instrument using the index finger.
Figures 2: How to hold instruments

260

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:45

Page 261

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

Figure 3a
Debridement of a contused, ragged wound: straightening of the wound edges with a scalpel. Be conservative in facial wounds.

Figure 3b
Excision of edges of the aponeurosis to prevent necrosis

10
Figure 3c
Excision of contused muscle

Figures 3: Wound debridement
This should be done sparingly, limited to excision of severely contused or lacerated tissue that is clearly becoming necrotic.

261

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:45

Page 262

Treatment of a simple wound

Figure 4a
Loop the suture around the needle holder in one direction and remember the direction of the loop. Grasp the loose end with the needle holder and pull it through the loop to make the first knot. Lower the knot so that it closes the wound.

Figure 4b
The second loop should be in the opposite direction. At least 3 knots are needed to make a suture, alternating from one direction to the other.

Figure 4c
In principle the first knot lies flat.

Figure 4d
Second knot in the opposite direction.

Figures 4: Practising making knots using forceps

262

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 263

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

Figure 4e
Figure 4f
Grasp the loose end with the needle holder.

Figure 4g
First flat knot
Slide the knot towards the wound using the hand holding the loose end while holding the other end with the needle holder. Tighten the knot without causing tissue ischaemia.

10

Figure 4h
Figure 4i
Second knot in the opposite direction
Figures 4: Practising making knots using forceps (continued)

263

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 264

Treatment of a simple wound

Figure 5a
Figure 5b
The suture should be as deep as it is wide.

Figure 5c
Figure 5d
The suture is too shallow, the edges are invaginated.

Figure 5e
Poor lining of the edges

Figure 5f
Do not make the knot directly over the wound.

Figures 5: Particular problems

264

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 265

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

Figure 6: Closing a corner

Figure 7: Closure of the skin, simple interrupted sutures with non-absorbable sutures

10

265

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 266

Burns

Burns
Burns are cutaneous lesions caused by exposure to heat, electricity, chemicals or radiation. They cause significant pain and may threaten survival and/or compromise function. Classification of burns
Severe burns: one or more of the following parameters:
– Involving more than 10% of the body surface area (BSA) in children and 15% in adults – Inhalation injury (smoke, hot air, particles, toxic gas, etc.)
– Major concomitant trauma (fracture, head injury, etc.)
– Location: face, hands, neck, genitalia/perineum, joints (risk of functional deficit)
– Electrical and chemical burns or burns due to explosions
– Age < 3 years or > 60 years or significant co-morbidities (e.g. epilepsy, malnutrition)
Minor burns: involving less than 10% of the BSA in children and 15% in adults, in the absence of other risk factors.

Evaluation of burns
Extent of burns
Lund-Browder table – Percentage of body surface area according to age
Location

< 1 year

1-4 years

5-9 years

10-15 years

Adults

Head

19

17

13

10

7

Neck

2

2

2

2

2

Anterior trunk

13

13

13

13

13

Posterior trunk

13

13

13

13

13

Right buttock

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

Left buttock

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

Perineum/genitalia

1

1

1

1

1

Right upper arm

4

4

4

4

4

Left upper arm

4

4

4

4

4

Right lower arm

3

3

3

3

3

Left lower arm

3

3

3

3

3

Right hand

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

Left hand

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

2.5

Right thigh

5.5

6.5

8.5

8.5

9.5

Left thigh

5.5

6.5

8.5

8.5

9.5

Right leg

5

5

5.5

6

7

Left leg

5

5

5.5

6

7

Right foot

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

Left foot

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

266

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 267

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

This table helps to accurately calculate the % of BSA involved according to patient’s age:
e.g. burn of the face, anterior trunk, inner surface of the lower arm and circumferential burn of left upper arm in a child 2 years of age: 8.5 + 13 + 1.5 + 4 = 27% BSA.
Depth of burns
Apart from first-degree burns (painful erythema of the skin and absence of blisters) and very deep burns (third-degree burns, carbonization), it is not possible, upon initial examination, to determine the depth of burns. Differentiation is possible after D8-D10.
Superficial burn on D8-D10

Deep burn on D8-D10

Normal or pain

Insensitive or diminished sensation

Colour

Pink, blanches with pressure

White, red, brown or black
Does not blanch with pressure

Texture

Smooth and supple

Firm and leathery

Minimal fibrinous exudate
Granulation tissue evident
Bleeds when incised

Covered with fibrinous exudate
Little or no bleeding when incised

Heals spontaneously within 5-15 days

– Very deep burn: always requires surgery (no spontaneous healing)
– Intermediate burn: may heal spontaneously in 3 to 5 weeks; high risk of infection and permanent sequelae

Sensation

Appearance

Healing

Evaluation for the presence of inhalation injury
Dyspnoea with chest wall indrawing, bronchospasm, soot in the nares or mouth, productive cough, carbonaceous sputum, hoarseness, etc.

Treatment of severe burns (in hospital)
I. Initial management
On admission
– Ensure airway is patent; high-flow oxygen, even when SaO2 is normal.
– Establish intravenous access, through unburned skin if possible (intraosseous access if venous access is not possible).
– Ringer lactate (RL): 20 ml/kg during the first hour, even if the patient is stable.
– Morphine SC: 0.2 mg/kg (Step 1 and Step 2 analgesics are not effective).
– In the event of chemical burns: flush with copious amounts of water for 15 to 30 min, avoiding contamination of healthy skin; do not attempt to neutralize the chemical agent. Once the patient is stabilized
– Remove clothes if they are not adherent to the burn.
– Take history of the burn injury: mechanism, causative agent, time, etc.
– Assess the burn injury: extent, depth, carbonization; ocular burns, burns at risk of secondary functional deficits; circumferential burns of the extremities, chest or neck.
Wear face mask and sterile gloves during the examination.
267

10

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 268

Burns

– Assess for associated injuries (fractures, etc.).
– Protect the patient and keep him warm: clean/sterile sheet, survival blanket.
– Insert a urinary catheter if burns involve > 15% of BSA, and in the case of electrical burns or burns of the perineum/genitalia.
– Insert a nasogastric tube if burns involve > 20% of BSA (in the operating room while carrying out dressing procedure).
– Calculate and initiate fluid and electrolyte requirements for the first 24 hours.
– Intensive monitoring: level of consciousness, pulse, blood pressure, pulse oxymetry, respiratory rate (RR) hourly; temperature and urine output every 4 hours.
– Additional testing: haemoglobin, blood group, urine dipstick test.
– Prepare the patient for the first dressing procedure in the operating room.
Notes:
– Burns do not bleed in the initial stage: check for haemorrhage if haemoglobin level is normal or low.
– Burns alone do not alter the level of consciousness. In the case if altered consciousness, consider head injury, intoxication, postictal state in epileptic patients.
– Clinical manifestations of electrical burns vary significantly according to the type of current. Look for complications (arrhythmia, rhabdomyolysis, neurological disorders). II. General measures during the first 48 hours
Resuscitative measures
Intravenous replacement fluid to correct hypovolaemia:
Fluid and electrolyte requirements during the first 48 hours according to age
Child < 12 years

Child ≥ 12 years/adult

0-8h

2 ml/kg x % BSA of RL
+ maintenance fluid* per hour x 8 h

2 ml/kg x % BSA of RL

8 - 24 h

2 ml/kg x % BSA of RL
+ maintenance fluid* per hour x 16 h

2 ml/kg x % BSA of RL

24 - 48 h

Daily maintenance IV fluid requirements* 40 ml/kg RL minus oral fluids (do not minus oral fluids such as milk, broth, include drinking water in the calculation). gavage feeds (do not include drinking water in the calculation).

* maintenance fluid: alternate RL and 5% glucose: 4 ml/kg/h for first 10 kg of body weight + 2 ml/kg/h for next 10 kg + 1 ml/kg/h for each additional kg (over 20 kg, up to 30 kg)

Note: increase replacement volumes by 50% (3 ml/kg x % BSA for the first 8 hours) in the event of inhalation injury or electrical burn. For burns > 50% BSA, limit the calculation to 50% BSA.
This formula provides a guide only and should be adjusted according to systolic arterial pressure (SAP) and urine output. Avoid fluid overload. Reduce replacement fluid volumes if urine output exceeds the upper limit.

268

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 269

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

Target endpoints for IV replacement fluids
Non-electrical burns

Electrical burns

Child < 1 year

Child 1-12 years

Child > 12 years/ adult All ages

AP (mmHg)

SAP ≥ 60

SAP 70 to 90 + (2 x age)

SAP ≥ 100

Age appropriate
SAP

Urine output

1 to 2 ml/kg/h

1 to 1.5 ml/kg/h

0.5 to 1 ml/kg/h

1 to 2 ml/kg/h

In patients with oliguria despite adequate fluid replacement: dopamine IV: 5 to 15 µg/kg/min by IV pump or epinephrine IV: 0.1 to 0.5 µg/kg/min by IV pump
Stop the infusion after 48 hours, if fluid requirements can be met by the oral route or gavage. Respiratory care
In all cases: continuous inhalation of humidified oxygen, chest physiotherapy.
Emergency surgical intervention if necessary: tracheotomy, chest escharotomy.
Do not administer corticosteroids (no effect on oedema; predisposition to infection).
No specific treatment for direct bronchopulmonary lesions.
Analgesia
See Pain management, page 271.
Nutrition
Start feeding early, beginning at H8:
– Daily needs in adults: • calories : 25 kcal/kg + 40 kcal/% SCB
• proteins : 1.5 to 2 g/kg
– High energy foods (NRG5, Plumpy'nut, F100 milk) are necessary if the BSA is > 20%
(normal food is inadequate).
– Nutritional requirements are administered according to the following distribution: carbohydrates 50%, lipids 30%, proteins 20%.
– Provide 5-10 times the recommended daily intake of vitamins and trace elements.
– Enteral feeds are preferred: oral route or nasogastric tube (necessary if BSA > 20%).
– Start with small quantities on D1, then increase progressively to reach recommended energy requirements within 3 days.
– Assess nutritional status regularly (weigh twice weekly).
– Reduce energy loss: occlusive dressings, warm environment (28-33°C), early grafting; management of pain, insomnia and depression.
Patients at risk of rhabdomyolysis (deep and extensive burns, electrical burns, crush injuries to the extremities)
Monitor for myoglobinuria: dark urine and urine dipstick tests. If present, induce alkaline diuresis for 48 hours (20 ml of 8.4% sodium bicarbonate per litre of RL) to obtain an output of 1 to 2 ml/kg/h. Do not administer dopamine or furosemide.

269

10

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 270

Burns

Control of infection
Precautions against infection are of paramount importance until healing is complete.
Infection is one of the most frequent and serious complications of burns:
– Follow hygiene precautions (e.g. sterile gloves when handling patients).
– Rigorous wound management (dressing changes, early excision).
– Separate “new” patients (< 7 days from burn) from convalescent patients (≥ 7 days from burn).
– Do not administer antibiotherapy in the absence of systemic infection. Infection is defined by the presence of at least 2 of 4 following signs: temperature > 38.5°C or
< 36°C, tachycardia, tachypnoea, elevation of white blood cell count by more than
100% (or substantial decrease in the number of white blood cells).
– In the event of systemic infection, start empiric antibiotic treatment:
Children > 1 month: cefazolin IV: 75 mg/kg/day in 3 injections + ciprofloxacin PO: 30 mg/kg/day in 2 doses
Adults:
cefazolin IV: 6 g/day in 3 injections + ciprofloxacin PO: 1.5 g/day in 3 doses
– Local infection, in the absence of signs of systemic infection, requires topical treatment with silver sulfadiazine.
Other treatments

– Omeprazole IV from D1:
Children: 1 mg/kg once daily
Adults: 40 mg once daily
– Tetanus immunization/prophylaxis (see Tetanus, page 170).
– Thromboprophylaxis: nadroparin SC beginning 48 to 72 h post-injury. High risk dosing protocol if the BSA is > 50% and/or in the event of high-voltage electrical injury; moderate risk dosing protocol if the BSA is 20 to 50% and/or in the event of burns of the lower limbs.
– Physiotherapy from D1 (prevention of contractures), analgesia is necessary.
– Intentional burns (suicide attempt, aggression): appropriate psychological follow-up.

III. Local treatment
Regular dressing changes1 prevent infection, decrease heat and fluid losses, reduce energy loss, and promote patient comfort. Dressings should be occlusive, assist in relieving pain, permit mobilisation, and prevent contractures.
– Basic principles
• Rigorous adherence to the principles of asepsis.
• Dressing changes require morphine administration in the non-anaesthetised patient.
• The first dressing procedure is performed in the operating room under general anaesthesia, the following in an operating room under general anaesthesia or at the bedside with morphine.
– Technique
• At the time of the first dressing procedure, shave any hairy areas (armpit, groin, pubis) if burns involve the adjacent tissues; scalp (anteriorly in the case of facial burns, entirely in the case of cranial burns). Cut nails.
• Clean the burn with polyvidone iodine scrub solution (1 volume of 7.5% PVI +
4 volumes of 0.9% sodium chloride or sterile water). Scrub gently with compresses, taking care to avoid bleeding.
1 Open technique « naked burn patient under a mosquito net » and water immersion therapy are obsolete and

should no longer be used.

270

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 271

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Remove blisters with forceps and scissors.
Rinse with 0.9% sodium chloride or sterile water.
Dry the skin by blotting with sterile compresses.
Apply silver sulfadiazine directly by hand (wear sterile gloves) in a uniform layer of
3-5 mm to all burned areas (except eyelids and lips).
Apply a greasy dressing (Jelonet® or petrolatum gauze) using a to-and-fro motion
(do not use circular dressings).
Cover with a sterile compresses, unfolded into a single layer. Never encircle a limb with a single compress.
Wrap with a crepe bandage, loosely applied.
Elevate extremities to prevent oedema; immobilise in extension.

– Frequency: routinely every 48 hours; daily in the event of superinfection or in certain areas (e.g. perineum).
– Monitoring
• Distal ischaemia of the burned limb is the main complication during the first
48 hours. Assess for signs of ischaemia: cyanosis or pallor of the extremity, dysaesthesia, hyperalgia, impaired capillary refill.
• Monitor daily: pain, bleeding, progression of healing and infection.

IV. Surgical care
– Emergency surgical interventions:
• Escharotomy: in the case of circumferential burns of arms, legs or fingers, in order to avoid ischaemia, and circumferential burns of chest or neck that compromise respiratory movements.
• Tracheotomy: in the event of airway obstruction due to oedema (e.g. deep cervicofacial burns). Tracheotomy can be performed through a burned area.
• Tarsorrhaphy: in the event of ocular or deep eyelid burns.
• Surgery for associated injuries (fractures, visceral lesions, etc.).
– Burn surgery:
• Excision-grafting of deep burns, in the operating room, under general anaesthesia, between D5 and D6: excision of necrotic tissue (eschar) with simultaneous grafting with autografts of thin skin. This intervention entails significant bleeding risk, do not involve more than 15% of BSA in the same surgery.
• If early excision-grafting is not feasible, default to the process of sloughinggranulation-re-epithelisation. Sloughing occurs spontaneously due to the action of sulfadiazine/petrolatum gauze dressings and, if necessary, by mechanical surgical debridement of necrotic tissue. This is followed by granulation, which may require surgical reduction in the case of hypertrophy. The risk of infection is high and the process is prolonged (> 1 month).

V. Pain management
All burns require analgesic treatment. Pain intensity is not always predictable and regular assessment is paramount: use a simple verbal scale (SVS) in children > 5 years and adults and NFCS or FLACC scales in children < 5 years (see Pain, page 29).

271

10

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 272

Burns

Morphine is the treatment of choice for moderate to severe pain. Development of tolerance is common in burn patients and requires dose augmentation.
Adjuvant treatment may complement analgesic medication (e.g. massage therapy, psychotherapy). Continuous pain (experienced at rest)
– Moderate pain: paracetamol PO: 60 mg/kg/day in 4 divided doses
+ tramadol PO: 4 to 8 mg/kg/day in 4 divided doses
– Moderate to severe pain: paracetamol PO: 60 mg/kg/day in 4 divided doses
+ slow release morphine PO: 1 to 2 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses at 12 hour-interval. In patients with severe burns, oral drugs are poorly absorbed in the digestive tract during the first 48 hours. Morphine must be administered by SC route: 0.2 mg/kg every 4 hours.
Acute pain experienced during care
Analgesics are given in addition to those given for continuous pain.
– Significant medical interventions and extensive burns: general anaesthesia in an operating room.
– Limited non-surgical interventions (dressings, painful physiotherapy):
• Mild to moderate pain, 60 to 90 minutes before giving care: codeine PO: 0.6 mg/kg or tramadol PO: 2 mg/kg rarely allows treatment to be completed comfortably. In the event of treatment failure, use morphine.
• Moderate or severe pain, 60 to 90 minutes before giving care: immediate release morphine PO: initial dose of 0.5 to 1 mg/kg. The effective dose is usually around 1 mg/kg, but there is no maximum dose. or morphine SC: initial dose of 0.2 to 0.5 mg/kg. The effective dose is usually around
0.5 mg/kg, but there is no maximum dose.
Note: doses given are for adults.
For paracetamol, dosing is the same in children.
For tramadol and codeine, dosing is the same in children > 6 months.
For morphine, dosing is the same in children > 1 year, should be halved in children less than 1 year, and quartered in infants less than 3 months.
– Pain management using morphine during dressing changes at the bedside requires:
• A trained nursing team.
• Availability of immediate release oral morphine and naloxone.
• Close monitoring: level of consciousness, RR, pulse, SaO2, every 15 min for the first hour following dressing change, then routine monitoring.
• Assessment of pain intensity and sedation during the intervention and for 1 hour thereafter. • Necessary equipment for ventilation by mask and manual suction.
• Gentle handling of the patient at all times.
– Adjustment of morphine doses for subsequent dressings:
• If pain intensity (SVS) is 0 or 1: continue with the same dose.
• If SVS score ≥ 2: increase the dose by 25 to 50%. If pain control remains inadequate, the dressing change should be carried out in the operating room under anaesthesia.
– Take advantage of the residual analgesia following dressing changes to carry out physiotherapy. – As a last resort (morphine unavailable and no facilities to give general anaesthesia), in a safe setting (trained staff, resuscitation equipment, recovery room), adding ketamine IM at analgesic doses (0.5 to 1 mg/kg) reinforces the analgesic effect of the paracetamol + tramadol combination given before a dressing change.
272

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 273

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

Chronic pain (during the rehabilitation period)
– The treatment is guided by self-evaluation of pain intensity, and utilises paracetamol and/or tramadol. Patients may develop neuropathic pain (see treatment page 35).
– All other associated pain (physiotherapy, mobilization) should be treated as acute pain. Minor burns (outpatient treatment)
– Wound care: dressings with silver sulfadiazine or petrolatum gauze (except for firstdegree superficial burns).
– Pain: paracetamol ± tramadol usually suffices.

10

273

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 274

Abscesses

Abscesses
An abscess is a collection of pus in the soft tissues most commonly due to Staphylococcus aureus. During the suppurative stage, a ‘ripe’ abscess is red, inflamed, painful, shiny and swollen. It is usually fluctuant on palpation and may be fistulated. At this stage, the abscess cavity is inaccessible to antibiotics and surgical drainage is the only effective treatment. During the early indurated stage, that precedes the suppurative stage medical treatment may be effective.

Treatment
Medical treatment (indurated stage)
• Antibiotic therapy:
Children: amoxicillin PO: 80 mg/kg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses
+ metronidazole PO: 30 to 50 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses
Adults: amoxicillin PO: 4 g/day in 2 or 3 divided doses
+ metronidazole PO: 1.5 g/day in 3 divided doses or amoxicilline+ clavulanic acid (co-amoxiclav) PO
Children: 80 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses
Adults: 4 g/day in 3 divided doses
• Adapt analgesics to the pain level (see Pain, page 29).
• Apply compresses soaked in 70% alcohol, 2 times/day (maximum 3 times/day to prevent burns to the skin).
If there is improvement after 48 hours: continue antibiotic treatment for 5 days to complete 7 days of treatment.
If there is no improvement after 48 hours of correct treatment: treat surgically.
Surgical drainage (suppurative stage)

Material
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Sterile scalpel handle and blade
Sterile curved, non-toothed artery forceps (Kelly type)
Sterile gloves
Antiseptic
5 or 10 ml syringe
Non-absorbable sutures
Sterile corrugated drain

274

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 275

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

Anaesthesia
With the exception of paronychia, local anaesthesia of the abscess is usually impossible.
General anaesthesia may be indicated, using: ketamine IM: 10 mg/kg

Technique
– Incision (Figure 8a)
• Hold the scalpel between the thumb and middle finger of the dominant hand, the index finger presses on the handle. Hold the abscess between the thumb and index finger of the other hand. The scalpel blade should be perpendicular to the skin.
• The incision is made in a single stroke along the long axis of the abscess. The incision must be long enough for a finger to be inserted.
• Be cautious when excising an abscess located over a blood vessel (carotid, axillary, humeral, femoral, popliteal).
– Digital exploration (Figure 8b)
• Explore the cavity with the index finger, breaking down all loculi (a single cavity should remain), evacuate the pus and explore to the edges of the cavity.
• The exploration also allows an assessment of the extent of the abscess, the depth, and location with respect to underlying structures (arterial pulsation) or any possible contact with underlying bone. In this last case, seek surgical advice.
– Washing
Abundant washing of the cavity using a syringe filled with antiseptic solution.
– Drainage (Figure 8c)
Insert a drain (or, failing that a gauze wick) into the base of the cavity. If possible, fix it to the edge of the incision with a single suture. The drain is withdrawn progressively and then, after 3 to 5 days removed completely.

10

Figure 8a
Incision with a scalpel

275

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 276

Abscesses

Figure 8b
Exploration of the cavity, breaking down any loculi

Figure 8c
Drain fixed to the skin
Figures 8: Surgical drainage of an abscess

Special sites
Breast abscesses
(Figures 9a to 9d)
– Breast abscesses are usually superficial, but deep ones, when they occur, are more difficult to diagnose and drain.
Medical treatment (indurated stage)
– Antibiotic treatment (see above)
– Apply a constrictive bandage, stop breast-feeding from the infected breast; express milk using a breast pump to avoid engorgement.

276

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 277

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

Surgical drainage (suppurative stage)
– Incision:
• radial for superficial abscesses,
• peri-areolar for abscesses near the nipple,
• submammary for deep abscesses.
– Gentle exploration with a finger.
– Wash abundantly with a syringe filled with an antiseptic solution.
– Insert a corrugated drain.

Figure 9a
Locations of breast abscesses

Figure 9b
Incisions: radial, peri-areolar, submammary

10

Figure 9c
Submammary incision

Figure 9d
Gentle exploration with a finger, breaking down any loculi
277

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 278

Abscesses

Parotid abscess
There is a risk of severing the facial nerve when incising a parotid abscess. The incision should be horizontal along the lower margin of the abscess.

Figure 10
Incision of a parotid abscess

278

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 279

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

Pyomyositis
– Pyomyositis is an infection of the muscle, almost always due to Staphylococcus aureus.
It most commonly affects the muscles of the limbs and torso. These infections may occur simultaneously in multiple sites.
– During the early indurated stage, while the muscle is swollen, hot and painful, medical treatment may be effective. During the suppurative stage, when the abscess has formed, surgical drainage is the only effective treatment.

Treatment
Medical treatment (indurated stage)
–
–
–
–

Immobilise the limb.
Antibiotic therapy as for other abscesses (see page 274).
Adapt analgesics to the pain level (see Pain, page 29).
Apply compresses soaked in 70% alcohol, 2 times/day (maximum of 3 times/day to prevent burns to the skin).

Surgical drainage (suppurative stage)
Treatment of pyomyositis is by incision following the rules for incision of abscesses described on page 275. Muscle abscesses are often deeper than other abscesses. As a result, needle aspiration with a large bore needle may be necessary to locate the abscess; it yields thick pus. Needle aspiration is insufficient treatment even if pus is evacuated. Material and anaesthesia
As for abscesses (see pages 274 and 275).

Technique
– Generous incision along the axis of the limb, over the site of the abscess and avoiding underlying neurovascular stuctures; incise the skin, subcutaneous tissues and muscular fascia with a scalpel (Figure 11a).
– Dissect the muscle fibres with non-toothed forceps (Kelly type) or round tipped scissors. Insert the instrument into the muscle until the purulent cavity is reached.
During insertion, keep the instrument closed and perpendicular to the muscle fibres.
Withdraw gently with the scissors or forceps slightly open, keeping instrument perpendicular to the fibres (Figure 11b).
– Use a forefinger to explore the cavity, break down any loculi and evacuate the pus
(Figure 11c).
– Wash abundantly with antiseptic solution.
– Insert a large drain.
– Fix the drain to the edge of the wound using a single suture. Remove the drain on about the 5th day (Figure 11d).
279

10

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 280

Pyomyositis

Special site
Myositis of the psoas muscle: if the abscess is on the right side, the clinical signs are the same as for appendicitis with pain in the right iliac area. Transfer the patient to a surgical centre.

Figure 11a
Long incision

Figure 11b
Dissection of the muscle using
Kelly forceps, insert closed then withdraw with the instrument slightly open

Figure 11c
Exploration and evacuation of pus with the finger

Figure 11d
Drain fixed to the skin

Figures 11: Surgical drainage of a pyomyositis

280

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 281

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

Leg ulcers
– Leg ulcers are chronic losses of cutaneous tissue. They are common in tropical regions, resulting from varied aetiologies:
• vascular: venous and/or arterial insufficiency
• bacterial: leprosy, Buruli ulcer (Mycobacterium ulcerans), phagedenic ulcer, yaws, syphilis • parasitic: dracunculiasis (Guinea-worm disease), leishmaniasis
• metabolic: diabetes
• traumatic: trauma is often a precipitating factor combined with another underlying cause – The history of the disease and a complete clinical examination (paying particular attention to the neurological examination to determine if there is a peripheral neuropathy caused by leprosy or diabetes) usually leads to an aetiological diagnosis.
– All ulcers may become complicated with either local or regional secondary infections
(abscess, lymphadenopathy, adenitis, osteomyelitis, erysipela, pyodermitis), generalised infection (septicaemia), tetanus and after many years of evolution, skin cancer. Daily local treatment

– Bathe the leg for 10 to 15 minutes in NaDCC or chloramine and rinse in boiled water.
– Remove any necrotic (black) and fibrinous (yellowish) tissue using compresses or excise the tissue with a scalpel.
– Apply:
• to a clean ulcer, with little discharge: 10% polyvidone iodine and vaseline
• to a dirty ulcer, with little discharge: silver sulfadiazine
• to an oozing ulcer: 10% polyvidone iodine alone
• multiple or extensive ulcers, particularly in children: gentian violet for oozing ulcers and silver sulfadiazine for ulcers with no discharge. Do not apply polyvidone iodine as there is a risk of transcutaneous iodine absorption.
– Cover with a dry sterile dressing.

Systemic treatment
– Treatment with analgesics in the event of pain: adapt the level and dosage to the individual (see Pain, page 29).
– Give systemic antibiotics in case of:
• secondary infection (see Bacterial skin infections, page 105).

281

10

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 282

Leg ulcers

• phagedenic ulcer (in the early stages, antibiotics may be useful. They are often ineffective in the chronic stages): benzylpenicillin procaine + benzylpenicillin IM (if necessary give half the dose in each buttock) Children: 100 000 IU/kg once daily for 7 days
Adults: 4 MIU once daily for 7 days

If the patient is allergic to penicillin: erythromycin PO
Children: 50 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses
Adults: 2 g/day in 2 divided doses or doxycycline PO (except in children under 8 years and pregnant or lactating women)
Children over 8 years: 4 mg/kg once daily
Adults: 200 mg once daily or metronidazole PO
Children: 30 mg/kg/day in 3 divided doses
Adults: 1.5 g/day in 3 divided doses
If after 7 days the choosen antibiotic shows to be effective, continue for as long as needed, treatment duration varies according to the clinical evolution.
For patients treated with penicillin, change to oral treatment after 7 days by using phenoxymethylpenicillin PO
Children from 1 to 5 years: 500 mg/day in 4 divided doses
Children from 6 to 12 years: 1 g/day in 4 divided doses
Adult: 2 g/day in 4 divided doses
– Treat the cause
– Complementary therapy:
• Elevate the legs in cases of venous and/or lymphatic insufficiency
• Give tetanus prophylaxis if appropriate (see Tetanus, page 170)
• Skin graft 1 if the ulcer is extensive, clean, red and flat. Skin grafts are often necessary after surgical excision to heal phagedenic and Buruli ulcers.

1 For techniques of skin grafting, refer to the MSF handbook, Minor surgical procedures in remote areas.

282

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 283

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

Venomous bites and stings
Snake bites and envenomation
– More than 50% of the bites are dry bites, i.e. no envenomation occurred. In the event that venom is injected, the severity of envenomation depends on the species, the amount of venom injected, the location of the bite (bites on the head and neck are the most dangerous) and the weight, general condition and age of the individual (more serious in children).
– It is rare that the snake involved is identified. However, observation of the clinical signs may orient diagnosis and management. Two major syndromes are identified:
• neurological disorders that evolve towards respiratory muscle paralysis and coma are common manifestations of elapid envenomation (cobra, mamba, etc.);
• extensive local lesions (intense pain, inflammation with oedema and necrosis) and coagulation abnormalities are common manifestations of viperid or crotalid (rattle snake) envenomation.
Clinical manifestations and management of bites and envenomations are described in the following page.
– Early diagnosis and monitoring of coagulation abnormalities is based on whole blood clotting tests performed in a dry tube (at the patient’s arrival and then every 4 to
6 hours for the first day).
Take 2 to 5 ml of whole blood, wait 30 minutes and examine the tube:
• Complete clotting: no coagulation abnormality
• Incomplete clotting or no clotting: coagulation abnormality, susceptibility to bleeding1 In the event of coagulation abnormalities, continue to monitor once daily until coagulation returns to normal.
– Aetiological treatment is based on the administration of snake antivenom serum, only if there are clear clinical manifestations of envenomation or coagulation abnormalities are observed. Antivenom sera are effective, but rarely available (verify local availability) and difficult to store.
Antivenom serum should be administered as early as possible: by IV infusion (in
0.9% sodium chloride) if using a poorly purified serum; by slow IV in the event of severe envenomation if the serum is known to be well purified. Repeat antivenom serum administration after 4 or 6 hours if the symptoms of envenomation persist.
For all patients, be prepared for an anaphylactic reaction, which, despite its potential severity (shock), is usually more easily controlled than coagulation disorders or serious neurological disorders.
– In asymptomatic patients (bites without signs of envenomation and with normal coagulation), monitoring must continue for at least 12 hours (24 hours preferred).
1 There can be a considerable delay between the decrease in coagulation factors (less than 30 minutes after the

bite) and the first signs of bleeding (other than bleeding at the site of the bite and/or the development of serosanguinous blisters), which may appear only 3 days after the bite. Conversely, bleeding may resolve prior to normalization of coagulation parameters.
283

10

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 284

Venomous bites and stings

Clinical signs and treatment
Time
since bite

0

Clinical manifestations

Possible aggressor Bite
Fang marks
Pain at the site of bite

?

Envenomation
10-30 minutes Hypotension, myosis, excessive salivation and sweating, dysphagia, dyspnoea
Local paraesthesia, paresis
Inflammatory syndrome: intense pain, extensive regional oedema

30 minutes5 hours

30 minutes48 hours

6 hours or more

Treatment

Cobra syndrome: bilateral eyelid drooping, trismus, respiratory muscle paralysis
Shock

Strict rest, immobilisation of the limb with a splint to slow the diffusion of venom2. Wound cleansing.
Tetanus prophylaxis, page 170.
Observe for manifestations of envenomation. A the dispensary level, prepare patient evacuation to a referral centre. Elapids

Insert a peripheral IV line.
IV antivenom serum as soon as possible. Viperids
Crotalids

Insert a peripheral IV line.
IV antivenom serum as soon as possible. Analgesics3.
IV or PO3 anti-inflammatories.

Elapids

Intubation and assisted ventilation.
See Shock, page 17.

Haemorrhagic syndome:
Viperids
epistaxis, purpura, haemolysis Crotalids or disseminated intravascular coagulation
Shock

Monitor coagulation (blood clotting test in a dry tube).
Transfusion of fresh blood in the event of severe anaemia.
See Shock, page 17.

No signs or changes in coagulation (non-venomous snakes or snake bite without envenomation) Reassure the patient.
Send him home after 12 hours.

Tissue necrosis

?

Remove blisters, clean; daily (non occlusive) dressings.
Surgical intervention for necrosis, depending on the extent, after the lesions stabilise (minimum 15 days).

– In case of clinical evidence of infection only: drainage of any abscess; amoxicillin/clavulanic acid (co-amoxiclav) for 7 to 10 days in case of cellulitis.
Infections are relatively rare, and most often associated with traditional treatment or with nosocomial transmission after unnecessary or premature surgery.
2 Tourniquets, incision-suction and cauterisation are ineffective and may be dangerous.
3 Do not use acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin).

284

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 285

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

Scorpion stings and envenomation
– In most cases, the sting causes local effects including: pain, oedema, erythema.
Management includes strict rest, wound cleansing, analgesics PO, and tetanus prophylaxis (see Tetanus, page 170). In patients with significant pain, infiltrate the area around the sting with local anaesthetic (1% lidocaine). Observe for 12 hours.
– General signs appear in the event of severe envenomation: hypertension, excessive salivation and sweating, hyperthermia, vomiting, diarrhoea, muscle pain, respiratory difficulties, seizures; rarely, shock.
– Aetiological treatment:
The use of scorpion antivenom sera is controversial (most of them are not very effective; they may be poorly tolerated due to insufficient purification).
In practice, in countries where scorpion envenomations are severe (North Africa, the
Middle East, Central America and Amazonia), check local availability of antivenom sera and follow national recommendations.
The criteria for administration are the severity of the envenomation, the age of the patient (more severe in children) and the time elapsed since the sting. This should not exceed 2 to 3 hours. If the time elapsed is more than 2 or 3 hours, the benefit of antivenom serum is poor in comparison with the risk of anaphylaxis (in contrast to envenomation by snakes).
– Symptomatic treatment:
• In the event of vomiting, diarrhoea or excessive sweating: prevention of dehydration (oral rehydration salts), especially in children.
• In the event of muscle pain: 10% calcium gluconate slow IV (children: 5 ml/injection, adults: 10 ml/injection, administered over 10 to 20 minutes).
• In the event of seizures: diazepam may be used with caution; the risk of respiratory depression is increased in envenomated patients (see Seizures, page 23).

Spider bites and envenomation
– Treatment is usually limited to wound cleansing, strict rest, analgesics PO and tetanus prophylaxis (see Tetanus, page 170).
– Severe envenomations are rare. There are two main clinical syndromes:
• Neurotoxic syndrome (black widow spider): severe muscle pain, tachycardia, hypertension, nausea, vomiting, headache, excessive sweating. The signs develop for 24 hours and then resolve spontaneously over a few days.
• Necrotic syndrome (recluse spider): local tissue lesions, possible necrosis and ulceration; mild general signs (fever, chills, malaise and vomiting) which usually resolve over a few days. If present, haemolysis may sometimes be life threatening.
As well as the general measures listed above, treatment includes administration of
10% calcium gluconate by slow IV in the event of muscle spasms (children:
5 ml/injection, adults: 10 ml/injection, administered over 10 to 20 minutes).
Incision and debridement of necrotic tissue are not recommended (not useful; may impair healing).

285

10

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 286

Venomous bites and stings

Hymenoptera stings (honeybees, wasps and hornets)
– Local care: remove the embedded sting (bee), clean with soap and water, and if very itchy, apply calamine lotion.
– Analgesics if necessary (paracetamol PO).
– In the event of an anaphylactic reaction: epinephrine (adrenaline) IM
Use undiluted epinephrine solution (1:1000 = 1 mg/ml) and a 1 ml syringe graduated in 0.01 ml in children:
Child from 6 months to 6 years: 0.12 ml
Child from 6 to 12 years:
0.25 ml
Child over 12 years and adult:
0.5 ml
For children, if 1 ml syringe is not available, use a diluted solution, i.e. add 1 mg epinephine to 9 ml of 0.9% sodium chloride to obtain a 0.1 mg/ml solution (1:10 000):
Child from 6 months to 6 years: 1.2 ml
Child from 6 to 12 years:
2.5 ml
Repeat after 5 minutes if no clinical improvement.
Use IV epinephrine (for doses, see Anaphylactic shock, page 19) in patients with circulatory collapse or those who deteriorate despite receiving IM epinephrine.

286

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 287

10. Medical and minor surgical procedures

Dental infections
Infection arising as a secondary complication of an inflammation of the dental pulp.
The severity and the treatment of dental infections depend on their evolution: localised to the infected tooth, extended to adjacent anatomical structures or diffuse infections.

Clinical features and treatment
Infection localised to a tooth and its surroundings (acute dental abscess) – Intense and continuous pain.
– On examination: swelling limited to the gum surrounding the infected tooth.
Purulent exudate may be present draining either through the root canal, or through the periodontal ligament (loosening the tooth) or through a gingival fistula. There are no signs of the infection extending to adjacent anatomical structures nor general signs of infection.
– Treatment:
• Treatment is only surgical (the source of infection is inaccessible to antibiotics): root canal therapy (disinfection of the root canal) if possible or extraction of the tooth.1
• Pain: paracetamol or ibuprofen PO (see Pain, page 29).

Infections extending to adjacent anatomical structures (acute dentoalveolar abscess)
Local spreading of an acute dental abscess into the surrounding bone and tissue.
– Painful gingival and buccal swelling with warm and tender skin, developing into a ripe abscess: intense pain, with trismus, particularly if the infection is in a posterior tooth, presence of general signs (fever, fatigue, cervical lymphadenopathy).
– In patients with acute gangrenous cellulitis (crepitations on palpation), treat as an infection extending into the cervico-facial tissues (following page).
– Treatment:
• First surgical: incision and drainage of the pus or extraction of the tooth.1
• Then antibiotic treatment for 5 days following the procedure: amoxicillin PO
Children: 50 mg/kg/day in 2 divided doses
Adults: 2 g/day in 2 divided doses
Notes:
If the dental procedure has to be delayed (local anaesthesia not possible due to inflammation, significant trismus), start with antibiotic treatment, but the dental procedure must be completed in the following days.
If there is no improvement within 48 to 72 hours after the dental procedure, do not change antibiotic, but start a new procedure on the tooth.
• Pain: paracetamol or ibuprofen PO (see Pain, page 29).
1 For techniques of dental extraction, see the MSF handbook, Minor surgical procedures in remote areas.

287

10

Th.A-Chapter 10

27/01/10

14:46

Page 288

Dental infections

Infections extending into the cervico-facial tissues
– Extremely serious cellulitis, with rapidly spreading cervical or facial tissue necrosis and signs of septicaemia.
– Treatment:
• treatment in an intensive care unit.
• high dose antibiotic treatment (see antibiotic treatment of septic shock, page 20).
• extraction of the tooth.2

2 For techniques of dental extraction, see the MSF handbook, Minor surgical procedures in remote areas.

288

CHAPTER 11

Other conditions

Hypertension

291

Heart failure

294

Endemic goitre and iodine deficiency

297

Psychological disorders

298

11

11. Other conditions

Hypertension
– Adult essential hypertension is defined as a systolic pressure greater than or equal to 160 mmHg and/or a diastolic pressure greater than or equal to 90 mmHg.
The elevation must be constant: blood pressure must be measured twice at rest during three consecutive consultations over a period of three months.
Hypertension is a risk factor for stroke (cerebrovascular accident or CVA), heart failure, renal failure and atherosclerosis.
– Hypertension in pregnancy is defined as a systolic pressure greater than or equal to
140 mmHg or a diastolic pressure greater than or equal to 90 mmHg (with the patient seated and at rest). It may be isolated or associated with proteinuria or oedema in the case of pre-eclampsia.
Hypertension in pregnancy is a risk factor for eclampsia, placental abruption and premature delivery.

Treatment of adult essential hypertension
– In patients with medication-induced hypertension (oral contraceptives, hydrocortisone,
MAO inhibitors, NSAID etc.), stop or change the treatment.
– Otherwise, start with diet and exercise modification: reduce salt intake, lose any excess weight, and increase the level of physical activity.
– If despite these measures the blood pressure remains consistently above
160/100 mmHg (or 140/80 mmHg for a diabetic patient or following a CVA), an antihypertensive medication may be added.
– Start with monotherapy. The optimal dose depends on the patient; reduce by half the initial dose for elderly patients.
– The three classes of anti-hypertensives used as initial therapy1 are the thiazide diuretics
(hydrochlorothiazide), the beta-blockers (atenolol), and the angiotensin converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitors (enalapril, captopril). For information:
Indications

Initial treatment

Uncomplicated hypertension

thiazide diuretic or beta-blocker

Patient over 65 years

thiazide diuretic

Diabetic patient

ACE inhibitor or beta-blocker

Complicated hypertension:
Following a CVA

thiazide diuretic

Following a myocardial infarction

beta-blocker

Heart failure

ACE inhibitor

Renal failure

ACE inhibitor

– The treatment must be taken regularly. Abrupt cessation of beta-blocker treatment may cause adverse effects (malaise, angina)2. Only prescribe a treatment if it can be followed by a patient under regular surveillance.
1 The diuretics, beta-blockers, and ACE inhibitors have shown their capacity to prevent the complications of

hypertension. They are preferred to other anti-hypertensives, notably calcium channel blockers (nifedipine).

2 Furthermore, a sudden stop to treatment with centrally acting anti-hypertensives (e.g. methyldopa, clonidine)

may cause a rebound effect.

291

11

Hypertension

The objective is to reduce the blood pressure to below 160/90 mmHg (or 140/90 mmHg for diabetic patients) while producing the fewest possible adverse effects.
For uncomplicated hypertension:
• Start with a thiazide diuretic: hydrochlorothiazide PO 25 to 50 mg once daily.
• If the patient is not improving after 4 weeks, or if treatment is not tolerated: check compliance, and then if there are no contra-indications (asthma, uncontrolled heart failure), change to a beta-blocker: atenolol PO 50 to 100 mg once daily.
• If the treatment is still of little or no benefit: recheck compliance, and then consider combined therapy (thiazide diuretic + beta-blocker or thiazide diuretic + ACE inhibitor). Note: if enalapril3 is used as monotherapy (see table of indications), start with 5 mg once daily, then increase the dose every 1 to 2 weeks, according to blood pressure, up to 10 to 40 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses. In elderly patients, patients taking a diuretic or patients with renal impairment: start with 2.5 mg once daily as there is a risk of hypotension and/or acute renal impairment.
Specific case: treatment of hypertensive crisis
An occasional rise in blood pressure usually passes without problems, whereas aggressive treatment, notably with sublingual nifedipine, can have serious consequences (syncope, or myocardial, cerebral, or renal ischaemia).
– In patients with hypertensive crisis:
• Reassure the patient and place him at rest.
• If despite these measures the blood pressure remains elevated, the addition of furosemide PO (20 mg once daily) may, in certain cases, gradually reduce the blood pressure in 24 to 48 hours and prevent eventual complications.
– In patients with hypertensive crisis complicated by acute pulmonary oedema:
• The objective is not to normalise the blood pressure at any price, but to treat the pulmonary oedema (see page 294).
• Start or adjust the baseline treatment once the crisis is resolved.

Treatment of hypertension in pregnancy
During pregnancy, regularly monitor: blood pressure, weight, oedema, proteinuria, and fundal height.
– If the diastolic pressure is less than 110 mmHg: rest, monitoring, and a normal sodium and normal calorie diet.
– Start anti-hypertensive treatment when the diastolic pressure reaches 110 mmHg.
Treatment is aimed only at preventing maternal complications of severe hypertension. – During treatment, the diastolic pressure should always be maintained above
90 mmHg: lowering the pressure too aggressively carries the risk of foetal death from placental hypoperfusion.
– As the definitive treatment for hypertension is delivery, the mother must be transferred to a hospital for labour to be induced.
– Diuretics and angiotensin converting enzyme inhibitors (captopril, enalapril etc.) are contra-indicated in the treatment of hypertension in pregnancy.
3 Enalapril (10 to 40 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses) may be replaced by captopril (100 mg/day in 2 divided

doses).

292

11. Other conditions

– In patients with isolated hypertension or mild pre-eclampsia
• Before 37 weeks of amenorrhoea: rest and observe as above.
• After 37 weeks, if there is intrauterine growth retardation: delivery, vaginally or by caesarean section depending on the cervical assessment. If there is no growth retardation, induce delivery as soon as the cervix is favourable.
• If the diastolic pressure is ≥ 110 mmHg: methyldopa PO or atenolol PO as below.
– In patients with severe pre-eclampsia (hypertension + massive proteinuria + significant oedema)
• Urgent delivery within 24 hours, vaginally or by caesarean section depending on the cervical assessment.
• Try to reduce the risk of eclampsia prior to delivery: magnesium sulphate by IV infusion: 4 g diluted in 0.9% sodium chloride over 15 to
20 minutes, then 1 g/hour for 24 hours following delivery or the last seizure.
Monitor urine output. Stop the treatment if urinary output is less than 30 ml/hour or 100 ml/4 hours.
Before each injection, verify the concentration written on the ampoules: there is a risk of potentially fatal overdose. Always have calcium gluconate ready to reverse the effects of magnesium sulfate in the event of toxicity.
Monitor patellar tendon reflexes every 15 minutes during the infusion. If the patient has malaise, drowsiness, difficulty speaking, or loss of patellar reflexes: stop the magnesium sulfate infusion and immediately give 1 g of calcium gluconate by slow, direct IV (over 5 to 10 minutes).
• If the diastolic pressure is ≥ 110 mmHg: methyldopa PO: initially 500 to 750 mg/day in 2 to 3 divided doses for 2 days, then increase gradually if necessary by 250 mg every 2 to 3 days, until the optimal dose is reached, usually 1,5 g/day. Do not exceed 3 g/day. or atenolol PO: 50 to 100 mg once daily in the morning
Do not stop treatment abruptly, reduce doses gradually.
When oral treatment is not possible: hydralazine by slow IV infusion (ampoule of 20 mg/ml, 1 ml): 4 ampoules in 500 ml of 0.9% sodium chloride (do not use glucose solution). Increase the rate progressively to 30 drops/minute. Adjust the rate of the infusion depending on the blood pressure without allowing the diastolic pressure to drop below 90 mmHg.
– In patients with eclampsia
• Urgent delivery within 12 hours, vaginally or by caesarean section depending on the cervical assessment and of the condition of the foetus.
• Treatment of seizures: magnesium sulfate IV infusion (see seizures during pregnancy, page 25).
• Nursing, hydration, monitor urinary output (insert an urinary catheter); oxygen (4 to 6 litres/minute).
• Anti-hypertensive treatment only if the diastolic pressure is ≥ 110 mmHg as in preeclampsia (see above).
• Postpartum: continue the magnesium sulfate for 24 hours following delivery or the last seizure, continue anti-hypertensive treatment if the diastolic pressure remains above 110 mmHg, monitor urinary output.

293

11

Heart failure

Heart failure
Heart failure is defined as the inability of the myocardium to provide normal haemodynamic function.
Left-sided heart failure (often secondary to coronary or valvular heart disease, and/or arterial hypertension) is the most common form.
There are two types:
– chronic heart failure with insidious onset
– acute heart failure, which is life threatening, presents either as acute pulmonary oedema or as cardiogenic shock.

Clinical features
– Left-sided heart failure secondary to left ventricular failure:
• fatigue and/or progressive dyspnoea, occurs on exertion and then at rest
(accentuated by the decubitus position, preventing the patient from lying down)
• acute pulmonary oedema: acute dyspnoea, laryngeal crackles, cough, frothy sputum, anxiety, pallor, varied degrees of cyanosis, feeble rapid pulse, wet rales in both lung fields, muffled heart sounds, often with cardiac gallop
– Right-sided heart failure secondary to right ventricular failure:
• oedema of the lower limbs, jugular venous distention, hepatomegaly, hepatojugular reflux
• ascites in advanced stages
Rarely isolated, this is often a consequence of left ventricular failure.
– Global heart failure secondary to failure of both ventricles:
• left and right-sided signs. Signs of right ventricular failure are often the most prominent. Treatment of acute heart failure (acute pulmonary oedema and cardiogenic shock) – First case: blood pressure is maintained
• Place the patient in the semi-reclined position with legs lowered.
• Give high-flow oxygen
• Reduce pulmonary pressure with combination furosemide + morphine + rapidlyacting nitrate derivatives: furosemide IV (onset of action in 5 minutes and peak effect in 30 minutes): 40 to
80 mg/injection, to be repeated every 2 hours according to clinical evolution.
Monitor blood pressure and urine output.
+ morphine: according to severity 3 to 5 mg by slow IV injection or 5 to 10 mg by SC injection + glyceryl trinitrate sublingual: 0.25 to 0.5 mg. Monitor blood pressure. Repeat after
30 minutes if necessary, only if the systolic blood pressure remains above 100 mmHg.
• In certain serious cases, if none of these drugs are available, bleed off 300 to 500 ml of blood over 5 to 10 minutes from the basilic vein (in the elbow fold) and monitor the blood pressure.
– Second case: blood pressure collapsed, see cardiogenic shock, page 21.
294

11. Other conditions

Treatment of chronic heart failure
The objective is to improve the prognosis and quality of life.
– Dietary modification: reduce salt intake to limit fluid retention, normal fluid intake
(except in the case of anasarca: 750 ml/24 hours).
– Treatment of fluid retention

• Initial therapy: furosemide PO
During congestive episodes: 40 to 120 mg once daily. When the congestive episode is controlled, reduce the dose to 20 mg once daily.
• The dose can be increased (up to 240 mg/day). If these doses are still ineffective, adding hydrochlorothiazide PO (25 to 50 mg/day for several days) may be considered. • In case of treatment failure and in the absence of severe renal impairment, furosemide may be combined with spironolactone PO: 25 mg once daily.
• If present, drainage of pleural effusions by needle aspiration.
Note: the risks of administering diuretics include: dehydration, hypotension, hypo- or hyperkalaemia, hyponatremia, and renal impairment. Clinical monitoring (hydration, blood pressure) and if possible metabolic monitoring (serum electrolytes and creatinine), should be done regularly, especially if giving high doses or in elderly patients. – Baseline treatment
• Angiotensin converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitors are the first line treatment. Start with low doses, especially in patients with low blood pressure, renal impairment, hyponatremia, or concurrent diuretic treatment. enalapril PO1: 5 mg once daily for the first week, then double the dose each week until the effective dose is reached, usually around 10 to 40 mg once daily or in 2 divided doses. Increases in the dose are made while monitoring the patient's blood pressure (the systolic pressure should remain above 90 mmHg) and blood chemistry (there is a risk of hyperkalemia2 and renal impairment).
In patients treated with diuretics, reduce the dose of the diuretic if possible while introducing ACE inhibitors.
If the patient is taking high doses of diuretics, reduce the initial dose of enalapril to half (risk of symptomatic hypotension).
Do not combine ACE inhibitors and spironolactone (risk of severe hyperkalemia).
• Digitalis glycosides are only indicated in patients with proven atrial fibrillation
(ECG).
If there are no contra-indications (bradycardia, unidentified rhythm disturbances): digoxine PO: 0.5 to 1 mg in 3 or 4 divided doses on the first day, then 0.25 mg once daily The therapeutic dose is close to the toxic dose. Do not exceed the indicated dose and give half the dose, or even a quarter (on alternate days) to elderly or malnourished patients and to patients with renal impairment.
1 Enalapril may be replaced by captopril: start with 6.25 mg three times daily for the first week, the effective dose

is usually around 50 mg twice daily. The method of increasing the dose, the precautions, and patient monitoring are the same as for enalapril.
2 Moderate hyperkalaemia is frequent, but of no concern if it remains below 5.5 mEq/l.

295

11

Heart failure

• With global and left-sided heart failure, the nitrate derivatives may be used in case of signs of intolerance to ACE inhibitors (chronic cough, renal impairment, severe hypotension). isosorbide dinitrate PO: start with 10 to 15 mg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses and increase to the effective dose, usually around 15 to 60 mg/day. Very high doses (up to 240 mg/day) may be necessary.
• Whatever the treatment prescribed, monitoring should be regular: checking clinical improvement and treatment tolerance:
- clinical monitoring consists of evaluating the weight, blood pressure, pulse
(rhythm disturbances) and the progress of signs (dyspnoea, oedema, etc.);
- laboratory monitoring is adapted according to the treatment.

Treatment of specific aetiologies
Hypertension (see page 291); anaemia (see page 37)
Cardiovascular or “wet” beriberi from vitamin B1 deficiency thiamine IM

or IV
Children: 25 to 50 mg/day for several days
Adults: 50 to 100 mg/day for several days
Then change to oral treatment with thiamine PO
Children and adults: 3 to 5 mg once daily for 4 to 6 weeks
Acute rheumatic fever
– Antibiotic treatment

benzathine benzylpnicillin IM

Children under 30 kg: 600 000 IU as a single dose
Children over 30 kg and adults: 1.2 MIU as a single dose
– Anti-inflammatory treatment
Start with acetylsalicylic acid PO: 50 to 100 mg/kg/day
If the fever or cardiac signs persist, replace with a corticosteroid: prednisolone PO
Children: 1 to 2 mg/kg/day
Adults: 60 to 120 mg/day
Continue this treatment for 2 to 3 weeks after normalisation of the erythrocyte sedimentation rate (ESR), then decrease the doses progressively (over 2 weeks).
To avoid a relapse, resume the acetylsalicylic acid treatment in parallel with the decrease in prednisolone dose. The acetylsalicylic acid treatment is continued for 2 to
3 weeks after the corticosteroids are fully stopped.
– Secondary prophylaxis
Prophylactic treatment lasts for several years (until 18 years old, even until 25 years in the case of cardiac effects; for life in the case of chronic valvular damage). benzathine benzylpenicillin IM
Children under 30 kg: 600 000 IU as a single dose every 4 weeks
Children over 30 kg and adults: 1.2 MIU as a single dose every 4 weeks

296

11. Other conditions

Endemic goitre and iodine deficiency
– Goitre is an enlargement of the thyroid gland. Endemic goitre occurs in iodinedeficient areas. Goitre can also be caused or aggravated by the regular consumption of goitrogens such as manioc, cabbage, turnips, millet etc.
– Goitre is an adaptive process: iodine is essential for the production of thyroid hormones; iodine deficiency impairs thyroid hormone synthesis; to compensate, the thyroid gland increases in volume. Thyroid function usually remains normal.
– As well as the development of goitre, iodine deficiency in pregnant women has serious consequences for the child (foetal and perinatal mortality, physical and mental retardation, cretinism). These risks must be prevented by providing iodine supplementation in iodine-deficient areas.

Clinical features
– The WHO proposes a simplified classification based on the significance of goitre:
Group 0: normal thyroid, no palpable or visible goitre
Group 1: enlarged thyroid, palpable but not visible when the neck is in the normal position Group 2: thyroid clearly visible when the neck is in the normal position
– Possible mechanical complications (rare): compression, deviation of the trachea or of the oesophagus.

Prevention and treatment
The objective of prevention is to reduce the consequences of iodine deficiency in neonates and children. Supplying iodised salt through national programmes is the recommended method of prevention.
For prevention in populations living in iodine deficient areas where iodised salt is not available and for curative treatment of patients with goitre: use iodised oil, according to national protocols. For information (according to the WHO):
Oral iodised oil as a single yearly dose
(200 mg capsule)

IM iodised oil, every 2 years using a glass syringe
(480 mg/ml ampoule)

Children under 1 year

1 capsule

240 mg (0.5 ml)

Children from 1 to 5 years

2 capsules

480 mg (1ml)

Children from 6 to 15 years

3 capsules

480 mg (1ml)

Pregnant women or women of childbearing age

2 capsules

480 mg (1ml)

Population

Curative and preventive single-doses are the same. Oral treatment is preferred. Use injectable iodised oil for prevention only if annual administration of oral iodised oil is not possible. The target populations are pregnant and breastfeeding women, women of childbearing age and children.
In children, goitre disappears after several months. It disappears more slowly (or never) in adults despite restoration of normal thyroid function in 2 weeks. Surgery is only indicated for patients with local mechanical dysfunction.

297

11

Psychological disorders

Psychological disorders
The management of patients presenting with psychological symptoms starts with the exclusion of underlying organic causes: certain neurological disorders may present like psychosis; hyperthyroidism as anxiety, a hypoglycaemic patient may be agitated etc.
Perform a clinical examination paying particular attention to a history of physical illness, even, and especially if, the patient is ‘known’ to have a history of mental illness.
Equally, patients may have physical symptoms which are rooted in mental illness: dyspnoea and heart palpitations may be signs of a panic attack (acute anxiety attack); anorexia and pain part of a depressive syndrome; delusions of organ dysfunction part of psychotic disease. It is the underlying mental disorder that must be considered and treated, after somatic causes have been excluded.
Also consider:
– Substance-related disorders: intoxication by alcohol, solvents, opiates, cannabis etc., or the withdrawal of these substances, may result in psychiatric-like symptoms
(depression, anxiety, hallucinations, behaviour disorders etc.). Their use may be concurrent to a mental disorder, but generally it is only after the substance is stopped or a weaning period completed that a diagnosis can be made.
– Culturally shaped manifestations: a behaviour that looks pathological may in fact be banal in the given context. For example, if a recently deceased person appears and speaks to an individual during the mourning period, this may be a normal phenomenon and not a delusional disorder. It is therefore important to work with an
‘informant’ (in the anthropological meaning of the word) to deal with unfamiliar cultural contexts.

Place of and use of drug therapy
– Drug therapy is only one aspect of the treatment of psychiatric patients. Treatment must also include other therapeutic measures: listening, psychotherapy, and addressing of social factors.
– Use of certain psychotropic drugs may lead to dependence associated with tolerance, and severe withdrawal syndrome on cessation. The risk of creating iatrogenic addiction must be considered.
• phenobarbital: although sometimes used as a sedative, has no indication in psychiatry and should be reserved for use in the treatment of epilepsy;
• benzodiazepines (diazepam) should only be used when there are clear medical indications. Treatment with benzodiazepines should be limited to a maximum of
2 to 3 weeks.
– All psychotropic drugs must be prescribed by a physician.
Psychotropic drugs are not indicated for children under 15 years of age.
During pregnancy and breastfeeding, psychotropic drugs should only be prescribed in case of absolute necessity and at the lowest effective dose.
Diazepam is strictly contra-indicated in patients with respiratory impairment and clomipramine is contra-indicated in patients with cardiac arrhythmia or with a recent history of myocardial infarction.

298

11. Other conditions

Clinical features and treatment
Anxiety
Patients with anxiety present with both psychological (unexplained fear, fear of dying or going crazy etc.) and physical symptoms (palpitations, difficulty in breathing, feeling of general malaise, hyperventilation). Anxiety may be acute, overwhelming the psychological functioning or persistant.
– Anxiety may be isolated:
• If reassurance fails (one on one with the patient, listening in a understanding and reassuring manner) to resolve an acute anxiety attack or panic attack, treat with diazepam: 5 to 10 mg PO or 10 mg IM, to be repeated after 1 hour if necessary
• Reactionary anxiety, if incapacitating, may sometimes justify a short-term treatment with diazepam PO: 5 to 15 mg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for a few days
– Always look for an underlying mental disorder:
• Anxiety is a constant feature of depression. In addition to antidepressant treatment, give diazepam PO: 5 to 15 mg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses for the first 2 weeks of treatment • Anxiety during psychosis is relieved with chlorpromazine PO: 25 to 150 mg in 2 or
3 divided doses or during a crisis, chlorpromazine IM: 25 to 50 mg
• Anxiety is a characteristic feature of traumatic stress disorders that requires specific treatment (see below, post-traumatic stress disorder).

Depression
Symptoms of depression are common following a death or a significant loss
(incarceration, population displacement etc.), initial treatment should not be with antidepressants. In these cases, start with supportive care and treatment with anxiolytics. Depression is characterised by a set of symptoms that vary, but occur over a period of at least 2 weeks and include a change in the usual functioning of the individual.
Symptoms include: sadness, thoughts of death, loss of interest and pleasure, fatigue, slowing or agitation, sleep disturbances, loss of appetite, feelings of worthlessness or guilt, poor concentration, anxiety.
Antidepressants should only be prescribed if the patient can continue treatment for at least 6 months and if regular follow-up is possible (support, monitoring of compliance and clinical evolution):
– either clomipramine PO: initial dose of 25 mg once daily, to be progressively increased
(over several days) to 75 to 150 mg once daily
– or, if available, fluoxetine PO (which does not have the same adverse cardiac effects):
20 mg once daily
These dosages must be maintained for 6 months. Be aware that the adverse effects of clomipramine and fluoxetine appear in the first days of treatment while the therapeutic effects are not seen for 3 to 4 weeks. This must be clearly explained to the patient.
Suicide risk is increased from the 10th to 15th days of treatment. Diazepam may be added to the treatment, particularly in patients with severe depression, severe anxiety or incapacitating insomnia: diazepam PO: 5 to 15 mg/day in 2 or 3 divided doses, for a maximum of 2 weeks.

299

11

Psychological disorders

Post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD)
At least 1/3 of individuals who have been exposed to traumatic events (witnesses or victims of physical assault or rape or of natural disasters) develop long term problems.
These problems (unexplained somatic complaints, anxiety, depression, behaviour disorders) are often the cause of repeated consultations.
PTSD includes both psychological and physical symptoms that persist for more than 1 month after the traumatic event.
There are 3 principle groups of symptoms:
– Intrusion
The patient describes:
• intrusive images or thoughts linked to the traumatic event despite efforts to block them out,
• recurrent distressing dreams linked to the traumatic event,
• flashback episodes during which the patient feels as if he relives part of the traumatic event.
– Avoidance
The patient tries to avoid:
• everything that might be associated with the trauma (places, situations, people),
• having thoughts about the trauma: alcohol, psychotropic drugs or toxic drugs may be used for this purpose.
– Increased arousal anxiety, insomnia, exaggerated startle response, panic attacks; sometimes hypertension, sweating, trembling, tachycardia, headache etc.
Other symptoms:
– Behavioural
Avoidance of social and family relationships, diminished interest and participation in usual activities, drug and alcohol use.
– Affective
Sadness, irritability, difficulty controlling emotions, outbursts of anger, feelings of being misunderstood, a sense of foreshortened future.
– Physical
• physical expression of anxiety: fatigue, gastrointestinal disturbances, pain;
• panic attacks: sudden onset of dyspnoea with tachycardia, palpitations, trembling, tightening of the chest, feeling that one is going to die or go crazy;
• conversion disorders: pseudoparalysis, pseudoseizures.
– Cognitive
Difficulty concentrating or with memory.
Symptoms may appear immediately or several months after the traumatic event. Once symptoms have persisted for more than 1 month, they rarely resolve spontaneously. A true depressive syndrome may appear secondarily. Psychological intervention should be a priority.

300

11. Other conditions

Psychological interventions
– It is important to make the patient understand that his symptoms are part of an understandable reaction to a very abnormal event.
– The patient has to be reminded that improvement will take time and that he will not forget the event, but that the memories will become less and less painful.
– The patient should be encouraged to describe his experience in a supportive and understanding setting (not only what happened, what he saw, heard or felt), but also his emotions and thoughts. The session should be managed with tact. Avoid:
• giving an opinion or judging, expressing personal opinions;
• reassurance or denying guilt (‘it isn’t your fault, at least you survived’) as this only devalues what the patient expresses;
• over active exploration of the patient’s emotions (it is up to the patient to decide how far they want to go).
– If available, participation in group therapy may be beneficial. If these different measures do not help the patient, specialized individual treatment is recommended.
Behavioural treatment
It is important to assure the patient’s physical and material security, to encourage abstinence from alcohol and toxic substances (which may aggravate symptoms), and to encourage the patient to participate in social activities and peer support and to help him imagine objectives for the future.
Treatment with phychotropic drugs
Benzodiazepines must be used very cautiously: they are not very effective and rapidly lead to dependence (see place of and use of drug therapy, page 298). They may be useful for a short period of time in patients with insomnia.
Clomipramine is effective against anxiety and increased arousal, and may reduce flashbacks. It is indicated if the symptoms persist despite the therapeutic measures described above or if depression complicates the clinical picture:
– either clomipramine PO: initial dose of 25 mg once daily, to be progressively increased
(over several days) to 75 to 150 mg once daily
– or, if available, fluoxetine PO (which does not have the same adverse cardiac effects):
20 mg once daily
These dosages must be maintained for 6 months. Be aware that the adverse effects of clomipramine and fluoxetine appear in the first days of treatment while the therapeutic effects are not seen for 3 to 4 weeks. This must be clearly explained to the patient. In some cases, specific interventions during the first days following the traumatic event may reduce the severity and duration of symptoms. If there are no mental health specialists in the field, the sections psychological treatment and behavioural treatment may prove useful.

301

11

Psychological disorders

Psychosis
An acute or chronic pathological state characterised by the presence of delusional thoughts: the patient is convinced of things that are beyond reality (e.g. hallucinations, ideas of persecution etc.). The delusions are sometimes associated with ego splitting (in schizophrenia or brief psychotic disorders): there is a loss of coherence between the affect, thoughts and behaviour and a lack of continuity in thoughts and speech.

Symptoms are improved with the use of haloperidol PO (3 to 10 mg/day) that must be prescribed for an extended period of time. If extra-pyramidal adverse effects occur, it may be helpful to add biperiden PO (2 mg 1 to 3 times/day). Treatment must include psychotherapy and social therapy and, whenever available, care by mental health specialists (particularly if there is a risk of confusion with culturally shaped manifestations (trance like states or possession may occur).

Agitation
Psychomotor agitation requires a diagnostic process which is rarely immediately possible. – If possible, try to calm the patient down in a quiet place, with only 2 people present.
Start by talking about physical symptoms: “you aren’t feeling well, I am going to take your blood pressure” and then proceed with the examination. Try to identify if the person is oriented (confusion) and coherent (psychosis).
– Do not forget medical causes (e.g. neurological disorders) and toxic causes
(intoxication, withdrawal).
– For patients with moderate agitation without respiratory difficulty: diazepam PO or IM: 10 mg to be repeated after 30 to 60 minutes if necessary.
– For patients with significant agitation and/or signs of psychosis (loss of contact with reality, delirium): chlorpromazine PO or IM: 25 to 50 mg to be repeated a maximum of 3 times in 24 hours Insomnia
– ‘Insomnia’ linked to life conditions (life on the streets, in institutions etc.): there is no specific treatment.
– ‘Insomnia’ linked to a physical problem: do not give sedatives, treat the cause (e.g. give analgesics for pain).
– ‘Insomnia’ linked to drug therapy (corticosteroids) or use of toxic substances (alcohol etc.): treatment is adapted on an individual basis.
– ‘Insomnia’ linked to a mental disorder (depression, anxiety, post-traumatic stress disorder, delusional state): symptomatic treatment for no more than 2 weeks may be given (diazepam PO: 5 to 10 mg once daily at night). The underlying cause must be treated. – Isolated insomnia, usually linked to a particular event: symptomatic treatment with diazepam PO: 5 to 10 mg once daily at night for no more than 2 weeks.

302

Annexes
The interagency emergency health kit
Annex 2 (WHO)

305

Practical advice for writing medical certificates in the event of sexual violence

312

List of the drugs mentioned in this guide, including the International Nonproprietary Names (INN)

315

Main references

318

Index

320

Assessment and treatment of diarrhoea

Annex 2:
Assessment and treatment of diarrhoea53
A-2.1

Assessment of diarrhoeal patients for dehydration
Table 1: Assessment of diarrhoea patients for dehydration

A

B

C

1. Look at:
Conditiona
Eyesb
Thirst

2. Feel:
Skin pinchc
3. Decide:

4. Treat:

Well, alert

Restless, irritable

Lethargic or unconscious

Normal

Sunken

Sunken

Drinks normally, not thirsty Thirsty, drinks eagerly

Drinks poorly or not able to drink Goes back quickly

Goes back slowly

Goes back very slowly

The patient has no signs of dehydration Use Treatment Plan A

If the patient has two or more signs in B, there is some dehydration
Weigh the patient, if possible, and use
Treatment Plan B

If the patient has two or more signs in C, there is severe dehydration
Weigh the patient and use
Treatment Plan C
Urgently

a

Being lethargic and sleepy are not the same. A lethargic child is not simply asleep: the child's mental state is dull and the child cannot be fully awakened; the child may appear to be drifting into unconsciousness. b In some infants and children the eyes normally appear somewhat sunken. It is helpful to ask the mother if the child’s eyes are normal or more sunken than usual. c The skin pinch is less useful in infants or children with marasmus or kwashiorkor or in obese children. 53

Department of Child and Adolescent Health and Development. The treatment of diarrhoea - a manual for physicians and other senior health workers. Geneva: World Health Organization; 2005.

305

The Interagency Emergency Health Kit

A-2.2

Treatment of acute diarrhoea (without blood)

Treatment Plan A: treat diarrhoea at home
Use this plan to teach the mother how to:

♦
♦
♦

prevent dehydration at home by giving the child more fluid than usual; prevent malnutrition by continuing to feed the child, and why these actions are important; recognize signs indicating that the child should be taken to a health worker.

The four rules of Treatment Plan A:
Rule 1:
Give the child more fluids than usual, to prevent dehydration

♦
♦

♦

♦

Use recommended home fluids. These include: ORS solution, salted drinks (e.g. salted rice water or a salted yogurt drink), vegetable or chicken soup with salt.
Avoid fluids that do not contain salt, such as: plain water, water in which a cereal has been cooked (e.g. unsalted rice water), unsalted soup, yoghurt drinks without salt, green coconut water, weak tea (unsweetened), unsweetened fresh fruit juice. Other fluids to avoid are those with stimulant, diuretic or purgative effects, for example: coffee, some medicinal teas or infusions.
Be aware of fluids that are potentially dangerous and should be avoided during diarrhoea. Especially important are drinks sweetened with sugar, which can cause osmotic diarrhoea and hypernatraemia. Some examples are: commercial carbonated beverages, commercial fruit juices, sweetened tea.
Use ORS solution for children as described in the box below. (Note: if the child is under
6 months and not yet taking solid food, give ORS solution or water.)

Give as much as the child or adult wants until diarrhoea stops. Use the amounts shown below for ORS as a guide. Describe and show the amount to be given after each stool is passed, using a local measure. Age

Amount of ORS to be given after each loose stool

Amount of ORS to provide for use at home

≤ 24 months

50-100 ml

500 ml/day

2 - 10 years

100-200 ml

1L/day

≥10 years

as much as wanted

2L/day

Show the mother how to mix ORS and show her how to give ORS.

♦
♦

Give a teaspoonful every 1‐2 minutes for a child under 2 years.
Give frequent sips from a cup for older children.

306

Assessment and treatment of diarrhoea

♦

If the child vomits, wait 10 minutes. Then give the solution more slowly (for example, a spoonful every 2‐3 minutes).

♦

If diarrhoea continues after the ORS packets are used up, tell the mother to give other fluids as described in the first rule above or return for more ORS.

Rule 2:
Give supplemental zinc sulfate 20 mg tab to the child, every day for 10 to 14 days
Zinc sulfate can be given as dispersible tablets. By giving zinc sulfate as soon as diarrhoea starts, the duration and severity of the episode as well as the risk of dehydration will be reduced. By continuing zinc sulfate supplementation for 10 to 14 days, the zinc lost during diarrhoea is fully replaced and the risk of the child having new episodes of diarrhoea in the following 2 to 3 months is reduced.
Rule 3:
Continue to feed the child, to prevent malnutrition

♦
♦
♦
♦

Breastfeeding should always be continued.
The infantʹs usual diet should be continued during diarrhoea and increased afterwards;
Food should never be withheld and the childʹs usual food should not be diluted;
Most children with watery diarrhoea regain their appetite after dehydration is corrected; ♦

Milk:
• Infants of any age who are breastfed should be allowed to breast‐feed as often and as long as they want. Infants will often breastfeed more than usual, encourage this;
• Infants who are not breastfed, should be given their usual milk feed (formula) at least every three hours, if possible by cup.
• Infants below 6 months of age who take breast milk and other foods should receive increased breastfeeding. As the child recovers and the supply and the supply of breast milk increases, other foods should be decreased.
• A child who is at least 6 months old or is already taking soft foods should be given cereals, vegetables and other foods, in addition to milk. If the child is over 6 months and such foods are not yet being given, they should be started during the diarrhoea episode or soon after it stops.
• Recommended food should be culturally acceptable, readily available. Milk should be mixed with a cereal and if possible, 1 ‐ 2 teaspoonfuls of vegetable oil should be added to each serving of cereal. If available, meat, fish or egg should be given.
• Foods rich in potassium, such as bananas, green coconut water and fresh fruit juice are beneficial;
−
offer the child food every three or four hours (six times a day);
−
after the diarrhoea stops, continue to give the same energy‐rich food, and give one more meal than usual each day for at least two weeks.

307

The Interagency Emergency Health Kit

Rule 4:
Take the child to a health worker if there are signs of dehydration or other problems
The mother should take her child to a health worker if the child:

♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦
♦

Starts to pass many watery stools
Vomits repeatedly
Becomes very thirsty
Is eating or drinking very poorly
Develops a fever
Has blood in the stool; or
Does not get better in three days‐

Treatment Plan B: oral rehydration therapy for children with some dehydration Table 2:
Guidelines for treating children and adults with some dehydration
Approximate amount of ORS solution to give in the first 4 hours
Age*
Weight
Quantity